JP2016193016A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To sufficiently increase a performance effect by hold information of variable display of a special pattern.SOLUTION: In a third embodiment and in a non-time-shortening game state, when a final mode of hold information is set to be a special mode in the hold information in which a first special pattern storage number (U1) becomes equal to one by entry of game balls into a firs start pocket 21, a first special pattern retained image 261 in a normal mode is displayed without exceptions on a first display part 711a, and a first special pattern variation display correspondence image changes from a normal mode to a special mode in a variable display correspondence display area 713. When a final mode of the hold information is set to be a normal mode by entry of game balls into the first start pocket 21 in a non-time-shortening game state, the first special pattern retained image 261 in a normal mode is displayed without exceptions on the first display part 711a, and the first special pattern variation display correspondence image is displayed in a normal mode in the variable display correspondence display area 713.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 108

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, and more specifically, a special chart for variably displaying a plurality of types of special symbols that can identify each of them and deriving and displaying a display result based on a start condition being satisfied. The present invention relates to a gaming machine that includes variable display means and controls a specific gaming state advantageous to a player when a predetermined specific display result is derived in the variable display means.

  Conventionally, as a gaming machine, a game ball (game medium) is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when a game medium enters a prize area (winning) such as a prize opening provided in the game area, Some prize media such as prize balls are given to players. Furthermore, based on the fact that the game ball has won (starting condition is established) in a predetermined winning area (starting winning opening), a variable display (“variation”) of a plurality of types of special symbols (identification information) that can be distinguished from each other. Special display variable display means for deriving and displaying the display result, and when a special display result (big hit symbol) predetermined in the special map variable display means is derived, a non-special game for the player Some control the special gaming state more advantageous than the state.

  In addition, when a new variable display cannot be started, such as when variable display is being executed in the special figure variable display means, and a game ball wins in the predetermined winning area, the gaming ball is in the predetermined winning area. For variable display of special symbols that have won a prize but have not yet started, information for determining whether or not to obtain the specific display result is stored as hold information in a hold storage means within a predetermined upper limit storage number range. In some cases, a hold display is displayed corresponding to each of the hold information stored in the hold storage means.

  Further, when starting the variable display of the special symbol, the variable display corresponding display means for displaying the hold display corresponding to the variable display as a variable display corresponding display in a predetermined area, and the hold stored in the hold storage means Predetermining means for deciding whether or not to change the display result of variable display to the specific display result based on information, and based on the determination result of the predetermination means, the hold display, or the A gaming machine that changes the display mode of the variable display corresponding display to a mode different from the normal mode at a predetermined timing is also proposed (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2014-113174 A

  In the gaming machine of Patent Document 1, when a start condition is established in a state where there is no holding information in the holding storage means (a game ball wins a special figure start winning area), a holding display corresponding to the holding information based on the winning is always displayed. Since the variable display of the special symbol is started without changing from the normal mode, the production effect by the holding information of the variable symbol special display has not been sufficiently enhanced.

  In view of the above-described background, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can sufficiently enhance the effect of the special symbol variable display hold information.

  The gaming machine according to the first aspect of the present invention displays the variable display result after executing the variable display by the effect means based on the start condition being satisfied, and the variable display result is the specific variable display result. A game machine that is controlled to a special gaming state advantageous to a player when the start condition is satisfied but the change display that has not started yet is determined as the specific change display result. Hold storage means for storing information to be held as hold information within a range of a predetermined upper limit storage number, and pre-determination means for determining whether or not a variable display based on the hold information becomes the specific variable display result An effect control means for controlling the effect, and during a period from the end of the special gaming state to the elapse of a predetermined period, the number of executions of the variable display per unit time is referred to as a non-time-saving gaming state. And the production control means sets the hold information as either a change target or a non-change target based on a result of the determination by the prior determination means. A setting means, a hold display control means for performing a control for displaying a hold display in a hold display area corresponding to each of the hold information stored in the hold storage means, and the hold information read from the hold storage means. Variable display corresponding display control means for performing control to display the hold display corresponding to the variable display being executed in the display area corresponding to the variable display, and there is no hold information in the hold storage means during the short-time gaming state When the hold information based on the fact that the start condition is satisfied in the state is set as the change target, the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the hold information is the first mode. The control to change to the second mode, which is different from the first mode, is not performed in the hold display area and the variable display corresponding display area, but is held in the hold storage means during the non-short game state. When the hold information based on the establishment of the start condition in the absence of information is set as the change target, the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the hold information is changed from the first mode to the first mode. The control for changing to the second mode having a different display mode is performed not in the hold display area but in the variable display corresponding display area.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to sufficiently enhance the effect of the special symbol variable display hold information.

It is a front view of the gaming machine of the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a fragmentary perspective view of the gaming machine of the first embodiment of the present invention. It is sectional drawing of the production | presentation button apparatus of the 1st Embodiment of this invention, and its periphery part. It is a block diagram of the control means of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. (A-1) of the 1st Embodiment of this invention is a figure showing the jackpot determination table for 1st special symbols, (a-2) is a figure showing the jackpot determination table for 2nd special symbols, (b) FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating a reach determination table. (A) of the first embodiment of the present invention is a diagram showing a special symbol determination table for winning big wins, (b) is a diagram showing a special symbol determining table for winning big wins, (c) is a special for lost It is a figure showing a symbol determination table. It is a figure showing the jackpot game control table of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. (A) of 1st Embodiment of this invention is a figure showing the big winning opening opening / closing control table for games per 1 length, (b) is a figure showing the big winning opening opening / closing control table for games per 2 length. (C) is a figure showing the big winning opening / closing control table for medium hit games, (d) is a figure showing the big winning opening / closing control table for short hits games. (A) of 1st Embodiment of this invention is a figure showing the big winning opening opening / closing control table for 1st specific jackpot games, (b) is a figure showing the big winning opening opening / closing control table for 2nd specific jackpot games. (C) is a figure showing the big winning opening opening / closing control table for 3rd specific jackpot games. (A) of the 1st Embodiment of this invention is a figure showing a small winning game control table, (b) is a figure showing the big winning opening opening / closing control table for small winning games. (A) of the 1st Embodiment of this invention is a figure showing a reference data determination table, (b) is a figure showing a game condition determination table. It is a figure showing the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. (A) of the first embodiment of the present invention is a diagram representing a normal symbol hit determination table, (b) is a diagram representing a normal symbol determination table, (c) is a normal variation pattern determination table, (d) Is a diagram showing an auxiliary game reference data determination table, (e) is a diagram showing an auxiliary game control table, and (f) is a diagram showing a second start port opening / closing control table. (A) of 1st Embodiment of this invention is a figure showing the structure of the 1st special symbol reservation storage area of main RAM, (b) is a figure showing the structure of the 2nd special symbol reservation storage area of main RAM, c) is a diagram illustrating a configuration of each storage unit. It is a flowchart which shows the main process in the main control board of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process in the main control board of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the input control process in the main control board of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. (A) of the first embodiment of the present invention is a flowchart showing a first big prize opening detection signal input process in the main control board, and (b) is a flowchart showing a second big prize opening detection signal input process in the main control board. It is. (A) of the 1st Embodiment of this invention is a flowchart which shows the 1st starting port detection signal input process in a main control board, (b) is a flowchart which shows the 2nd starting port detection signal input process in a main control board. . It is a flowchart which shows the winning gate detection signal input process in the main control board of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure special electricity control process in the main control board of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol memory | storage determination processing in the main control board of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot determination process in the main control board of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol determination process in the main control board of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure fluctuation pattern determination process in the main control board of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process in the main control board of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol stop process in the main control board of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot game process in the main control board of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit game process in the main control board of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit game completion | finish process in the main control board of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the common figure normal power control process in the main control board of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol memory | storage determination processing in the main control board of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process in the main control board of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol stop process in the main control board of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the auxiliary | assistant game process in the main control board of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the main process in the production | presentation control board of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process in the presentation control board of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows to the middle of the command analysis process in the presentation control board of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the command analysis process of FIG. 38 according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the number-of-holds addition process in the presentation control board of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the prefetch effect process in the effect control board of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the prefetch special figure holding | maintenance effect determination process in the effect control board of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the prefetch effect mode determination process in the effect control board of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the change effect pattern determination process in the effect control board of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the reservation number subtraction process in the production | presentation control board of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the presentation mode control process in the presentation control board of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the effect button effect control process in the effect control board of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the effect input control process in the effect control board of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure reservation effect control process in the effect control board of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. (A) of the 1st Embodiment of this invention is a figure showing the structure of sub-RAM, (b) is a figure showing the structure of the 1st special figure reservation effect storage area of sub-RAM, (c) is the figure of sub-RAM. 2 is a diagram showing the configuration of the special figure hold effect storage area, (d) is a diagram showing the configuration of each storage unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display state of the holding | maintenance display area and variable display corresponding | compatible display area in each game state of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure showing an example of the special figure pending | holding image last aspect determination table stored in sub ROM of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure showing an example of the special figure holding | maintenance effect scenario determination table stored in sub ROM of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure showing an example of the special figure holding | maintenance effect scenario determination table stored in sub ROM of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure showing an example of the special figure holding | maintenance effect scenario determination table stored in sub ROM of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure showing an example of the special figure holding | maintenance effect scenario determination table stored in sub ROM of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure showing an example of the special figure holding | maintenance effect scenario determination table stored in sub ROM of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure showing an example of the special figure holding | maintenance effect scenario determination table stored in sub ROM of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure showing an example of the special figure pending | holding image last aspect determination table stored in sub ROM of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure showing an example of the special figure holding | maintenance effect scenario determination table stored in sub ROM of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure showing an example of the special figure holding | maintenance effect scenario determination table stored in sub ROM of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure showing an example of the special figure holding | maintenance effect scenario determination table stored in sub ROM of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure showing an example of the special figure holding | maintenance effect scenario determination table stored in sub ROM of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure showing an example of the special figure holding | maintenance effect scenario determination table stored in sub ROM of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure showing an example of the special figure holding | maintenance effect scenario determination table stored in sub ROM of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure showing an example of the special figure holding | maintenance effect scenario determination table stored in sub ROM of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure showing an example of the special figure holding | maintenance effect scenario determination table stored in sub ROM of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure showing an example of the special figure holding | maintenance effect scenario determination table stored in sub ROM of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure showing an example of the production mode last mode judgment table stored in the sub ROM of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure showing an example of the production mode scenario determination table stored in sub ROM of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. (A) of a 1st embodiment of the present invention is a figure showing an example of a change production pattern judgment table divided by production mode stored in sub-ROM, (b) is production mode stored in sub-ROM It is a figure showing an example of the variation production pattern determination table of A0. It is a figure showing a mode that the prefetch special figure holding | maintenance effect of the 1st Embodiment of this invention is performed. It is a figure showing a mode that the prefetch special figure holding | maintenance effect of the 1st Embodiment of this invention is performed. It is a figure showing a mode that the prefetch special figure holding | maintenance effect of the 1st Embodiment of this invention is performed. It is a figure showing a mode that the prefetch special figure holding | maintenance effect of the 1st Embodiment of this invention is performed. It is a figure showing a mode that the prefetch special figure holding | maintenance effect of the 1st Embodiment of this invention is performed. It is a figure showing a mode that the prefetch special figure holding | maintenance effect of the 1st Embodiment of this invention is performed. It is a figure showing a mode that the prefetch special figure holding | maintenance effect of the 1st Embodiment of this invention is performed. It is a figure showing a mode that the prefetch special figure holding | maintenance effect of the 1st Embodiment of this invention is performed. It is a figure showing a mode that the prefetch special figure holding | maintenance effect of the 1st Embodiment of this invention is performed. It is a figure showing a mode that the prefetch special figure holding | maintenance effect of the 1st Embodiment of this invention is performed. It is a figure showing a mode that the prefetch special figure holding | maintenance effect of the 1st Embodiment of this invention is performed. It is a figure showing a mode that the prefetch special figure holding | maintenance effect of the 1st Embodiment of this invention is performed. It is a figure showing a mode that the prefetch special figure holding | maintenance effect and button effect of the 1st Embodiment of this invention are performed. It is explanatory drawing explaining the game content displayed with the effect display apparatus of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing explaining the game content displayed with the effect display apparatus of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing explaining the game content displayed with the effect display apparatus of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing explaining the game content displayed with the effect display apparatus of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing explaining the game content displayed with the effect display apparatus of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing explaining the game content displayed with the effect display apparatus of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing explaining the game content displayed with the effect display apparatus of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure showing a mode that the prefetch special figure holding | maintenance effect of the 1st Embodiment of this invention is performed. It is a figure showing a mode that the prefetch special figure holding | maintenance effect and button effect of the 1st Embodiment of this invention are performed. It is explanatory drawing explaining the game content displayed with the effect display apparatus of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure showing a mode that the prefetch special figure holding | maintenance effect and button effect of the 1st Embodiment of this invention are performed. It is explanatory drawing explaining the game content displayed with an effect display apparatus by the special figure holding | maintenance effect scenario "0001" of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing explaining the game content displayed with an effect display apparatus by the special figure holding | maintenance effect scenario "0001" of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing explaining the game content displayed with an effect display apparatus by the special figure holding | maintenance effect scenario "0002" of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing explaining the game content displayed with an effect display apparatus by the special figure holding | maintenance effect scenario "0002" of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing explaining the game content displayed with an effect display apparatus by the special figure holding | maintenance effect scenario "1001" of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing explaining the game content displayed with an effect display apparatus by the special figure holding | maintenance effect scenario "1001" of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing explaining the game content displayed with an effect display apparatus by the special figure holding | maintenance effect scenario "1501" of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing explaining the game content displayed with an effect display apparatus by the special figure holding | maintenance effect scenario "0039" of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing explaining the game content displayed with an effect display apparatus by the special figure holding | maintenance effect scenario "0039" of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure showing a mode that the prefetch special figure reservation effect and the button effect are performed by the modification of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display state of the holding | maintenance display area and variable display corresponding | compatible display area in each game state of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing explaining the game content displayed with the effect display apparatus of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure showing an example of the special figure holding | maintenance effect scenario determination table stored in sub ROM of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure showing an example of the special figure holding | maintenance effect scenario determination table stored in sub ROM of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure showing an example of the special figure holding | maintenance effect scenario determination table stored in sub ROM of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure showing an example of the special figure holding | maintenance effect scenario determination table stored in sub ROM of the 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display state of the holding | maintenance display area and variable display corresponding | compatible display area in each game state of the 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure showing an example of the special figure holding | maintenance effect scenario determination table stored in sub ROM of the 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure showing an example of the special figure holding | maintenance effect scenario determination table stored in sub ROM of the 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure showing an example of the special figure holding | maintenance effect scenario determination table stored in sub ROM of the 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure showing an example of the special figure holding | maintenance effect scenario determination table stored in sub ROM of the 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing explaining the game content displayed with an effect display apparatus by the special figure holding | maintenance effect scenario "0501" of the 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing explaining the game content displayed with an effect display apparatus by the special figure holding | maintenance effect scenario "0501" of the 4th Embodiment of this invention.

(First embodiment of the present invention)
The first embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described below with reference to the drawings. As shown in FIG. 1, the gaming machine Y includes an outer frame (not shown) that is fixed to the island facility of the game store, and a game board mounting frame Y1 that is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame. . A game board 2 in which a game area 2A in which game balls flow down is formed is detachably attached to the game board mounting frame Y1.

  The gaming machine Y also includes a glass door Y2 that covers the gaming area 2A so as to be visible on the front side (player side) of the gaming board 2. The glass door Y2 is detachably connected to the game board mounting frame Y1 via a hinge mechanism portion H at one end side in the horizontal direction, and is supported rotatably about the hinge mechanism portion H as a fulcrum. Therefore, by rotating the glass door Y2 like a door around the hinge mechanism H as a fulcrum, the game area 2A and the front portion of the game board mounting frame Y1 can be opened and closed. A lock mechanism R that fixes the glass door Y2 to the game board mounting frame Y1 is provided on the other end side of the glass door Y2. The fixing by the lock mechanism R can be released by a dedicated key.

  Further, the glass door Y2 includes a game ball launching operation device 3 for launching a game ball toward the game area 2A by being rotated, an audio output device 73 including a speaker, and a plurality of lamps and LEDs. Illumination devices 74 to 79 for performing, and a tray 6 for storing a plurality of game balls are provided.

  The game area 2 </ b> A is partitioned by a partition member 29 attached in a state of protruding from the surface of the game board 2. The partition member 29 is disposed below the frame-shaped decorative frame 29A, a first grand prize winning port 23 described later, and a guiding member 29B constituting a guiding path for guiding the game ball to the second starting port 22 on the upper surface, and The outer rail member 29C and the inner rail member 29D have a curved shape.

  A first image display device 71 composed of a liquid crystal display is fitted inside the decorative frame 29 </ b> A, and a center combination formed by integrating them is fitted in the central portion of the game board 2. An inner rail member 29D is disposed outside the decorative frame 29A, and an outer rail member 29C is disposed further outside the inner rail member 29D.

  The game ball launching operation device 3 includes a base 31 fixed to the glass door Y2, a launch handle 32 rotatably provided on the base 31, a touch sensor 32a attached in the launch handle 32, and launch A firing volume knob 32b that rotates in conjunction with the handle 32 and detects the rotation angle is provided. On the other hand, a game ball launching device 4 that launches a game ball in response to an operation of the game ball launching operation device 3 is provided at a position facing the tray 6 of the game board mounting frame Y1. The game ball launching device 4 includes a launch solenoid 41 that hits a game ball, and the launch solenoid 41 is connected to the game ball launch operation device 3 via a launch control board 106.

  When the player touches the launch handle 32, the touch sensor 32a detects that a person has touched the launch handle 32, and transmits a launch handle detection signal to the launch control board 106 described later. When the firing control board 106 receives the firing handle detection signal from the touch sensor 32a, the firing control board 106 permits energization of the firing solenoid 41. When the firing handle 32 is operated to change the rotation angle of the firing handle 32, the gear connected to the firing handle 32 rotates and the knob 32b of the firing volume connected to the gear rotates. A voltage corresponding to the rotation angle of the launch handle 32 detected by the launch volume knob 32 b is applied to the launch solenoid 41 of the game ball launcher 4.

  When a voltage is applied to the firing solenoid 41, the firing solenoid 41 operates according to the applied voltage. That is, a game ball is launched at a strength (hereinafter referred to as “game ball launch strength”) according to the rotation angle of the launch handle 32 (the rotation angle of the launch volume knob 32b). A game ball that has been effectively launched (normally at a predetermined game ball launch intensity) rises between the outer rail member 29C and the inner rail member 29D, enters the game area 2A, and flows down in the game area 2A. . At this time, the game ball flows down unpredictably due to a collision with a plurality of nails and windmills provided in the game area 2A.

  In the game area 2A, a plurality of (four in the present embodiment) general winning holes 27 are provided. Each general winning opening 27 is provided with a general winning opening detecting sensor 27a, and this general winning opening detecting sensor 27a calls a game ball (hereinafter referred to as winning a game ball in the general winning opening 27). ) Is detected, a predetermined prize ball (for example, 10 game balls) is paid out.

  The game area 2A is provided with a first prize gate 25 and a second prize gate 26 through which game balls can pass. The first winning gate 25 is located on the left side of the decorative frame 29A, and the second winning gate is located on the right side of the decorative frame 29A. Each winning gate 25, 26 is provided with a winning gate detection sensor 25a, 26a (first winning gate detection sensor 25a, second winning gate detection sensor 26a) for detecting a game ball. On the condition that these winning gate detection sensors 25a and 26a detect a game ball, a lottery of normal symbols is performed.

  Below the first image display device 71, at the lower part of the game area 2A, a first start port 21 that is invariable and can always be entered is provided. A series of game ball paths for guiding the game ball to the first starting port 21 is formed by a nail, a windmill, or the like. The first starting port 21 is provided with a first starting port detection sensor 21a for detecting a game ball, and the first special symbol lottery is performed on condition that the detection sensor 21a detects the game ball. . Further, when the first start port detection sensor 21a detects a game ball, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out.

  A variable second start port 22 is provided immediately below the first start port 21. The second starting port 22 is controlled by the second starting port control device 220 in either the first basic mode incapable of entering a ball or the first special mode in which a ball can be entered. The second start port 22 is also provided with a second start port detection sensor 22a for detecting a game ball, and a lottery of the second special symbol is performed on condition that the detection sensor 22a detects the game ball. . Further, when the second start port detection sensor 22a detects a game ball, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out.

  The second start-up port control device 220 includes a normal movable piece 220A composed of a rectangular door member having a rotation shaft on the lower side, and the normal movable piece 220A operates only when a predetermined condition is satisfied. To do. That is, the ordinary movable piece 220A is normally stopped (except when a predetermined condition is satisfied), with the surface being flush with the game area 2A, and the second starting port 22 is blocked. The second starting port 22 is blocked by the stopped (unactuated) normal movable piece 220A, so that the second starting port 22 is controlled to the first basic mode incapable of entering the ball.

  On the other hand, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the normal movable piece 220A rotates forward about the rotation axis and the second start port 22 is opened, so that the first start port 22 can enter the first ball. Controlled to a special aspect. At this time, the second starting port 22 is opened and the ordinary movable piece 220A protrudes from the game area 2A, so that it is possible to receive the flowing game ball and guide it to the second starting port 22. . It should be noted that the predetermined condition for the second start port control device 220 is to win a win in the above-described normal symbol lottery (hereinafter referred to as “normal symbol lottery”).

  As shown in FIG. 1, a variable first big winning opening 23 is provided on the downstream side of the second winning gate 26. The first grand prize opening 23 is a second basic mode in which game balls can not be entered by the first grand prize opening control device 230 (hereinafter, game ball entry at the first grand prize opening 23 is referred to as winning). Or it is controlled to either of the 2nd special modes which can be awarded. The first grand prize opening 23 is provided with a first grand prize opening detection sensor 23a for detecting a game ball. When the detection sensor 23a detects a game ball, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of prize balls are provided. Will be paid out.

  The first big prize opening control device 230 includes a first special movable piece 230A composed of a rectangular door member having a rotation shaft at the lower side portion, and the first special movable piece 230A satisfies a predetermined condition. It works only when you do. That is, the first special movable piece 230A is normally stopped (except when a predetermined condition is satisfied) in a state where the surface is flush with the game area 2A, and the first special winning opening 23 is blocked. By the first special movable piece 230A in the stopped state (not actuated), the first big prize opening 23 is blocked, so that the first big prize opening 23 is controlled to the second basic mode in which no prize can be won. .

  On the other hand, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the first special winning piece 23A can be won by opening the first special winning opening 23 by rotating the first special movable piece 230A forward about the rotation axis. The second special mode is controlled. At this time, since the first special winning opening 23 is opened and the first special movable piece 230A protrudes from the game area 2A, the flowing game balls are received and guided to the first special winning opening 23. Is possible. The predetermined condition for the first grand prize opening control device 230 is the lottery of the first special symbol or the lottery of the second special symbol (hereinafter, the lottery of the first special symbol or the lottery of the second special symbol). When referring to both, it is a collective term called “special symbol lottery”) and winning a special prize (big win or small win).

  Further, a variable second big prize opening 24 is provided in the vicinity of the second prize winning gate 26 of the decorative frame 29A. The second grand prize opening 24 can be entered in the third basic mode in which it is impossible to enter a ball (hereinafter referred to as winning a game ball in the second major prize opening 24) by the second grand prize opening control device 240. The third special mode is controlled. The second big prize opening 24 is also provided with a second big prize opening detection sensor 24a for detecting a game ball. A predetermined number (for example, 15 pieces) is provided on condition that the detection sensor 24a detects a game ball. ) Will be paid out.

  The second big prize opening 24 is basically controlled to the third basic mode, but is controlled to the third special mode only when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The second prize winning port control device 240 includes a second special movable piece 240A formed of a wing-like member, and is normally stopped (except when a predetermined condition is satisfied). By the second special movable piece 240A in the stopped state (not actuated), the second big prize opening 24 is blocked, so that the second big prize opening 24 is controlled to the third basic mode in which no prize can be won. Yes. When the predetermined condition is established, the second special winning opening 24 is opened by rotating one wing-like member constituting the second special movable piece 240A to the right with the lower base end as a center, and the second special winning prize 24 is opened. The mouth 24 is controlled to the third special mode in which a prize can be won. It should be noted that the predetermined condition for the second grand prize opening control device 240 is to win a special prize (big hit or small win) in the special symbol lottery described above.

  In addition, the game machine Y is provided with various effect devices that execute effects. In the present embodiment, the effect device includes a first image display device 71, a second image display device 72, an audio output device 73, effect lighting devices 74 to 79, and an effect accessory device 80.

  The first image display device 71 is composed of a 10-inch liquid crystal display, and is provided on the game board 2 through the decorative frame 29A as described above. The first image display device 71 displays various still images and moving images to display images. Produce by. In the present embodiment, a liquid crystal display is used as the first image display device 71, but other types of display devices such as a plasma display and an organic EL display can also be used.

  The second image display device 72 is constituted by a 4-inch liquid crystal display, and is attached to the decorative frame 29A on the front side of the first image display device 71 so as to be able to be raised and lowered. In the present embodiment, the second image display device 72 is configured by a liquid crystal display as in the case of the first image display device 71, but other types of display devices such as a plasma display and an organic EL display are used. You can also.

  The sound output device 73 is provided on the glass door Y2, and produces a sound effect by outputting BGM (background music), SE (sound effect), and the like, and is composed of a set of speakers.

  The lighting devices for performance 74 to 79 are provided on the glass door Y2, emit light, and perform lighting effects by changing the light irradiation direction and the light emission color. The illumination device 74 is provided at the center of the upper end of the glass door Y2 (hereinafter, the illumination device 74 is referred to as “first illumination device 74”), and the illumination device 75 is provided on the left side of the upper end of the glass door Y2 (hereinafter, illumination device). 75 is referred to as “second illumination device 75”), and the illumination device 76 is provided on the right side of the upper end of the glass door Y2 (hereinafter, the illumination device 76 is referred to as “third illumination device 76”). The lighting device 77 is provided from the left end side of the glass door Y2 to the left half of the tray 6 (hereinafter, the lighting device 77 is referred to as “fourth lighting device 77”), and the lighting device 78 is connected to the glass door Y2. It is provided from the right end side to the right half of the tray 6 (hereinafter, the lighting device 78 is referred to as “fifth lighting device 78”). The lighting device 79 is provided in a substantially cross shape around the effect button device 10 of the tray 6 to be described later (hereinafter, the lighting device 79 is referred to as a “sixth lighting device 79”). The second lighting device 75 and the third lighting device 76 are each movable and can rotate outward.

  The effect accessory device 80 is attached to the upper portion of the decorative frame 29A, and includes a drive unit 80b made of a motor and a decorative member 80A connected to the drive unit 80b. When the drive unit 80b is driven and the decorative member 80A is activated, an effect by the operation of the decorative member 80A is executed. The decorative member 80A simulates a part of the face of a predetermined character, and when the driving unit 80b is driven, the decorative member 80A descends, blocks the central portion of the screen of the first image display device 71, and rises to the original. Return to position.

  In addition, the gaming machine Y includes a selection button device 9 and an effect button device 10 as input devices related to the effect. As shown in FIG. 2, the selection button device 9 and the effect button device 10 are provided on the tray 6.

  The selection button device 9 is connected to an operable selection button 9A and a selection button 9A, and includes a selection button detection switch 9a that detects an operation of the selection button 9A. The selection button 9A includes an upper button 91A, a left button 92A, a lower button 93A, and a right button 94A. Each button 91A-94A is provided in the state which protruded from the saucer 6 so that a press was possible. The selection button detection switch 9a is connected to the upper button 91A to detect the operation of the upper button 91A, and the left button detection is connected to the left button 92A to detect the operation of the left button 92A. The switch 92a includes a lower button detection switch 93a connected to the lower button 93A to detect an operation of the lower button 93A, and a right button detection switch 94a connected to the right button 94A to detect an operation of the right button 94A. . Each button detection switch 91a, 92a, 93a, and 94a will output a detection signal, if the operation of the corresponding button is detected. Specifically, the upper button detection switch 91a outputs an upper button detection signal, the left button detection switch 92a outputs a left button detection signal, the lower button detection switch 93a outputs a lower button detection signal, and detects a right button. The switch 94a outputs a right button detection signal. In addition, an upper button detection signal and a left button detection signal are output, and a lower button detection signal and a right button detection signal are collectively referred to as a “selection button detection signal”.

  The effect button device 10 includes an effect button 10A that can be operated and an effect button detection switch 10a (see FIGS. 4 and 5) that is connected to the effect button 10A and detects an operation of the effect button 10A. The effect button 10A is made of a cylindrical transparent member, and is provided so as to be capable of being pressed in the axial direction while protruding from the tray 6. An effect button LED 10B (see FIGS. 4 and 5) capable of emitting light and an effect button vibration device 10C (see FIGS. 4 and 5) are arranged inside the effect button 10A, that is, inside the cylindrical transparent member. Yes. When the effect button detection switch 10a detects the operation of the effect button 10A, the effect button detection switch 10a outputs an effect button detection signal to the effect control board 102 described later. The effect button vibration device 10 </ b> C is configured to vibrate the effect button 10 </ b> A when supplied with a driving voltage from the lamp control board 104.

  The tray 6 is also provided with a ball lending device 61 that can be operated to lend out game balls and a return device 62 that can be operated to return a predetermined card or the like.

  The effect device performs various effects according to the progress (state) of the game. An effect that is frequently performed during a game is that an effective game ball enters the first start port 21 or the second start port 22 of the game ball (hereinafter, the first start port 21 and the second start port of the game ball). This is a lottery effect performed in response to a special symbol lottery based on the game ball entry in 22 (referred to as winning). The lottery effect by the first image display device 71 is basically performed at the time of a variable effect performed at the time of a special symbol variable display, which will be described later, and a special symbol stop display after the special symbol variable display. It consists of stop production.

  In the variation effect, the effect symbol is changed in a predetermined manner for a predetermined time, and the effect symbol is changed, and in the stop effect, the effect symbol is stopped and the lottery effect is ended, and the special symbol is selected. The stop display of the effect design which can show the result of is performed.

  When the effect symbol is composed of a plurality of decoration symbols, the stop display of the effect symbol is the stop display of all the decoration symbols. For example, the decorative symbol variation display and the decorative symbol stop display are performed in the left region, the central region, and the right region of the screen of the first image display device 71 and the like. In this case, the arrangement of the decorative symbols arranged on the predetermined effective line when the stop display of all the decorative symbols is completed can correspond to the result of the special symbol lottery. However, although the lottery effect is performed corresponding to the special symbol lottery, since it is only an “effect” for the special symbol lottery, the arrangement of the decorative symbols on the active line when the effect symbol is stopped and displayed is not necessarily the special symbol lottery. It does not necessarily represent the result of symbol lottery (a special symbol that is stopped). In this way, when the decorative symbols are displayed in the left region, the central region, and the right region, the decorative symbols displayed in the left region are displayed in the left symbol, and the decorative symbols displayed in the right region are displayed in the right symbol and the central region. The decorated design is called the middle design.

  In the variable display of each decorative symbol, a plurality of decorative symbols are regularly moved from the next to the next in a predetermined direction (for example, from top to bottom) for a predetermined time from the start of the variable display to the stop display ( Scroll). This scroll display gives the player the impression that a lottery is currently being performed.

  There are various ways of displaying the effect symbols. For example, the decorative symbols may move at a high speed at the beginning and stop while gradually decelerating at the end, or may suddenly stop without decelerating. In addition, for example, there is a mode in which the left symbol, the right symbol, the middle symbol are stopped in this order, a left symbol and the right symbol are simultaneously stopped, a middle symbol is finally stopped, and a three effect symbols are simultaneously stopped. .

  Further, in a predetermined portion other than the game area 2A in the game board 2, a symbol display device including a first special symbol display device 11, a second special symbol display device 12, and a normal symbol display device 13, a first special symbol hold display device. 14, a hold display device comprising a second special symbol hold display device 15 and a normal symbol hold display device 16 is provided.

  The first special symbol display device 11 is a variable display device that displays the result of a lottery of the first special symbol performed on the condition that a game ball wins at the first starting port 21, and the second special symbol display device 12 This is a variable display device that displays the result of a lottery of the second special symbol performed on condition that a game ball wins at the second starting port 22. One or more special symbols are set in advance for the lottery result of each special symbol, and when the special symbol lottery is performed, the special symbol corresponding to the lottery result is stopped on the special symbol display devices 11 and 12. Displayed with status. That is, the special symbol stop display on the special symbol display devices 11 and 12 is a notification of the result of the special symbol lottery.

  The special symbol display devices 11 and 12 have, for example, a plurality of LEDs, respectively. When the jackpot is won, a specific LED corresponding to the jackpot is turned on. LED lights up. In this way, external symbols such as characters, figures and patterns that appear when the LEDs included in the special symbol display devices 11 and 12 are lit constitute a special symbol. In this way, the special symbol always fluctuates for a predetermined time before it stops. That is, a special symbol display is performed for one special symbol lottery, and a special symbol variation display and a special symbol stop display are performed in one special symbol display.

  The normal symbol display device 13 is a variable display device that displays a result of a normal symbol lottery performed on condition that the game ball passes (enters) the first winning gate 25 or the second winning gate 26. A normal symbol is set as the result of the normal symbol lottery. When the normal symbol lottery is performed, the normal symbol corresponding to the lottery result is displayed in a stopped state on the normal symbol display device 13. That is, the stop display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display device 13 is a notification of the result of lottery of the normal symbol.

  The normal symbol display device 13 includes, for example, a plurality of LEDs. When winning, the specific LED corresponding to the winning is turned on, and when it is lost, the specific LED corresponding to the lost is displayed. Light. In this way, the appearances such as characters, figures, and patterns that appear when the LEDs of the normal symbol display device 13 are lit constitute a normal symbol. fluctuate. That is, the normal symbol display is performed for one normal symbol lottery, and the normal symbol variation display and the normal symbol stop display are performed in one normal symbol display.

  By the way, during the special symbol variation display or during the special game in which the special winning opening control devices 230 and 240 are operated, even if the game ball is won at the start ports 21 and 22, the special symbol variation display is immediately performed. The result of the special symbol lottery is not notified. In this case, the special symbol variation display (definite notification of the result of the special symbol lottery) is put on hold under certain conditions. As a fixed condition, an upper limit is set for the number of special symbols that can be suspended. In the present embodiment, the upper limit value is set to “4” for each of the start ports 21 and 22. That is, it is possible to hold up to four special symbol change displays for each of the start ports 21, 22, that is, the right to notify the result of the special symbol lottery. The first special symbol hold display device 14 corresponds to the first start port 21, and the second special symbol hold display device 15 corresponds to the second start port 22, and the special symbol hold display devices 14, 15 respectively. The current number of holds (U1, U2) is displayed in a predetermined manner. Similarly, for the normal symbol variation display, the upper limit number of reservations is set to four, and the number of reservations is displayed on the normal symbol hold display device 16.

  In the present embodiment, when a game ball wins at the start ports 21 and 22 during standby (a game state except during special symbol variation display and special games where the special winning opening control devices 230 and 240 are operated), The special symbol variation display is performed after the special symbol variation display is suspended for a short time.

FIG. 3 is a sectional view of the effect button device and its peripheral part.
In FIG. 3, the effect button device 10 houses an effect button 10A, an effect button LED 10B, an effect button vibration device 10C, and a coil spring 10F by a cylindrical case 10D and a ring-shaped lid 10E. The effect button 10A can move up and down within a predetermined range with respect to the case 10D.

  The effect button 10A is formed of a transparent member, and the upper surface of the cylindrical portion 10A1 is closed with a convex curved operation portion 10A2. An intermediate flange portion 10A3 that locks the reverse flange portion D2 formed on the inner periphery of the cylindrical portion 10D1 of the case 10D is formed at the upper and lower intermediate portions of the outer periphery of the cylindrical portion 10A1, and the outer periphery of the cylindrical portion 10A1 is formed. A lower flange portion 10A4 that locks one end of the coil spring 10F is formed on the lower portion. The effect button 10A is inserted into the cylindrical portion 10D1 from the lower side of the cylindrical portion 10D1 of the cylindrical case 10D, and the operation portion 10A2 protrudes from the opening 10D3 formed inside the reverse flange portion D2 of the case 10D. It is supposed to be. A lid 10E is attached and fixed to the lower end of the case 10D by screwing. The lid 10E is configured to lock the other end side of the coil spring 10F. Further, the lid body 10E restricts the lower movement of the effect button 10A that has been moved downward, thereby restricting the further downward movement of the effect button 10A.

  The light emitting portion 10B1 of the effect button LED 10B is attached to the first attachment portion 10A5 formed on the inner side of the effect button 10A by screwing via the attachment fitting 10G. The harness 10B2 of the effect button LED 10B extends to the outside through the lower opening of the effect button 10A and the opening of the lid 10E, and is electrically connected to the lamp control board 104.

  The electric motor 10C1 of the effect button vibration device 10C is attached to the second mounting portion 10A6 formed inside the effect button 10A by screwing. The electric motor 10C1 has an eccentric wheel 10C3 attached to a shaft 10C2. The eccentric wheel 10C3 is a weight whose center of gravity is deviated from the axis 10C2. When the drive voltage is supplied, the electric motor 10C1 vibrates by rotating the eccentric wheel 10C3 and transmits this vibration to the player's finger via the effect button 10A. The power cord 10C4 extends from the base end side of the electric motor 10C1 in a state where it is exposed from the opening of the lid 10E. The power cord 10C4 is electrically connected to the lamp control board 104.

A projecting piece 10A7 made of an opaque portion is attached to the lower side of the intermediate flange portion 10A3 on the outer periphery of the cylindrical portion 10A1 of the effect button 10A by fitting and bonding. The effect button detection switch 10a is attached to the case 10D by screwing. The effect button detection switch 10a is a photo switch in which the detection unit 10a1 is constituted by an issuing diode and a phototransistor, and the detection unit 10a1 protrudes to the inside of the case 10D through the through hole 10D4 of the case 10D. Screwed to 10D. The detection unit 10a1 detects that the effect button 10A has moved downward by detecting the protruding piece 10A7.
The harness 10a2 of the effect button detection switch 10a is electrically connected to the effect control board 102.

(Internal structure of control means)
Next, the control means 100 which performs control regarding the game of the gaming machine Y will be described with reference to FIG.

  The power supply board 107 is provided with a backup power supply composed of a capacitor, supplies a power supply voltage to the gaming machine Y, monitors a power supply voltage supplied to the gaming machine Y, and when the power supply voltage becomes a predetermined value or less, An interruption detection signal is output to the main control board 101. More specifically, when the power interruption detection signal becomes high level, the main CPU 101a becomes operable, and when the power interruption detection signal becomes low level, the main CPU 101a becomes inactive state. The backup power source is not limited to a capacitor, and for example, a battery may be used, and a capacitor and a battery may be used in combination.

  The main control board 101 controls the basic operation of the game. The main control board 101 includes a main CPU 101a, a main ROM 101b, a main RAM 101c, and a crystal resonator 101d. The main CPU 101a reads out a program stored in the main ROM 101b based on input signals from each detection sensor, timer, and the like, performs arithmetic processing, and directly controls each device and display device, or results of the arithmetic processing In response to this, a predetermined command is transmitted to another substrate. The main RAM 101c functions as a data work area during the arithmetic processing of the main CPU 101a.

  On the input side of the main control board 101, there are a first start opening detection sensor 21a, a second start opening detection sensor 22a, a first large winning opening detection sensor 23a, a second large winning opening detection sensor 24a, and a first winning gate detection. A sensor 25a, a second winning gate detection sensor 26a, and a general winning opening detection sensor 27a are connected, and a detection signal corresponding to each sensor is input to the main control board 101 via an input port (not shown). .

  On the output side of the main control board 101, the second start opening / closing solenoid 220B for operating the ordinary movable piece 220A of the second start opening control device 220 and the first special movable piece 230A of the first big prize opening control device 230 are operated. The first big prize opening opening / closing solenoid 230B to be operated and the second special prize opening opening / closing solenoid 240B for operating the second special movable piece 240A of the second big prize opening control device 240 are connected, and an output port (not shown) is connected. A signal for controlling each solenoid is output via Further, on the output side of the main control board 101, a first special symbol display device 11, a second special symbol display device 12, a normal symbol display device 13, a first special symbol hold display device 14, a second special symbol hold display device. 15 and the normal symbol hold display device 16 are connected, and a signal for controlling each display device is output via an output port (not shown).

  Further, a game information output terminal board 108 is connected to the output side of the main control board 101, and information relating to a predetermined game (hereinafter referred to as game information) is converted via an output port (not shown). Output as an external signal. The game information output terminal board 108 is connected to a game information display device 700 and a hall computer of the game store, and the predetermined game information (external signal) is transferred from the game information output terminal board 108 to the game information display device 700 and the hall. Sent to the computer. The predetermined game information is output (displayed) on the game information display device 700, so that the player is provided with a material for determining the game machine (unit) installed in the game store. On the other hand, predetermined game information is output (displayed / printed) by a display device or a printer connected to the hall computer, so that the game shop can grasp the operating status of each gaming machine.

  In this embodiment, the game information output terminal board 108 and the game information display device 700 are connected and the game information display device 700 and the hall computer are connected, but the connection mode is limited to this. The game information output terminal board 108 and the hall computer are connected, and the hall computer and the game information display apparatus 700 are connected to both the game information display apparatus 700 and the hall computer. Direct connection may be possible.

  The effect control board 102 controls a power saving mode that occurs in a special state in which a game effect according to the game situation or a game is not performed in a game state in which a game is performed. That is, the first image display device 71, the second image display device 72, the audio output device 73, the effect lighting devices 74 to 79, and the effect accessory device 80 that execute effects are caused to execute predetermined effects. Details of the power saving mode will be described later.

  The effect control board 102 includes a sub CPU 102a, a sub ROM 102b, a sub RAM 102c, and a crystal resonator 102d, and is connected to the main control board 101 so as to be communicable in one direction from the main control board 101 to the effect control board 102. ing. As will be described later, the main control board 101 transmits a predetermined command based on the result of the special symbol lottery to the effect control board 102, and therefore the predetermined command is input to the effect control board 102 as an input signal. An effect button detection switch 10a and a selection button detection switch 9a are connected to the input side of the effect control board 102, and an effect button detection signal indicating that the effect button 10A has been operated and the selection button 9A. A selection button detection signal indicating that the operation has been performed is input to the effect control board 102.

  The sub CPU 102a outputs a command output from the main control board 101, an effect button detection signal output from the effect button device 10, a selection button detection signal output from the selection button device 9, and an input signal from a timer (crystal oscillator). Based on the above, the program stored in the sub ROM 102b is read to perform arithmetic processing, and an effect control command is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 based on the processing. The sub RAM 102c functions as a data work area when the sub CPU 102a performs arithmetic processing.

  In the sub RAM 102c, as a characteristic part of the present embodiment, an effect button first vibration flag storage area, an effect button second vibration flag storage area, an effect button third vibration flag storage area, and a button effect executable flag storage area are provided. While being set, a button effect counter is set for determining the effective period of the effect by operating the effect button detection switch 10a.

  The payout control board 103 performs game ball launch control and game ball payout control. The payout control board 103 includes a payout CPU 103a, a payout ROM 103b, a payout RAM 103c, and a crystal resonator 103d, and is connected to the main control board 101 and the firing control board 106 so as to be capable of bidirectional communication.

  A payout ball counting switch 51a for detecting whether or not a game ball has been paid out is connected to the input side of the payout CPU 103a. Based on a payout ball detection signal from these and an input signal from a timer, a payout is made. The program stored in the ROM 103b is read out to perform arithmetic processing, and corresponding data is transmitted to the main control board 101 based on the processing.

  On the output side of the payout control board 103, a payout drive unit 51 of the payout device 5 for paying out a predetermined number of game balls from a storage tank (not shown) to the player is connected. The payout CPU 103a reads out a predetermined program from the payout ROM 103b based on the prize ball request signal transmitted from the main control board 101, performs arithmetic processing, and controls the payout device 5 to give a predetermined game ball to the player. Pay out. At this time, the payout RAM 103c functions as a data work area during the calculation process of the payout CPU 103a.

  The launch control board 106 controls the energization of the launch solenoid 41 based on information contained in the launch handle detection signal from the touch sensor 32a and the input signal from the launch volume knob 32b, and launches the game ball. In the present embodiment, the reciprocating speed of the firing solenoid 41 is set to about 99.9 (times / minute) from the frequency based on the output period of the crystal oscillator provided on the firing control board 106. Since one game ball is fired every time the firing solenoid 41 makes one reciprocation, the number of game balls fired in one minute is about 99.9 (pieces / minute).

  The lamp control board 104 includes a lamp CPU 104a, a lamp ROM 104b, a lamp RAM 104c, and a quartz crystal vibrator 104d, as in the above-described boards. On the output side, the lighting devices 74 to 79 for the production, the accessory device 80 for the production, and the production are provided. The button LED 10B and the second image display device 72 are connected. The lamp CPU 104 a performs light emission control of the effect lighting devices 74 to 79 based on a command related to effect control (hereinafter referred to as “effect control command”) transmitted from the effect control board 102. Further, the lamp CPU 104a performs drive control for the solenoid that operates the effect accessory device 80 and drive control for the solenoid that operates the second image display device 72 based on the effect control command. Furthermore, the lamp control board 104 performs light emission control of the effect button LED 10B based on the effect control command.

  The image control board 105 generates a video signal related to an image such as a moving image or a still image to be displayed on at least the first image display device 71 and the second image display device 72, and the first image display device 71 and the second image display device. The image generation unit 105B to be output to 72, the sound signal related to the sound to be output to the sound output device 73, the sound generation unit 105C to be output to the sound output device 73, the image generation unit 105B, and the sound generation unit 105C And an overall control unit 105A for controlling.

  The overall unit 105A of the image control board 105 includes an overall CPU 105Aa, an overall ROM 105Ab, an overall RAM 105Ac, and a crystal resonator 105Ad for performing image display control by the first image display device 71 and the second image display device 72.

  The overall CPU 105Aa is connected to an overall ROM 105Ab in which a control program and the like are stored, and a control program necessary for the operation of the overall CPU 105Aa is read out. When the general CPU 105Aa receives a command related to effect control such as an effect control command transmitted from the effect control board 102, the overall CPU 105Aa displays the command on the first image display device 71 and the second image display device 72 based on the command. An instruction for an image to be output is issued, and an instruction for a sound to be output from the audio output device 73 to the audio generation unit 105C is output.

  The overall RAM 105Ac is built in the overall CPU 105Aa, functions as a data work area during the arithmetic processing of the overall CPU 105Aa, and temporarily stores data read from the overall ROM 105Ab.

  The general ROM 105Ab is configured by a mask ROM, and stores a control processing program for the general ROM 105Ab, a display list generation program for generating a display list, an animation pattern for displaying an animation of a production pattern, and the like. Yes.

  This animation pattern is referred to when displaying an animation that constitutes the specific contents of an effect produced by an image, and includes animation scene information, the display order of each animation scene, and the like. The animation scene information includes weight frame (display time), target data (sprite identification number, transfer source address, etc.), drawing parameters (sprite display position, display magnification, transmittance, luminance, duty) Ratio) and the like, and various information such as a drawing method.

  The image generation unit 105B includes a VDP (Video Display Processor) 105Ba that is an image processor, a CGROM 105Bb that stores image data, and a VRAM 105Bc that temporarily stores drawing data generated from the image data. I have.

  The VDP 105Ba is connected to the CGROM 105Bb in which image data is stored, and generates drawing data as a source of a video signal (RGB signal or the like) based on the image data based on an instruction from the overall CPU 105Aa. The image data is an image (frame) to be displayed on the first image display device 71 and the second image display device 72, for example, a background image such as a scene, a character, and a dialogue that constitutes the background of the decorative design image or the decorative design, etc. This is material data representing individual images. On the other hand, the drawing data is synthetic data representing an image of the entire frame formed by combining (superimposing) individual images.

  The CGROM 105Bb includes a flash memory, an EEPROM, an EPROM, a mask ROM, and the like, and compresses and stores image data (sprites, movies), etc., consisting of a collection of pixel information in a predetermined range of pixels (for example, 32 × 32 pixels). ing. The pixel information is composed of color number information specifying a color number for each pixel and an α value indicating the transparency of the image. Further, the CGROM 105Bb stores the palette data in which the color number information for designating the color number and the display color information for actually displaying the color are associated with each other without being compressed. The CGROM 105Bb may have a configuration in which only a part of the image data is compressed without being compressed. As a movie compression method, various known compression methods such as MPEG4 can be used. The CGROM 105Bb is divided into an area for storing image data of an image to be displayed on the first image display device 71 and an area for storing image data of an image to be displayed on the second image display device 72.

  The image generation unit 105B has a crystal oscillator. The crystal oscillator outputs a pulse signal to the VDP 105Ba. The VDP 105Ba divides the pulse signal to generate a synchronizing signal (horizontal synchronizing signal / vertical synchronizing signal) for synchronizing with the first image display device 71 and the second image display device 72, and together with the video signal The data is output to the first image display device 71 and the second image display device 72.

  Next, details of various tables stored in the main ROM 101b will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIGS. 5A-1 and 5A-2 are diagrams illustrating an example of the jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination is to determine the success or failure of acquiring the right to execute the special game (whether the special prize is successful) based on the jackpot determination random number acquired based on the winning at the start ports 21 and 22. FIG. 5 (a-1) is a table that is referred to in the jackpot determination in the lottery of the first special symbol that is performed when the first starting port 21 is won (hereinafter, “the jackpot determination table for the first special symbol”). It is said). On the other hand, FIG. 5 (a-2) shows a table (hereinafter referred to as “a jackpot determination for the second special symbol” referred to in the jackpot determination in the lottery of the second special symbol that is performed when the second starting port 22 is won. Table)).

  In any jackpot determination table, a jackpot determination table (hereinafter referred to as “low probability jackpot determination table”) referred to when the jackpot winning probability described later is relatively low (set to a standard value). And a jackpot determination table (hereinafter referred to as “high probability jackpot determination table”) that is referred to when the state is relatively high (set higher than the normal value). By collating the acquired jackpot determination random number with the jackpot determination table, it is determined whether or not “big hit” is won, that is, “big hit”, “small hit” or “lost” is determined. .

  In each jackpot determination table, a jackpot determination value and a determination result are uniquely associated and stored. In other words, by comparing the acquired jackpot determination random number with the jackpot determination table, one of “big hit”, “small hit”, and “losing” is determined. When a winning other than “losing”, that is, “big win” or “small win” is won, a special game in which the big winning openings 23 and 24 are opened is executed.

  When the result of the big hit determination is “losing”, the reach determination is further performed based on the reach determination table of FIG. In the reach determination table, the reach determination value and the presence / absence of reach production are uniquely associated and stored. By comparing the acquired reach determination random number with the reach determination table, it is determined whether or not the reach effect is correct. As a result of the reach determination, when the reach is won (determined that there is a reach effect), a reach effect is performed to increase the player's expectation of winning the jackpot during the lottery effect. In the present embodiment, when “big hit” or “small win” is won, the reach effect is always executed even if the reach determination different from the big hit determination is not performed. However, when “big hit” or “small win” is won, it is possible to perform reach determination as in the case of “losing”.

  As an aspect of reach production, for example, the decorative design stops in two regions of the left region, the central region, and the right region of the first image display device 71 during the variation display of the production symbol, and the remaining one region There is a mode in which a state (so-called “reach state”) in which a decorative pattern representing a big win is generated occurs when a predetermined decorative symbol stops on a predetermined effective line. If the result of the jackpot determination is “losing”, the result of the jackpot determination is still “losing” even if this stunning specific state is reached. However, in the main lottery effect frequently performed on the first image display device 71 and the like during the game, two decorative symbols out of the three decorative symbols representing the jackpot winning are aligned, and the same as the “big hit” winning until the middle By creating this situation, it is possible to raise the player's expectation for winning the jackpot.

  In the reach production where the reach state occurs, after the reach state is established, the special design that does not show a big hit as the last production symbol stops on the active line without any other special production. In some cases, the lottery effect ends or the development effect (so-called “super reach effect”) develops after the reach state is established. Further, in the reach production, the reach state does not always occur. That is, there is also a reach effect that can give a player a sense of expectation for a big win even if a reach state does not occur.

  6A to 6C are diagrams illustrating an example of the special symbol determination table. The special symbol determination is a mode of special symbols that are stopped and displayed on the special symbol display devices 11 and 12 based on the acquired special symbol determination random numbers (special symbol type: special symbol stop symbol data / special effect symbol designation command). Is to decide.

  The special symbol determination table is largely classified according to the result of jackpot determination (big hit, small hit, and loss). That is, FIG. 6A is a table that is referred to in the special symbol determination when the result of the jackpot determination is “big hit”, and FIG. 6B is the result of the jackpot determination that is “small hit”. FIG. 6C is a table referred to in the special symbol determination when the result of the jackpot determination is “losing”.

  Furthermore, each of these tables is also classified according to the type of start opening that triggers the special symbol lottery. When the result of the jackpot determination is “losing”, the special symbol determination table is also classified according to the presence or absence of the reach effect. Each special symbol determination table stores special symbol determination values and special symbol types in association with each other. As the identification information of the special symbol type, special symbol stop symbol data and special effect symbol designating commands are set. The special symbol stop symbol data is used in the processing in the main control board 101, and the special effect symbol designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 102 at the time of the special symbol determination.

  As shown in FIGS. 6A to 6C, the special effect designating command includes 1 byte MODE data for identifying the command classification and 1 byte for indicating the command content (function). Data. As for the special effect designating command, if the MODE data is “E1H”, it means that the game ball has won the first starting port 21 (actuating the first special symbol display device 11), and the MODE data is “ "E2H" indicates that the game ball has won the second starting port 22 (actuating the second special symbol display device 12).

  FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an example of the jackpot game control table used when controlling the jackpot game. The jackpot game control table is associated with a jackpot type, that is, a special symbol type (special symbol stop symbol data). In other words, which table to use in the jackpot game is selected based on the type of special symbol.

  The jackpot game control table stores conditions for controlling the jackpot game. As a condition for controlling the jackpot game, the opening time (the period from the start of the jackpot game until the first opening of either the first big prize opening 23 or the second big prize opening 24 is performed ( OP time), opening designation command to be transmitted to the production control board 102 at the start of the opening, the type of table used for controlling the opening / closing (round game) of the first grand prize opening 23 and the second major prize opening 24, first Ending time (ED time), which is the period from the end of the last opening of either the big prize opening 23 or the second big prize opening 24 to the end of the jackpot game, and the production control board at the start of the ending An ending designation command to be transmitted to 102 is set.

  FIG. 8A to FIG. 8D are diagrams showing an example of the jackpot opening / closing control table for the jackpot game used when controlling the opening / closing of the first winning prize port 23, and FIG. 9A to FIG. FIG. 9C is a diagram illustrating an example of a big winning opening / closing control table for jackpot games used when controlling the opening / closing of the second big winning opening 24. FIG. 8 (a) is a table referred to in a first hit game that constitutes a jackpot game, FIG. 8 (b) is a table referred to in a second hit game that constitutes a jackpot game, and FIG. FIG. 8D is a table referred to in the short hit game constituting the jackpot game. On the other hand, FIG. 9A is a table referred to in the first specific jackpot game constituting the jackpot game, FIG. 9B is a table referred to in the second specific jackpot game constituting the jackpot game, FIG. ) Is a table referred to in the third specific jackpot game constituting the jackpot game.

  Conditions for controlling the opening and closing of the big winning ports 23 and 24 at the time of the big win game are stored in the big win opening / closing control table for each big hit game. As conditions for controlling the opening and closing of the big winning openings 23, 24, the type of the big winning opening for executing the jackpot game, the round number (R) which is the number of the round game, the big winning opening control device 230 in each round game, A special electric operation number (K) that is an operation number of 240 (opening of the big winning openings 23 and 24) and an opening time / closing time (operation time / non-operation time) are set.

  FIG. 10A is a diagram showing an example of the small hit game control table used when controlling the small hit game. The small hit game control table is associated with a small hit type, that is, a special symbol type (special symbol stop symbol data). That is, which table is used in the small hit game is selected based on the type of special symbol.

  The small hit game control table stores conditions for controlling the small hit game. As a condition for controlling the small win game, the opening time is a period from the start of the big win game until the first opening of either the first big winning port 23 or the second big winning port 24 is performed. (OP time), opening designation command to be transmitted to the production control board 102 at the start of the opening, type of table used for controlling opening / closing (round game) of the first grand prize opening 23 and the second major prize opening 24, Ending time (ED time), which is the period from the end of the last opening of either the 1st grand prize opening 23 or the 2nd big prize opening 24 to the end of the small hit game, and production at the start of the ending An ending designation command to be transmitted to the control board 102 is set.

  FIG.10 (b) is a table referred in a small hit game. The big winning opening / closing control table for the small hit game stores conditions for controlling the opening / closing of the big winning openings 23 and 24 during the small hit game. The conditions for controlling the opening and closing of the big prize openings 23 and 24 are the type of the big prize opening for executing the jackpot game and the operation of the big prize opening control devices 230 and 240 (opening of the big prize openings 23 and 24). A special electric operation number (K) and an opening time / closing time (operation time / non-operation time) are set.

  FIG. 11A is a diagram illustrating an example of a reference data determination table that is referred to when determining game condition data. The game condition data is identification information that represents a state of a game condition that is newly set (changed) after the jackpot game when the jackpot is won. The game condition data is associated with the state of the jackpot winning probability at the time of the special symbol lottery and the result of the special symbol lottery (special symbol stop symbol data). In other words, the table is divided according to the state of the jackpot winning probability (low probability state / high probability state). In each divided table, the type of special symbol (special symbol stop symbol data) and the game condition data Are uniquely associated and stored.

  The game condition data is composed of 2-byte data. The upper byte of the game condition data represents the status of the jackpot winning probability newly set by the jackpot winning. If it is “01H”, the winning probability of jackpot is set to a high probability state after the jackpot game, and if it is “00H”, the winning probability of jackpot is set to a low probability state after the jackpot game. On the other hand, the lower byte of the game condition data represents the start opening winning ease state newly set by the jackpot winning. If it is “01H”, the start port winning easiness is set to an easy state after the jackpot game, and if “00H”, the start port winning easiness is set to a difficult state after the jackpot game.

  FIG. 11B is a diagram illustrating an example of the game condition determination table. The game condition determination is to determine the state of the game condition that is newly set when the jackpot game ends (during the jackpot game end process). As described above, in this embodiment, the jackpot winning probability game condition and the ease of winning a prize are set as the game conditions. The table includes special data that can be executed according to the game condition data, the state of each game condition, that is, the ON / OFF of a flag (high probability flag and short time flag) indicating the state of the game condition described later and the state of the game condition. The number of symbol displays (Xa, Ja: hereinafter referred to as “executable number of times”) is uniquely associated and stored. In other words, the number of times that the special symbol display can be executed means a special symbol lottery, in other words, the specified number of times of special symbol variable display that is a notification of the result.

  FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an example of a special figure fluctuation pattern determination table that is referred to when determining a variation display mode (special figure fluctuation pattern) of a special symbol as will be described later. The special figure variation pattern is associated with the time required for the special symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “special diagram variation time”) and the type of effect.

  The special figure variation pattern determination table is classified by special figure stop symbol data (including the result of jackpot determination, presence / absence of reach effect, etc.) and the special symbol hold number (U1 or U2).

  In each table, the special figure variation pattern determination value and one or more special figure variation patterns are uniquely associated and stored. Since the special figure variation pattern is allocated with a predetermined probability set in advance, the expectation of winning a big hit is set for the special figure variation pattern.

  A start opening prize designation command and a special symbol variation pattern designation command (hereinafter referred to as a special diagram variation pattern designation command) are set corresponding to each special figure variation pattern. The start opening winning designation command is generated at the time of winning (at the time of the input control processing in step S200) and transmitted to the effect control board 102, and the special figure variation pattern designation command is used at the time of starting the variation display of the special symbol (special of step S300). Is generated and transmitted to the effect control board 102. Each command is composed of 1-byte MODE data for identifying the type of the start port and 1-byte DATA data for identifying the special figure variation pattern.

  FIG. 13A to FIG. 13F show an example of a table used when controlling a normal symbol game based on winning to the first winning gate 25 or the second winning gate 26.

  FIG. 13A is a diagram showing an example of a normal symbol lottery hit determination table. The winning determination is to determine at least success or failure (winning / winning) of right acquisition for executing the auxiliary game based on a winning determination random number acquired based on winning at the winning gates 25 and 26.

  The hit determination table is divided according to the state of ease of starting opening winnings, which will be described later. Specifically, the hit determination table is divided into a hit determination table that is referred to in a non-short-time state and a hit determination table that is referred to in a time-short state, and is stored in the main ROM 101b. By collating the acquired random number for hit determination with the hit determination table, either “winning” or “losing” is determined. That is, in each hit determination table, the hit determination value and the determination result are uniquely associated and stored, and by comparing the acquired hit determination random number with the hit determination table, One of “losing” is determined. When “winning” is won, an auxiliary game in which the second start port 22 is opened is executed.

  FIG. 13B is a diagram illustrating an example of a normal symbol determination table. The normal symbol determination is an aspect of a normal symbol that is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 13 based on a random number for normal symbol determination acquired based on a winning at the winning gates 25 and 26 (type of normal symbol: ordinary symbol Stop symbol data / ordinary effect design designation data). The normal symbol determination table is divided according to the hit determination result (win or miss), and both are stored in the main ROM 101b.

  FIG. 13C determines a variation pattern of a normal symbol (hereinafter referred to as a “normal diagram variation pattern”) associated with a time required to display a variation of the normal symbol (hereinafter referred to as a “normal diagram variation time”). It is a figure which shows the common figure fluctuation pattern determination table for this. The general-purpose fluctuation pattern determination table includes a general-purpose fluctuation pattern determination table that is referred to in the time-short state and a general-purpose fluctuation pattern determination table that is referred to in the non-time-short state. Both tables are stored in the main ROM 101b.

  By comparing the acquired random number for determining the normal pattern fluctuation pattern with the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination table, the normal pattern fluctuation pattern is determined. In the present embodiment, only one common map variation pattern is set in each table. That is, the expected value of the normal time fluctuation time in the short time state is 3.0 seconds, while the expected value of the normal time fluctuation time in the non-short time state is 15.0 seconds (see FIG. 13C).

  FIG. 13D is a diagram illustrating an example of the auxiliary game reference data determination table. This table stores data (auxiliary game reference data) that is referred to when performing an auxiliary game. As shown in FIG. 13 (d), in the auxiliary game reference data determination table, the combination of the current winning easiness state for the second start port 22 and the normal stop symbol data and the auxiliary game reference data correspond to each other. It is attached. That is, the auxiliary game reference data includes information regarding the start opening winning easiness state when the normal symbol lottery is performed and the result of the normal symbol lottery.

  FIG. 13E shows an example of the auxiliary game control table. In this table, conditions for controlling the auxiliary game are stored in association with the auxiliary game reference data. As a condition for controlling the auxiliary game, an opening time, which is a period from the start of the auxiliary game to the first opening of the second starting port 22, and the final opening of the second starting port 22 are as follows. An ending time, which is a period from the end to the end of the auxiliary game, is set. An auxiliary game control table is also stored in the main ROM 101b.

  FIG. 13F is a diagram showing an example of the second start opening / closing control table for winning. This table includes a second start port opening / closing control table (second start port opening / closing control table for non-time saving) that is referred to when the start port winning easiness is in a non-short-time state, and a second reference that is referred to in a time-short state. It consists of a start port opening / closing control table (second start port opening / closing control table for time reduction). Both tables are stored in the main ROM 101b.

  In each table, conditions for controlling the opening and closing of the second start port 22 during an auxiliary game are stored in association with the auxiliary game reference data. The conditions for controlling the opening and closing of the second start port 22 include the operation number of the second start port control device 220 (opening of the second start port 22), the normal operation number (D), and each opening time / The closing time (operation time / non-operation time) is set. In this embodiment, only one type of condition pattern is set in each table. That is, the expected opening time in the non-short-time second start opening / closing control table is 4.1, while the expected opening time in the non-time-saving second start-out opening / closing control table is 5.0 seconds. .

(Explanation of special game types)
A special game will be described. In the present embodiment, the special game in which the special winning opening control devices 230 and 240 are activated (the special winning openings 23 and 24 are opened) is executed when the “big hit” is won. It consists of “big hit games” that open and close. The jackpot game is mainly based on a difference in opening / closing modes of the big winning openings 23 and 24, “game per first long”, “game per second long”, “game per medium hit”, “game per short hit”, “first jackpot” It is divided into “game”, “second specific jackpot game” and “third specific jackpot game”.

  In the jackpot game, a round game in which the winning prize openings 23 and 24 are opened at least once is executed a predetermined number of times. In each round game, the number of times that the game can be released (hereinafter referred to as the maximum number of times of release) and the total amount of time that can be released (hereinafter referred to as the maximum release time) are set in advance. The reason that “can be released” is that the number of game balls that can be won in the big winning openings 23 and 24 during one round game is preset (for example, 9). Therefore, even if the grand prize opening 23, 24 is not opened the maximum number of times, the big prize opening 23, 24 may be closed and the round game may end. Further, even if the maximum opening time has not elapsed, the special winning openings 23 and 24 may be closed and the round game may end. It should be noted that the maximum number of times and the maximum opening time of the big winning openings 23 and 24 in each round game may or may not be unified for each jackpot game.

(Description of game conditions)
Next, game conditions that are conditions when the game progresses will be described. In the present embodiment, the game progresses under the “low probability” state or the “high probability” state for the jackpot winning probability, and the “short time” state or “non- The game progresses under the "short time" state. Note that the initial (at power-on) gaming conditions are set to a “low probability” state and a “non-time-short” state.

  In this embodiment, the “low probability” state regarding the winning probability of the jackpot means that the jackpot determination in the jackpot determination of the special symbol lottery performed on the condition that the game ball has won the first starting port 21 or the second starting port 22 It means that the winning probability is set to 1/350, which is disadvantageous for the player. Here, winning of “big hit” means acquiring a right to execute “big hit game” in a special symbol lottery. On the other hand, the “high probability” state is that the jackpot winning probability is higher than the “low probability” state, that is, set to 1/80 which is relatively advantageous to the player. Therefore, when the probability of winning the jackpot is in the “high probability” state, it is easier to win the jackpot than in the case of the “low probability” state, and the number of wins that can be won per unit time is relatively higher. It can be said that it is in a state advantageous to the person.

  The “non-short-time” state is a state in which the ease of winning a prize at the second start port 22 is normal. More specifically, in the “non-time-saving” state, the time required for displaying the variation of the normal symbol corresponding to the normal symbol lottery performed on the condition that the game ball has won the winning gates 25 and 26 (hereinafter referred to as normal symbol variation). Time) is set to 15 seconds, and the total expectation of the operation time (opening time of the second start port 22) of the second start port control device 220 that operates when the “winning” is won in the normal symbol lottery The value is set to 4.1 seconds, and the probability of winning in the hit determination for the normal symbol is set to 1/50. Note that “the total opening time” is that the second start port 22 may be opened multiple times for each win, and a game ball can be won for each win. This is because the number is limited, and when a game ball is won, it closes without waiting for the opening time.

  On the other hand, in the “short time” state, the operation time of the second start port control device 220 per unit time (the opening time of the second start port 22) is longer than in the “non-short time” state, and the second start time This means a state in which the ease of winning a prize at the mouth 22 is higher than that in the “non-short-time” state, that is, a state in which it is easier to win the second starting port 22 than in the “non-time-short” state. Since the ease of winning a prize at the second start port 22 is relatively high, the number of times that the second special symbol lottery can be executed per unit time increases. Under the same jackpot winning probability, the number of times the second special symbol lottery is executed per unit time inevitably increases the number of winning jackpots per unit time. It can be said that this is an advantageous state for the player as compared to the “non-short-time” state.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the “short time” state, the normal fluctuation time is set to 3.0 seconds, the total maximum opening time of the second start port 22 is set to 5.0 seconds, The probability of winning a win is set to 1/5. In other words, all the components of the ease of winning in the second starting port 22 are set to be more advantageous to the player than the “non-short time” state.

  In this embodiment, when a game ball wins at the start ports 21 and 22, three game balls can be obtained, and the player launches the game ball by operating the appropriate launch handle 32. However, the number of game balls possessed by the player tends to decrease. However, in the “short time” state, it is easier to win the second starting port 22 than in the “non-short time” state, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the number of game balls possessed by the player. That is, from the viewpoint of the number of game balls possessed by the player, the “short time” state is set to be more advantageous to the player than the “non-short time” state.

  In this manner, the type of jackpot game and the state of the game conditions newly set after the jackpot game (combination of the low probability state / high probability state and the non-time-short state / time-short state) are determined by winning the jackpot Is done. In view of this, the substantial jackpot type (the jackpot type based on the profit given to the player) is the type of jackpot game to be executed and the game conditions newly set after the jackpot game ends. It can be said to be a combination with the state. Therefore, hereinafter, apart from the type of jackpot based on the special figure stop symbol data, based on the combination of the type of jackpot game derived by the jackpot and the game conditions after the jackpot game, that is, based on the type of profit that the player enjoys The jackpot type can be classified.

  Specifically, in the present embodiment, a winning game is executed by winning the “game per first long”, and then the game condition is set to a “high probability” state and a “short time” state. "Per probable first long", "Game per second long" is executed, and then the game condition is set to "High probability" and "Non-short-time" state. ”,“ Medium hit game ”, then set the game condition state to“ High probability ”state and“ Short time ”state. After that, the jackpot for setting the state of the gaming condition to the “high probability” state and the “short time” state is executed, the “high probability time short / short hit” and “short win game” are executed, and then the gaming condition state is set to “high "Probability" state and "Non-temporal" state The jackpot to be set is “High probability short / short short hit”, the medium hit game is executed, and then the game condition state is set to “low probability” state and “short time” state is set to “low probability short / medium hit” (Refer to FIG. 11A). In addition, the first specific jackpot game is executed by winning, and then the jackpot for setting the state of the game condition to the “high probability” state and the “short time” state is set to “high probability short-lived first specific jackpot”, second specified jackpot The game is executed, and then the game condition is set to the “high probability” state and the “short time” state. The jackpot is set to “high probability shortage second specified jackpot”, the third specified jackpot game is executed, and then the game The jackpot that sets the condition state to the “high probability” state and the “short time” state is referred to as “a high probability short time third specific jackpot” (see FIG. 11A).

  When the jackpot is won, the normal state is set when the jackpot game starts regardless of the state before the jackpot game. That is, the winning probability of the jackpot is in a low probability state, and the ease of winning at the starting port is always in a non-time-short state during the jackpot game. Further, in this embodiment, a jackpot game is set as a special game, that is, only a “jackpot” is provided as a determination result advantageous to the player in the special symbol determination. Although a special game for opening 23 and 24 is executed, it is possible to provide a small hit that does not change the state of the game condition during the special game.

(Main processing of main control board)
The main process of the main control board 101 will be described with reference to FIG.

  When power is supplied from the power supply board 107 to the main CPU 101a, a system reset occurs in the main CPU 101a, and the main CPU 101a performs the following main processing.

  First, in step S10, the main CPU 101a performs an initialization process. In this process, the main CPU 101a reads a startup program from the main ROM 101b and initializes each storage area of the main RAM 101c in response to power-on.

  In step S20, the main CPU 101a updates the effect random number for determining the special figure fluctuation pattern in the special symbol fluctuation display composed of the reach determination random number value, the special figure fluctuation pattern determination random value, and the like.

  In step S30, the main CPU 101a updates an initial value random number including an initial value random number for jackpot determination, an initial value random number for special symbol determination, an initial value random number for hit determination, and the like. Thereafter, the processes of step S20 and step S30 are repeated until a predetermined interrupt process is performed.

(Timer interrupt processing of main control board)
The timer interrupt process of the main control board 101 will be described with reference to FIG. The following timer interrupt processing is executed by generating a clock pulse every predetermined period (4 milliseconds) by the reset clock pulse generation circuit provided on the main control board 101.

  First, in step S100, the main CPU 101a saves the information stored in the register of the main CPU 101a to the stack area.

  In step S110, the main CPU 101a performs a special game timer update process, a special symbol stop time update process, an opening time update process, an open / close time update process for the special winning openings 23 and 24, and the like. A time control process for updating an auxiliary game timer counter that performs a counter, a normal symbol variation time update process, a normal symbol stop time update process, a second opening / closing time update process, and the like is performed. .

  In step S120, the main CPU 101a performs random number update processing for the jackpot determination random number value, the special symbol determination random number value, and the hit determination random number value. Specifically, each random number counter is incremented by 1 to update the random number counter. When the addition result exceeds the maximum value in the random number range, the random number counter is reset to 0. When the random number counter makes one round, the random number is updated from the initial random number value at that time.

  In step S130, the main CPU 101a performs an initial value random number update process of adding +1 to the jackpot determination initial value random number counter, the special symbol initial value random number counter, and the hit determination initial value random number counter to update the random number counter.

  In step S200, the main CPU 101a performs input control processing. In this process, the main CPU 101a performs an input control process for determining whether or not a new valid signal is transmitted from a predetermined detection sensor. Details will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In step S300, the main CPU 101a performs the first special symbol display device 11, the second special symbol display device 12, the first special symbol hold display device 14, the second special symbol hold display device 15, and the first big prize opening control device 230. And the special figure special electric control process (special symbol related process) for performing the control (control of the special symbol system device) of the second big prize winning control device 240 is performed. Details will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In step S400, the main CPU 101a performs a normal signal power control process (normal signal control) for controlling the normal symbol display device 13, the normal symbol hold display device 16, and the second starting port control device 220 (control of the normal symbol system device). Perform symbolic processing. Details will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In step S500, the main CPU 101a performs a payout control process. In this process, the main CPU 101a has a start port (first start port 21 and second start port 22), a large winning port (first large winning port 23, second large winning port 24), and a general winning port 27. It is checked whether or not the corresponding prize ball counter exceeds “0”. If it exceeds “0”, a prize ball request signal indicating the number of prize balls corresponding to each winning opening is paid out control board 103. Send to. When a prize ball signal is transmitted, an update process for subtracting “1” from the prize ball counter related to the signal is performed.

  In step S600, the main CPU 101a uses external signal output control data for outputting information related to the game as an external signal to an external device such as the game information display device 700, the second start opening / closing solenoid 220B, and the first grand prize opening solenoid 230B. Drive control data for driving the second grand prize opening / closing solenoid 240B (second start opening / closing solenoid driving data, first big prize opening / closing solenoid driving data and second big prize opening / closing solenoid driving data), and Display control data (special symbol display data, normal symbol display data, special symbol hold display data, normal symbol hold) for displaying a predetermined symbol on the symbol display devices 11, 12, 13 and the symbol hold display devices 14, 15, 16 Display data) is created.

  In step S700, the main CPU 101a performs output control processing. In this process, first, a port output process for outputting a signal based on the external signal output control data and the drive control data created in S600 is performed. Subsequently, in order to light each LED of the symbol display devices 11, 12, and 13 and the hold display devices 14, 15, and 16, a display device output process for outputting a signal based on the display control data created in step S600 is performed. . Finally, command transmission processing for transmitting the command set in the transmission buffer of the main RAM 101c to another board is also performed.

  In step S800, the main CPU 101a restores the information saved in step S100 to the register of the main CPU 101a.

  The input control process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S210, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the main CPU 101a has input a detection signal from the first big prize opening detection sensor 23a, that is, whether or not the game ball has won the first big prize opening 23. To do. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S220, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the detection signal from the second big prize opening detection sensor 24a has been inputted, that is, whether or not the game ball has won the second big prize opening 24. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S230, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not a detection signal from the first start port detection sensor 21a has been input, that is, whether or not the game ball has won the first start port 21. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S240, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the detection signal from the second start port detection sensor 22a has been input, that is, whether or not the game ball has won the second start port 22. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S250, the main CPU 101a has input a detection signal from the first winning gate detection sensor 25a or the second winning gate detection sensor 26a, that is, the game ball has won the first winning gate 25 or the second winning gate 26. Determine whether or not. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S260, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the detection signal is input from the general winning opening detection sensor 27a, that is, whether or not the game ball has won the general winning opening 27. When the main CPU 101a receives a detection signal from the general winning opening detection sensor 27a, the main CPU 101a updates the general winning opening prize ball counter used for winning balls by adding predetermined data.

  Next, the first big prize opening detection signal input process will be described with reference to FIG. In step S211, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not there is a valid detection signal from the first big prize opening detection sensor 23a, that is, whether or not a predetermined payout condition is satisfied. If there is no valid detection signal, the processing is terminated. If there is a valid detection signal, whether or not the jackpot game is currently being played in step S212, that is, whether or not special figure special electric processing data to be described later = 3. Determine whether. This is for confirming whether or not the winning to the first big winning opening 23 has been performed illegally.

  The main CPU 101a finishes the first big prize opening detection signal input process if the big hit game is not in progress, and if in the big hit game, in step S213, the main CPU 101a sets a predetermined big prize prize ball counter to be used for the prize ball. A counter of the round winning number counter (C) for counting and updating the number of game balls won in the big winning opening (the first big winning opening 23 or the second big winning opening 24) in the round while adding and updating data. Update by adding a value.

  In step S214, the main CPU 101a sets a first grand prize winning prize designation command indicating that a prize has been won in the first big prize winning opening 23 in the effect transmission data storage area (transmission buffer) of the main RAM 101c. The winning opening detection signal input process is terminated.

  Next, the second big prize opening detection signal input process will be described with reference to FIG. In step S221, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not there is a valid detection signal from the second big prize opening detection sensor 24a, that is, whether or not a predetermined payout condition is satisfied. If there is no valid detection signal, the process is terminated. If there is a valid detection signal, it is determined in step S222 whether or not a jackpot game is currently being played, that is, whether or not special figure special processing data to be described later = 3. Determine whether. This is for confirming whether or not the winning to the second big winning opening 24 is illegally performed.

  The main CPU 101a ends the second big prize opening detection signal input process if the big hit game is not in progress, and if the big hit game is in progress, in step S223, the main CPU 101a sets the predetermined big prize mouth prize ball counter to a predetermined value. A counter of the round winning number counter (C) for counting and updating the number of game balls won in the big winning opening (the first big winning opening 23 or the second big winning opening 24) in the round while adding and updating data. Update by adding a value.

  In step S224, the main CPU 101a sets a second grand prize winning prize designation command indicating that a prize has been won in the second big prize winning opening 24 in the effect transmission data storage area (transmission buffer) of the main RAM 101c. The winning opening detection signal input process is terminated.

  Next, the first start port detection signal input process will be described with reference to FIG. In step S231, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not there is a valid detection signal from the first start port detection sensor 21a, that is, whether or not a predetermined start condition set in advance is satisfied. If there is no valid detection signal, the process ends. If there is a valid detection signal, the start opening ball counter is updated by adding “1” in step S232, and the first start opening winning flag in the main RAM 101c is updated. The first start opening prize flag is turned ON in the storage area.

  In step S233, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the counter value (U1, also referred to as “first special figure hold number”) of the first special symbol hold number counter is smaller than 4 (upper limit value). If the counter value (U1) is 4, the process is terminated, and if the first special figure reservation number (U1) is smaller than 4, it means that the right to execute the variable symbol display is obtained. In step S234, the CPU 101a adds “1” to the counter value (U1) of the first special symbol reservation number counter and updates it. In step S234, in order to update the first special symbol hold number (U1) displayed on the first special symbol hold display device 14, special symbol hold display data indicating the hold number is stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c. Set to.

  In step S235, the main CPU 101a obtains determination information including a jackpot determination random number, a special symbol determination random number, a reach determination random number, and a special diagram variation pattern determination random number. Specifically, the random number value indicated by each random number counter is stored in the first special symbol holding storage area. The first special symbol storage suspension area is divided into a first storage unit to a fourth storage unit (see FIG. 14A), and the determination information is a number in the storage unit in which the determination information is not stored. The data are stored in order starting from the smallest storage unit.

  And main CPU101a performs the 1st prior determination process based on the winning to the 1st starting port 21 in step S236. Here, the first preliminary determination process will be described. In the first pre-determination process, the predetermined items determined in the special figure special electric control process in step S300 are displayed as a definite special symbol variation display based on the winning to the first starting port 21 (the result of the special symbol lottery result). This is a process of determining in advance before (notification).

  Specifically, the jackpot determination, the special symbol determination, and the reach determination are performed based on the determination information related to the special symbol lottery acquired in step S235 (a jackpot determination random number, a special symbol determination random number, and a reach determination random number). That is, the main CPU 101a performs a jackpot determination process, a special symbol determination process, and a reach determination process in the first preliminary determination. Here, the first start opening prize designation command is determined as the determination result of the first preliminary determination. In other words, the first start opening winning designation command includes information on the determination result of the first pre-judgment (whether or not the jackpot, the special symbol type, and the presence / absence of reach).

  Then, in step S237, the main CPU 101a sets the first start opening winning designation command in the effect transmission data storage area (transmission buffer) of the main RAM 101c, and the first special symbol hold display device 14 displays the first. In order to update the special figure holding number (U1), special symbol holding display data indicating the holding number is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c.

  Next, the second start port detection signal input process will be described with reference to FIG. In step S241, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not there is a valid detection signal from the second start port detection sensor 22a, that is, whether or not a predetermined start condition set in advance is satisfied. If there is no valid detection signal, the process is terminated. If there is a valid detection signal, the start opening prize counter is updated by adding “1” in step S242, and the second start opening prize defining counter is set to “1”. In addition, the second starting port winning flag is turned ON in the second starting port winning flag storage area of the main RAM 101c. The second start opening prize prescription counter is a device that counts the number of wins to the second start opening 22 in one auxiliary game. This is because, in the present embodiment, the number of winning prizes to the second starting port 22 for one auxiliary game is limited.

  In step S243, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the counter value (U2, also referred to as “second special figure holding number”) of the second special symbol holding number counter is smaller than 4 (upper limit value). If the counter value (U2) is 4, the process is terminated, and if the second special figure holding number (U2) is smaller than 4, it means that the right to execute the variable symbol display is obtained. In step S244, the CPU 101a adds “1” to the counter value (U2) of the second special symbol reservation number counter and updates it. In step S244, in order to update the second special symbol hold number (U2) displayed on the second special symbol hold display device 15, the special symbol hold display data indicating the hold number is stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c. Set to.

  In step S245, the main CPU 101a obtains determination information including a jackpot determination random number, a special symbol determination random number, a reach determination random number, and a special diagram variation pattern determination random number. Specifically, the random number value indicated by each random number counter is stored in the second special symbol holding storage area. The first special symbol storage suspension area is divided into a first storage unit to a fourth storage unit (see FIG. 14B), and the determination information is a number in the storage unit in which the determination information is not stored. The data are stored in order starting from the smallest storage unit.

  And main CPU101a performs the 2nd prior determination process based on the winning to the 2nd starting port 22 in step S246. Here, the second prior determination process will be described. In the second pre-determination process, the predetermined matters determined in the special figure special electric control process in step S300 are displayed as a definite special symbol variation display based on the winning to the second starting port 22 (the result of the special symbol lottery result). This is a process of determining in advance before (notification).

  Specifically, the jackpot determination, the special symbol determination, and the reach determination are performed based on the determination information related to the special symbol lottery acquired in step S245 (a jackpot determination random number, a special symbol determination random number, and a reach determination random number). That is, the main CPU 101a performs a jackpot determination process, a special symbol determination process, and a reach determination process in the first preliminary determination. Here, the first start opening prize designation command is determined as the determination result of the first preliminary determination. In other words, the first start opening winning designation command includes information on the determination result of the first pre-judgment (whether or not the jackpot, the special symbol type, and the presence / absence of reach).

  Then, in step S247, the main CPU 101a sets the second start port winning designation command in the effect transmission data storage area (transmission buffer) of the main RAM 101c, and the second special symbol hold display device 15 displays the second. In order to update the special figure hold number (U2), special symbol hold display data indicating the hold number is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c.

  Next, the winning gate detection signal input process will be described with reference to FIG. In step S251, it is determined whether there is a valid detection signal from the first winning gate detection sensor 25a or the second winning gate detection sensor 26a, that is, whether a predetermined acquisition condition is satisfied. If there is no valid detection signal, the process is terminated. If there is a valid detection signal, the counter value (G, also referred to as “general figure reservation number”) of the normal symbol reservation number counter is 4 (upper limit value) in step S252. ) It is determined whether it is smaller. If the counter value (G) is 4, the process is terminated, and if the number of reserved symbols (G) is smaller than 4, it means that the right to execute the normal symbol variation display is obtained. In step S253, the counter value (G) of the normal symbol holding number counter is updated by adding “1”. In step S253, the main CPU 101a updates the normal symbol hold number (G) displayed on the normal symbol hold display device 16 in the predetermined area of the main RAM 101c in order to update the normal symbol hold number (G). set.

  In step S254, the main CPU 101a acquires determination information including a hit determination random number, a normal symbol determination random number, and the like, and ends the winning gate detection signal input process. Specifically, the main CPU 101a stores the random number value indicated by the counter related to the normal symbol lottery in the normal symbol holding storage area of the main RAM 101c.

  The special figure special electric control process will be described with reference to FIG. In step S301, the value of the special figure special electricity processing data is loaded, and the branch address is referred to from the special figure special electric treatment data loaded in step S302. If special figure special electric treatment data = 0, the special symbol memory determination process (step S310). If the special symbol special power processing data = 1, the processing shifts to the special symbol variation processing (step S320). If the special symbol special power processing data = 2, the processing shifts to the special symbol stop processing (step S330). If special figure special electric processing data = 3, the process shifts to jackpot game processing (step S340), and if special figure special electric processing data = 4, the process moves to small hit game processing (step S350). If data = 5, the process goes to the jackpot game end process (step S360). Details will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  The special symbol memory determination process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S310-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the special symbol is being variably displayed. If the special symbol variation display is in progress, the process is terminated. If the special symbol variation display is not in progress, the process proceeds to step 310-2.

  In step S310-2, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the second special figure holding number (U2) is 1 or more. If the second special figure hold number (U2) is not 1 or more, the process proceeds to step S310-4. If it is determined that the second special figure hold number (U2) is 1 or more, the process proceeds to step S310-3. Move processing to.

  In step S310-3, the main CPU 101a updates the counter value of the second special symbol hold count counter by subtracting “1”, and in step S310-6, the data stored in the second special symbol hold storage area is shifted. Processing is performed, and each data stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit is shifted to the previous storage unit.

  For example, the data stored in the fourth storage unit of the second special symbol reservation storage area is also shifted to the third storage unit of the second special symbol reservation storage area. Further, the data stored in the first storage unit of the second special symbol holding storage area is shifted to the variable storage unit (the 0th storage unit) common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol, The data stored in the 0 storage unit is deleted. Thereby, the jackpot determination random number value, the special symbol determination random number value, the reach determination random number, and the special symbol variation pattern determination random number used in the previous game are deleted. Furthermore, the stop symbol data and game condition data used in the previous game are also erased from the corresponding storage areas.

  On the other hand, in step S310-4, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the first special figure reservation number (U1) is 1 or more. If the main CPU 101a determines in step S310-4 that the first special figure reservation number (U1) is 1 or more, the main CPU 101a subtracts "1" from the counter value of the first special symbol reservation number counter in step S310-5. In step S310-6, the data stored in the first special symbol storage area is shifted.

  For example, the data stored in the fourth storage unit of the first special symbol reservation storage area is also shifted to the third storage unit of the first special symbol reservation storage area. In addition, the data stored in the first storage unit of the first special symbol storage area is shifted to the change storage unit (the 0th storage unit), and the data stored in the 0th storage unit is deleted. Is done. As a result, the jackpot determination random number, the special symbol determination random value, the reach determination random number, and the special symbol variation pattern determination random number used in the previous game are deleted. Furthermore, the stop symbol data and game condition data used in the previous game are also erased from the corresponding storage areas.

  In addition, in order to update the 1st special figure reservation number (U1) or the 2nd special figure reservation number (U2) with the data shift process (the suspension digestion process) in step S310-6, specifically, Sets the first and second special symbol hold display data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c in order to change the display contents of the special symbol hold display devices 14 and 15 corresponding to the type of the start port related to the data. The hold display data includes information on the type of the special symbol hold display device and information on the special symbol hold number (U1 or U2).

  In the present embodiment, in steps S310-2 to S310-6, the second special symbol reserved storage area is shifted with priority over the first special symbol reserved storage area. The first special symbol reserved storage area or the second special symbol reserved storage area may be shifted, or the first special symbol reserved storage area may be shifted with priority over the second special symbol reserved storage area.

  In Step S310-4, when it is determined that the first special symbol hold number (U1) is not 1 or more, the processing is shifted to the customer waiting state setting processing in Step S319-1 to Step S319-3. First, in step S319-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the demonstration determination flag “01H” is set in the demonstration determination flag storage area. When the demonstration determination flag “01H” is set in the demonstration determination flag storage area, the special symbol storage determination process is terminated, and when the demonstration determination flag “01H” is not set in the demonstration determination flag storage area. The process moves to step S319-2.

  In step S319-2, the main CPU 101a sets the demo determination flag “01H” in the demo determination flag storage area so that the demo designation command is not set many times in step S319-3 described later.

  In step S319-3, the main CPU 101a sets a demonstration designation command in the effect transmission data storage area, and ends the special symbol memory determination process.

  In step S311, the main CPU 101a executes jackpot determination processing based on the data shifted in step S310-6 and newly stored in the 0th storage unit.

  Here, the jackpot determination process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S311-1, the main CPU 101a determines which start opening the winning jack determination process is based on. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the jackpot determination random number (determination information) related to the jackpot determination is acquired by winning the first start port 21.

  When the main CPU 101a determines that it is the first start port 21 in step S311-1, the jackpot determination table for the first special symbol is selected in step S311-2. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S311-1 that it is not the first start port 21 (the second start port 22), the main CPU 101a selects a jackpot determination table for the second special symbol in step S311-3. .

  Next, in step S311-4, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not a flag is turned on in the high probability flag storage area. Here, the fact that the flag is turned on in the high probability flag storage area means that the current jackpot winning probability is high.

  If it is determined in step S311-4 that the flag is turned on in the high probability flag storage area, in step S311-5, the main CPU 101a determines that the contents of the table selected in step S311-2 or step S311-3. Then, the “first high probability jackpot determination table” or the “second high probability jackpot determination table” is selected. On the other hand, if it is determined that the flag is not turned on in the high-probability game flag storage area, in step S311-6, the main CPU 101a further selects from the table selected in step S311-2 or step S311-3. The “first low probability jackpot determination table” or the “second low probability jackpot determination table” is selected.

  In Step S311-7, the main CPU 101a shifts the jackpot determination random number value stored in the 0th storage unit in Step S310-6 to the “high probability jackpot” selected in Step S311-5 or Step S311-6. The determination is made based on the “determination table” or the “low probability jackpot determination table”, and the jackpot determination process ends.

  When the big hit determination process ends, the main CPU 101a returns to the special symbol storage determination process shown in FIG. 22, and performs the special symbol determination process in step S312. In the special symbol determination process, the mode of the special symbol that is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display devices 11 and 12 is determined based on the result of the jackpot determination process. Here, the special symbol determination process will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S312-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the result of the jackpot determination is “jackpot”. If it is determined that the game is a “hit”, the main CPU 101a selects a special symbol determination table for winning a jackpot in step S312-5. If it is not determined that it is a “hit”, step S312— The process is moved to 2.

  In step S312-2, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the result of the big hit determination is “small hit”. When it is determined that “small hit” is selected, the main CPU 101a selects a special symbol determination table for winning a small hit in step S312-6. The process moves to step S312-3.

  In step S <b> 312-3, the main CPU 101 a performs reach determination. Specifically, the reach determination random number value shifted in step S310-6 and stored in the 0th storage unit is checked against the reach determination table.

  In step S312-4, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the result of the reach determination in step S312-2 is “with reach”. If it is determined that “reach is present”, the process proceeds to step S312-7, and a special symbol determination table for reach loss is selected. On the other hand, if it is not “reach”, that is, it is determined that “no reach”, the process proceeds to step S312-8 to select a special symbol determination table for loss without reach.

  In step S312-9, the main CPU 101a confirms the start port related to the processing based on the flag turned on in the start port winning flag storage area (first start port 21 or second start port 22), and step S312. At -10, based on the type of the start port, either the special symbol determination table for the first start port or the special symbol determination table for the second start port is selected.

  In step S312-111, the main CPU 101a performs special symbol determination for comparing the special symbol determination random number value shifted in step S310-6 and stored in the 0th storage unit with the selected special symbol determination table. In step S312-12, an effect designating command is determined based on the result of the special symbol determination, and the determined effect designating command is set in the effect transmission data storage area.

  Next, in step S312-1, the main CPU 101a determines the stop symbol data related to the special symbol (hereinafter referred to as “special symbol stop symbol data”) based on the result of the special symbol determination in step S312-11, that is, the special symbol. The type is determined, and the determined special figure stop symbol data is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c.

  The determined special symbol stop symbol data is determined when the special symbol variation pattern is determined in the special symbol variation pattern determination process of FIG. 25, as described later, and when the “special bonus special symbol” is determined in the special symbol suspension pattern of FIG. In the jackpot game process of FIG. 28, it is also used when determining the opening / closing mode of the big winning openings 23, 24.

  In step S312-14, the main CPU 101a collates the special symbol stop symbol data with the reference data determination table, sets the reference data, and ends the special symbol determination process. Specifically, the main CPU 101a confirms the high probability flag storage area, and selects a reference data determination table according to the current status of the jackpot winning probability. Next, the special reference stop symbol data is checked against the selected reference data determination table to determine reference data, which is set in the reference data storage area of the main RAM 101c.

  When the special symbol determination process is completed as described above, the main CPU 101a returns to the special symbol memory determination process shown in FIG. 22, and performs a special symbol variation pattern determination process in step S313. In special figure variation pattern determination processing, based on the result of jackpot determination, the result of special symbol determination, and the result of reach determination, the time required to display the variation of the special symbol (hereinafter referred to as special symbol variation time), etc. The special figure fluctuation pattern including the information on is determined.

  The special figure variation pattern determination process will be described with reference to FIG. First, the main CPU 101a confirms the special figure stop symbol data stored in the main RAM 101c in step S313-1, and determines the special figure variation pattern determination table based on the special figure stop symbol data in step S313-2. . This is because in the present embodiment, the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table, which is a table for determining the special figure fluctuation pattern, is divided by the special figure stop symbol data.

  In addition, when the special figure stop symbol data is “1BH” or “2BH”, that is, when the result of the special symbol lottery is losing without reach, the special figure holding number (U1orU2) related to the special symbol variation pattern determination process is further determined. ) To determine the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table. This is because, in the present embodiment, the special figure variation pattern determination table related to the reachless loss is also divided according to the special figure reservation number.

  If the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table is determined, the main CPU 101a determines the special figure fluctuation pattern in step S313-3. Specifically, a special figure fluctuation pattern determination random number is collated with the determined special figure fluctuation pattern determination table to determine a special figure fluctuation pattern.

  When the special CPU variation pattern is determined, the main CPU 101a returns to the special symbol memory determination process shown in FIG. Set in the data storage area. The special figure variation pattern designation command is transmitted to the production control board 102. Upon receiving this command, the production control board 102 recognizes that the special symbol fluctuation display starts, and finally designates the special figure fluctuation pattern designation. Based on the command, the variation effect pattern associated with the content of the variation effect is determined.

  In step S310-8, the main CPU 101a confirms the state of the gaming conditions at the start of the variable symbol display of the special symbol, and sets a gaming state designation command reflecting the state in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 101c. .

  In step S310-9, the main CPU 101a sets a special figure variation time based on the special figure fluctuation pattern in the special game timer counter. The special game timer counter is subtracted every 4 ms in step S110.

  In step S310-10, the main CPU 101a sets special symbol variation display data for the first special symbol display device 11 or the second special symbol display device 12 to perform variation display of the special symbol. The special symbol variation display data includes information such as the type of the special symbol display device to be operated, the variation display mode, and the variation time.

  In step S310-11, the main CPU 101a sets the flag “00H” in the demonstration determination flag storage area, that is, clears the demonstration determination flag storage area, and sets special figure special electric processing data = 1 in step S310-12. Then, the special symbol memory determination process ends.

  Next, the special symbol variation process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S320-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the special figure variation time set in step S310-9 has elapsed (special game timer counter = 0?). As a result, if it is determined that the set time has not elapsed, the special symbol variation process is terminated and the next subroutine is executed.

  When the main CPU 101a determines that the set special symbol variation time has elapsed, in step S320-2, the effect symbol stop designation command is sent to the effect control board 102 to inform the effect control board 102 that the variation display of the special symbol has ended. Is set in the production transmission data storage area.

  In step S320-3, the main CPU 101a displays special figure stop display data based on the special figure stop symbol data set in step S312-13 in order to stop and display the special symbols on the special symbol display devices 11 and 12. Set. Thereby, the result of the special symbol lottery is notified to the player. In step S320-4, the main CPU 101a sets the time required for the special symbol stop display (hereinafter referred to as "special figure stop time", for example, 0.8 seconds) to the special game timer counter. The special game timer counter is subtracted every 4 ms in step S110.

  In step S320-5, the main CPU 101a sets 2 in the special figure special electricity processing data, and in step S320-6, turns off the first starting opening prize flag or the second starting opening prize flag, and the special symbol variation process. Exit.

  The special symbol stop process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S330-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the special figure stop time set in the special game timer counter in step S320-4 has elapsed (special game timer counter = 0?). . As a result, if it is determined that the special figure stop time has not elapsed, the special symbol stop process is terminated, and if it is determined that the special figure stop time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S330-2. .

  In step S330-2, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not a flag is turned on in the time reduction flag storage area. The fact that the flag is ON in the time reduction flag storage area means that the current state is the time reduction state. If the flag is turned on in the time reduction flag storage area, the process proceeds to step S330-3. If the flag is turned off in the time reduction flag storage area, the process proceeds to step S330-6.

  In step S330-3, the main CPU 101a subtracts “1” from the counter value of the remaining number counter in the short time state that indicates the remaining number of times of the special symbol variation display in the short time state (J: hereinafter referred to as “remaining number in the short time state”). The calculated value (J-1) is stored as the remaining time reduction state number (J).

  In step S330-4, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the remaining time (J) = 0. If the remaining time-short state count (J) = 0, the process proceeds to step S330-5. If the remaining time-short state count (J) = 0 is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S330-6.

  In step S330-5, the main CPU 101a turns off the flag stored in the time reduction flag storage area. Note that the number of remaining time-short states (J) becomes “0” means that the special symbol fluctuation display is performed in the short-time state (Ja), and the special symbol fluctuation display in the “short-time” state ends. It means to do.

  In step S330-6, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not a flag is turned on in the high probability flag storage area. The fact that the flag is ON in the high probability flag storage area means that the current state is a high probability state. If the flag is ON in the high probability flag storage area, the process proceeds to step S330-7. If the flag is OFF in the high probability flag storage area, the process proceeds to step S330-10.

  In step S330-7, the main CPU 101a calculates “1 from the counter value of the high probability state remaining number counter indicating the remaining number of times of display of variation of the special symbol in the high probability state (X: hereinafter referred to as“ high probability state remaining number ”). Is stored as a new high probability state remaining count (X).

  In step S330-8, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the high probability state remaining count (X) = 0. If the number of remaining high probability states (X) = 0, the process proceeds to step S330-9. If the number of remaining remaining high probability states (X) = 0, the process proceeds to step S330-10.

  In step S330-9, the main CPU 101a turns off the flag stored in the high probability flag storage area. Note that the high probability state remaining count (X) becomes “0” means that the special symbol change display is performed in the high probability state (Xa) and the special symbol change due to the “high probability” state. It means that the display ends.

  In step S330-10, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not a flag is turned on in the period specifying flag storage area. The fact that the flag is turned on in the period specifying flag storage area means that it is currently a specific period after the special game. If the flag is turned on in the period specifying flag storage area, the process proceeds to step S330-11. If the flag is turned off in the period specifying flag storage area, the process proceeds to step S330-14.

  In step S330-11, the main CPU 101a sets “1” from the counter value of the specific period remaining number counter indicating the remaining number of times of display of the change of the special symbol in the specific period (T: hereinafter referred to as “specific period remaining number”). The subtracted operation value (T-1) is stored as a new number of remaining specific periods (T).

  In step S330-12, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the specific period remaining count (T) = 0. If the remaining number of specific periods (T) = 0, the process proceeds to step S330-13. If the remaining number of specific periods (T) = 0, the process proceeds to step S330-14.

  In step S330-13, the main CPU 101a turns off the flag stored in the specific period flag storage area. Note that the number of remaining specific period (T) is “0” means that the special symbol variable display is performed in the specific period (Ta) and the special symbol variable display for the specific period ends. Means.

  In step S330-14, the main CPU 101a confirms the state of the current game condition, and sets a game state designation command in the effect transmission data storage area.

  In step S330-15, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the determination result of the jackpot determination related to the special symbol stop process is “jackpot”. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the special symbol stop symbol data stored in the special symbol stop symbol data storage area relates to the jackpot special symbol (stop symbol data = 10H to 18H, 20H to 26H). If it is determined that the jackpot special symbol is determined, the process proceeds to step S330-16. If the jackpot special symbol is not determined, the process proceeds to step S330-19.

  In step S330-19, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the determination result of the big hit determination related to the special symbol stop process is “small hit”. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the special symbol stop symbol data stored in the special symbol stop symbol data storage area relates to the jackpot special symbol (stop symbol data = 19H, 29H). Here, if it is determined that the symbol is a small hit special symbol, the process proceeds to step S330-20. If it is not determined to be a small bonus special symbol, the process proceeds to step S330-21.

  In step S330-21, the main CPU 101a sets 0 in the special symbol special electricity processing data, and shifts the processing to the special symbol memory determination processing shown in FIG.

  In step S330-16, the main CPU 101a sets 3 to the special figure special electricity processing data, and in step S330-17, the game condition flag storage area (time-short flag storage area and high probability flag storage area), the remaining high probability state Reset the fluctuation counter and the remaining fluctuation counter in the short time state. In step S330-20, the main CPU 101a sets 4 to the special figure special electricity processing data.

  In step S330-18, the main CPU 101a sets an opening designation command corresponding to the special figure stop symbol data in the effect transmission data storage area. Next, the main CPU 101a sets the opening time corresponding to the special figure stop symbol data in the special game timer counter. The special game timer counter is subtracted every 4 ms in step S110. When this process is finished, the special symbol stop process is finished.

  The jackpot game process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S340-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not it is currently opening. The term “opening” as used herein refers to the period from the start of the jackpot game to the start of the first round game (the first opening of the first prize opening 23 or the first second prize opening 24). Say. If it is determined that it is currently opening, the process proceeds to step S340-2. If it is determined that it is not currently opening, the process proceeds to step S340-6.

  In step S340-2, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not a preset opening time has elapsed. That is, it is determined whether or not the special game timer counter = 0, and when the special game timer counter = 0, it is determined that the opening time has elapsed. As a result, if the set opening time has not elapsed, the jackpot game process is terminated, the next subroutine is executed, and if the opening time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S340-3. .

  In step S340-3, the main CPU 101a as the jackpot game start process confirms which jackpot is based on the special figure stop symbol data, and selects a jackpot opening / closing control table corresponding to the jackpot type. At the same time, it is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c. Specifically, according to the special figure stop symbol data, the first prize winning game opening / closing control table for the long game, the game winning game opening / closing control table for the second game, the middle winning game winning game opening / closing control table , Short winning game winning prize opening / closing control table, first specific winning game prize opening opening / closing control table, second specified winning game winning prize opening / closing control table, or third specified game winning prize opening / closing control table One of the control tables is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c. Next, the main CPU 101a adds “1” to the value (round number (R)) stored in the round game number storage area and stores the value. Since the round game has not been executed at the time of step S340-3, the main CPU 101a stores “1” in the round game count storage area.

  In step S340-4, the main CPU 101a adds “1” to the value stored in the special operation number storage area (special operation number (K)) and stores it as the special prize opening process. The main CPU 101a energizes the first big prize opening / closing solenoid 230B or the second big prize opening / closing solenoid 240B to open the first big prize opening 23 or the second big prize opening 24. The opening / closing solenoid energization start data is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c. Here, the main CPU 101a refers to the special winning opening / closing control table determined in step 340-3 and opens the special winning openings 23 and 24 based on the round number (R) and the special operation number (K). The time (the operating time of the special winning opening control devices 230 and 240) is set in the special game timer counter. The special game timer counter is subtracted every 4 ms in step S110.

  In step S340-5, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not K = 1. If K = 1, the main CPU 101a sets a round start designation command in the effect transmission data storage area. This is because information indicating that the round game starts is transmitted to the effect control board 102. For example, at the time of the first release of the first round game per long game, “1” is set in the round game number storage area and “1” is set in the special operation number storage area. A round start designation command indicating one round is set in the effect transmission data storage area. On the other hand, if “1” is not set in the special operation number storage area, the big hit game process is terminated without setting the round start designation command in the effect transmission data storage area. That is, since the case where K = 1 means the start of a round, the main CPU 101a transmits a round start designation command only at the start of the round. When the effect control board 102 receives the round start designation command in the long hit game, the middle hit game or the specific jackpot game, for example, the display for the effect is performed on the first image display device 71 or the like such as “ROUND1”. .

  In step S340-6, the main CPU 101a determines whether it is currently ending. Ending here refers to the period from the end of all preset round games (after the final opening of the big winning openings 23, 24) to the end of the jackpot game. Therefore, if it is determined that the current ending is in progress, the process proceeds to step S340-17, where it is determined whether or not the ending time has elapsed, and if it is determined that the current ending is not currently in progress, step S340-7 is performed. Move processing to.

  In step S340-7, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the special winning openings 23 and 24 are open, that is, whether or not the special winning opening control devices 230 and 240 are operating. If the main CPU 101a determines that the special winning openings 23 and 24 are not open, the main CPU 101a determines in step S340-11 whether a preset closing time has elapsed. As a result, if the closing time has not elapsed, the jackpot game process is terminated, and if the closing time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S340-4.

  If the main CPU 101a determines that the big prize opening 23, 24 is open, whether or not the “open completion condition” for ending the opening of the big prize opening 23, 24 is established in step S340-8. Determine whether or not. As the “opening end condition”, the counter value of the round winning counter has reached a specified number (for example, 9) in the round game, or the maximum open time has elapsed (special game timer counter = 0) ) Is adopted. If it is determined that the “opening end condition” is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S340-9. If it is determined that the “opening end condition” is not satisfied, the jackpot game process is ended.

  In step S340-9, the main CPU 101a performs a special winning opening closing process. The big prize opening closing process sets the energization stop data of the big prize opening / closing solenoids 230B and 240B in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c in order to close the big prize openings 23 and 24, and is determined in step 340-3. With reference to the special winning opening / closing control table, the closing times of the special winning openings 23 and 24 are set in the special game timer counter based on the current round number (R) and special operation number (K). As a result, the special winning openings 23 and 24 are closed.

In step S340-10, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not one round has been completed. Specifically, in one round, the special operation number (K) is the number of times of opening set in the round game, or the counter value (C) of the round winning number counter is a specified number (for example, 9) ) Is terminated on the condition that it has been reached, it is determined whether or not such a condition is satisfied. If it is determined that one round is completed, the process proceeds to S340-12. If it is determined that one round is not completed, the jackpot game process is terminated.

  In step S340-12, the main CPU 101a clears the special operation number storage area and clears the counter value of the round winning number counter to “0”.

  In step S340-13, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the value (round number (R)) stored in the round game number storage area is the number of round games executed in the jackpot game. It is determined whether or not the game has ended. When determining “Yes”, the main CPU 101a moves the process to step S340-15, and when determining “No”, the main CPU 101a moves the process to step S340-14.

  In step S340-14, the main CPU 101a adds "1" to the current round number (R) stored in the round game number storage area and stores the result.

  In step S340-15, the main CPU 101a resets the round number (R) stored in the round game number storage area as the jackpot game end process.

  In step S340-16, the main CPU 101a confirms the jackpot type according to the special figure stop symbol data, and stores the ending designation command associated with the jackpot type to be transmitted to the presentation control board 102 to store the transmission data for presentation. Set to area. Next, the main CPU 101a sets an ending time corresponding to the type of jackpot in the special game timer counter.

  In step S340-17, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the set ending time has elapsed. If it is determined that the ending time has elapsed, the main CPU 101a proceeds to step S340-18 and passes the ending time. If it is determined that it is not, the jackpot game process is terminated as it is.

  In step S340-18, the main CPU 101a sets 5 to the special figure special electric processing data, and moves the processing to the jackpot game end process shown in FIG.

  The small hit game process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S350-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not it is currently open. If it is determined that it is currently opening, the process proceeds to step S350-2. If it is determined that it is not currently opening, the process proceeds to step S350-5.

  In step S350-2, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not a preset opening time has elapsed. That is, it is determined whether or not the special game timer counter = 0, and when the special game timer counter = 0, it is determined that the opening time has elapsed. As a result, if the opening time has not elapsed, the small hit game process is terminated, and if the opening time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S350-3.

  In step S350-3, the main CPU 101a performs a small hit game start process. In the small hit game start processing, a special winning opening opening / closing control table corresponding to the type of small hit is selected according to the special figure stop symbol data. Specifically, the big winning game opening / closing control table for the small hit game is determined according to the special figure stop symbol data.

  In step S350-4, the main CPU 101a performs a special winning opening opening process. In the big prize opening process, first, “1” is added to the value stored in the special operation number storage area (special operation number (K)) and stored. Then, in order to open the first big prize opening 23 or the second big prize opening 24, the energization start data of the first big prize opening / closing solenoid 230B or the second big prize opening / closing solenoid 240B is set, and the above step 350- Referring to the special prize opening / closing control table determined in step 3, the opening time of the first special prize opening 23 or the second big prize opening 24 based on the current special operation number (K) is set in the special game timer counter. Then, the small hit game ends.

  In step S350-5, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not it is currently ending. Ending here means a period from the end of the last opening of the first grand prize opening 23 or the second big prize opening 24 to the end of the small hit game. Therefore, the main CPU 101a moves the process to step S350-13 when it is determined that it is currently ending, and moves to step S350-6 when it is determined that it is not currently ending.

  In step S350-6, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the first big prize opening 23 or the second big prize opening 24 is being opened. If the main CPU 101a determines that the first grand prize winning port 23 or the second grand prize winning port 24 is not open, the main CPU 101a moves the process to step S350-10, and the first grand prize winning port 23 or the second grand prize winning port. If it is determined that 24 is open, it is determined in step S350-7 whether or not an “open end condition” for ending the opening of the special winning opening 8 is satisfied. As the “opening end condition”, the counter value (C) of the round winning counter has reached a specified number (for example, nine), or one opening time of the first big winning opening 23 or the second big winning opening 24. The fact that the game has elapsed (special game timer counter = 0) is employed. If the main CPU 101a determines that the “opening end condition” is satisfied, the main CPU 101a proceeds to step S350-8, and if it determines that the “opening end condition” is not satisfied, the main CPU 101a ends the small hit game process. To do.

  In step S350-8, the main CPU 101a performs a special winning opening closing process. In the big prize opening closing process, in order to close the first big prize opening 23 or the second big prize opening 24, the energization stop data of the first big prize opening / closing solenoid 230B or the second big prize opening / closing solenoid 240B is set. Referring to the special prize opening / closing control table determined in the above step 350-3, the closing time of the first special prize opening 23 or the second big prize opening 24 is determined based on the current special operation number (K). Set to the special game timer counter. Thereby, the 1st grand prize opening 23 or the 2nd big prize opening 24 is closed.

  In step S350-9, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the small hit game ending condition is satisfied. The small hit game ending condition is the number of times of opening the first big winning opening 23 or the second big winning opening 24 with a special electric operation number (K) set in advance, or the counter value (C) of the round winning counter Has reached a specified number (for example, 9). If the main CPU 101a determines that the small hitting game end condition is satisfied, the main CPU 101a shifts the process to step S350-11. If the main CPU 101a determines that the small hitting end condition is not satisfied, the main CPU 101a performs the small hit game processing. finish.

  In step S350-11, the main CPU 101a sets “0” in the special operation number storage area and sets “0” in the counter value (C) of the round winning counter as the small hit game ending process. That is, the special operation number storage area and the round winning counter are cleared.

  In step S350-12, the main CPU 101a sets an ending command according to the type of small hits in the transmission data storage area for presentation according to the special figure stop symbol data, and sets an ending time according to the type of small hits. Set to the special game timer counter.

  In step S350-10, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the closing time set in step S350-8 has elapsed. Note that the closing time is also determined by whether or not the special game timer counter = 0 as in the opening time. As a result, when the main CPU 101a determines that the closing time has not elapsed, the main CPU 101a ends the small hit game process, and when it determines that the closing time has elapsed, the main CPU 101a moves the process to step S350-4. .

  In step S350-13, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the set ending time has elapsed. If the main CPU 101a determines that the ending time has elapsed, the main CPU 101a proceeds to step S350-14 and passes the ending time. If it is determined that the game is not done, the small hit game process is terminated.

  In step S350-14, the main CPU 101a sets “0” to the special symbol special electricity processing data, and moves the processing to the special symbol memory determination processing shown in FIG.

  The jackpot game end process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S360-1, the main CPU 101a loads game condition data.

  In step S360-2, the main CPU 101a compares the game condition data with the game condition determination table, and determines whether or not to turn on the high probability flag in the high probability flag storage area. When determining that the high probability flag is not turned ON, the main CPU 101a shifts the processing to step S360-4, and when determining that the high probability flag is ON, in step S360-3, the main CPU 101a stores the high probability flag storage area in the main RAM 101c. The probability flag is turned on, the executable number (Xa) (in this embodiment, 100 times) is set in the high probability state remaining number counter, and the process proceeds to step S360-4.

  In step S360-4, the main CPU 101a checks the loaded game condition data against the game condition determination table, and determines whether or not the time flag is turned on in the time flag storage area. If the main CPU 101a determines that the time reduction flag is not turned ON, the process proceeds to step S360-6. If it is determined that the time reduction flag is ON, the time reduction flag is turned ON in the time reduction flag storage area of the main RAM 101c in step S360-5. Then, the executable number (Ja) (100 times in the present embodiment) is set in the time reduction state remaining number counter, and the process proceeds to step S360-6.

  In step S360-6, the main CPU 101a confirms the state of the current game conditions, sets a game state designation command in the effect transmission data storage area, and in step S360-6 sets 0 in the special figure special electric processing data. Then, the process moves to the special symbol memory determination process shown in FIG.

  With reference to FIG. 31, the ordinary map / electric power control process will be described. First, the main CPU 101a loads the value of the ordinary power transmission processing data in step S401, refers to the branch address from the loaded ordinary power processing data loaded in step S402, and if the ordinary power transmission processing data = 0. A normal symbol memory determination process including a normal symbol determination of whether or not the second start port 22 is opened based on the determination information acquired based on the winning to the first winning gate 25 or the second winning gate 26 ( The process moves to step S410), and if the normal symbol normal power processing data = 1, the normal symbol change process (step S420) for operating the normal symbol display device 13 based on the normal symbol determination moves to the normal symbol change process. If the figure normal power processing data = 2, the process moves to the normal symbol stop processing (step S430), and if the normal figure normal power processing data = 3, the second start port 22 is opened. (Actuating the second start hole control device 220) and moves the process to the auxiliary game process (step S440). Details will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  The normal symbol memory determination process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S410-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the normal symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. If it is determined that the normal symbol is being displayed, the main CPU 101a ends the normal symbol storage determination process. If it is determined that there is not, the process proceeds to step S410-2.

  In step S410-2, the main CPU 101a determines whether the counter value of the normal symbol hold count counter (ordinary symbol hold count (G), hereinafter referred to as "general symbol hold count (G)") is 1 or more. When the number of held general symbols (G) is “0”, the normal symbol variation display is not performed, so the normal symbol variation process is terminated.

  If the main CPU 101a determines in step S410-2 that the number of common figure reservations (G) is “1” or more, the value stored in the normal symbol reservation number storage area in step S410-3 ( G) is updated by subtracting “1”, and the new number of reserved drawings (G) is stored.

  In step S410-4, the main CPU 101a performs a shift process on the data stored in the normal symbol storage area. Specifically, each data stored in the 0th storage unit to the fourth storage unit is shifted to the storage unit with the previous number. At this time, the data stored in the previous storage unit is written into a predetermined processing area and is erased from the normal symbol holding storage area. Here, in order to change the display content of the normal symbol hold display device 16 in accordance with the shift of data (digestion of the hold), specifically, to display the current general symbol hold number (G), the normal symbol The hold display data is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c.

  In step S410-5, the main CPU 101a performs a hit determination, that is, a determination of a hit determination random number stored in the normal symbol holding storage area. Specifically, the main CPU 101a checks whether or not the hit determination random number for the normal symbol stored in the main ROM 101b is compared with the hit determination table stored in the main ROM 101b after being shifted in step S410-4. Judgment is made. In the present embodiment, the hit determination table is associated with the start opening winning ease state (non-short-time state / short-time state) (see FIG. 13A), so the short-time flag storage area is confirmed. Then, the hit determination table for the normal symbol related to the current start port winning easiness state is selected.

  In step S410-6, the main CPU 101a performs normal symbol determination. Specifically, the main CPU 101a compares the normal symbol determination random number stored in the 0th storage unit after being shifted in step S410-4 with the normal symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 101b to determine the normal symbol. . As described above, since this normal symbol determination table is associated with the result of the hit determination (win / loss), the result of the hit determination is confirmed, and the normal symbol determination table related to the result of the hit determination is determined. select.

  In step S410-7, the main CPU 101a determines a normal effect symbol designation command based on the result of the normal symbol determination, and sets the determined normal effect symbol designation command in the effect transmission data storage area. In step S410-8, the main CPU 101a determines the stop symbol data related to the normal symbol (hereinafter referred to as “general symbol stop symbol data”), that is, the type of the normal symbol, based on the result of the normal symbol determination. The normal stop symbol data is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c.

  When the determined general symbol stop symbol data is determined in the general symbol variation pattern determination process, the normal symbol variation pattern is determined. In the normal symbol suspension pattern processing of FIG. It is also used when determining the opening / closing mode of the second start port 22 in the processing.

  The hit normal symbol is a symbol expressed by lighting for a certain time by a specific LED among the plurality of LEDs provided in the normal symbol display device 13, and the lost normal symbol is the LED. It is a symbol expressed by lighting for a certain time by another LED.

  In step S410-9, the main CPU 101a performs a common map variation pattern determination process. Specifically, since the normal pattern variation pattern determination table is classified according to the state of the start opening winning ease, the main CPU 101a first confirms the time flag storage area and determines the current start opening winning ease. A general pattern variation pattern determination table related to the state is selected. Then, the main CPU 101a compares the random number for determining the customary pattern fluctuation pattern in the 0th storage unit, which is shifted in the above step S410-4, with the selected customary pattern fluctuation pattern determination table, and determines the normal pattern fluctuation pattern (normal map). (Variation time).

  In step S410-10, the main CPU 101a sets the base map change time determined in the base map change pattern determination process in the auxiliary game timer counter. By the process of this step, the time for normal symbol variation display is determined. The auxiliary game timer counter is subtracted every 4 ms in step S110.

  In step S410-11, the main CPU 101a sets the normal symbol variation display data in order to perform the normal symbol variation display on the ordinary symbol display device 13, and in step S410-12, the normal symbol suspension symbol data is set as the auxiliary game reference data. The auxiliary game reference data is determined by collating with the determination table and set in the auxiliary game reference data storage area of the main RAM 101c.

  In step S410-13, the main CPU 101a sets “1” in the normal-plot normal power processing data, and ends the normal symbol variation process. The normal symbol fluctuation display data includes information such as a fluctuation display mode and a fluctuation time.

  Next, the normal symbol variation process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S420-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the normal time fluctuation time set in step S410-10 has elapsed (whether auxiliary game timer counter = 0). As a result, when it is determined that the set time has not elapsed, the normal symbol variation process is terminated and the next subroutine is executed.

  In step S420-2, the main CPU 101a sets an ordinary symbol change end command in the effect transmission data storage area, and in step S420-3, the normal symbol is based on the ordinary symbol stop symbol data set in step S410-8. Data for stoppage display for stopping display on the display device 13 is set. As a result, the player is notified of the result of the lottery of the normal symbol. In step S420-4, the main CPU 101a sets a normal symbol stop time (for example, 0.8 seconds) in the normal game counter. The auxiliary game timer counter is subtracted every 4 ms in step S110.

  Then, in step S420-5, the main CPU 101a sets 2 to the ordinary figure / electric power process data, and ends the normal symbol variation process.

  Next, the normal symbol stop process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S430-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the normal symbol stop time set in the normal symbol time counter in step S420-4 has elapsed (auxiliary game timer counter = 0?). As a result, when it is determined that the normal symbol stop time has not elapsed, the normal symbol stop process is terminated, and the next subroutine is executed.

  If the main CPU 101a determines that the time set in step S420-4 has elapsed, in step S430-2, whether or not the result of the hit determination related to the normal symbol stop process is “win”. Determine. More specifically, it is determined whether or not the general symbol stop symbol data stored in the normal symbol stop symbol data storage area is related to a normal symbol. Here, if it is determined that the symbol is a normal symbol, the process proceeds to step S430-4. If it is not determined that the symbol is a normal symbol, the process proceeds to step S430-3.

  In step S430-4, the main CPU 101a sets 3 to the ordinary power transmission processing data. Then, in step S430-5, the main CPU 101a sets an opening designation command corresponding to the usual figure stop symbol data in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 101c, and responds to the usual figure stop symbol based on the auxiliary game control table. Set the opening time in the auxiliary game timer counter. The auxiliary game timer counter is subtracted every 4 ms in step S110. When this process is finished, the normal symbol stop process is finished.

  In step S430-3, the main CPU 101a sets 0 to the ordinary figure ordinary electricity processing data, and ends the normal symbol suspension process.

  The auxiliary game process will be described with reference to FIG. The main CPU 101a first determines in step S450-1 whether or not it is currently opening. If it is determined that it is currently opening, the process proceeds to step S450-2, and if it is determined that it is not currently opening, the process proceeds to S450-5.

  In step S450-2, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not a preset opening time has elapsed. That is, it is determined whether or not the auxiliary game timer counter = 0, and when the auxiliary game timer counter = 0, it is determined that the opening time has elapsed. As a result, when the opening time has not elapsed, the auxiliary game process is terminated, and when the opening time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S450-3.

  In step S450-3, the main CPU 101a performs an auxiliary game start process. In the auxiliary game start process, the main CPU 101a first selects the second start port opening / closing control table based on the auxiliary game reference data stored in the auxiliary game reference data storage area of the main RAM 101c, and enters the predetermined area of the main RAM 101c. set.

  In step S450-4, the main CPU 101a performs a second start port opening process. In the second opening opening process, first, “1” is added to the value stored in the ordinary power operation number storage area (the ordinary power operation number (D)) and stored. Then, in order to operate the ordinary movable piece 220A, the energization start data of the second start opening / closing solenoid 220B is set, and the current start opening / closing control table set in step 450-3 is referred to The opening time of the second start port 22 based on the general electric operation number (D) is set in the auxiliary game timer counter.

  In step S450-5, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not it is currently ending. Ending here means a period from the end of the last opening of the second start port 22 to the end of the auxiliary game. Therefore, if the main CPU 101a determines that the current ending is in progress, the process proceeds to step S450-12. If the main CPU 101a determines that the current ending is not in progress, the process proceeds to step S450-6.

  In step S450-6, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the second start port 22 is being opened. If the main CPU 101a determines that the second start port 22 is open, whether or not the “open end condition” for ending the opening of the second start port 22 is satisfied in step S450-7. Determine. As the “opening end condition”, the counter value of the start opening prescribed winning counter has reached a specified (maximum) number (for example, 10), or that one opening time of the second start opening 22 has elapsed ( Auxiliary game timer counter = 0) is adopted. Then, the main CPU 101a moves the process to step S450-8 when it is determined that the “opening end condition” is satisfied, and ends the auxiliary game process when it is determined that the “opening end condition” is not satisfied. .

  In step S450-8, the main CPU 101a performs a second start port closing process. In the second start port closing process, the energization stop data of the second start port opening / closing solenoid 220B is set to close the second start port 22, and the second start port opening / closing control table set in step 450-3 is set. Referring to FIG. 4, the closing time of the second start port 22 is set in the auxiliary game timer counter based on the current general electric operation number (D). As a result, the second start port 22 is closed.

  In step S450-9, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not an auxiliary game end condition is satisfied. The auxiliary game end condition is that the number of times the second start port 22 is opened with a preset number of power operation numbers (D), or the counter value of the start port prescribed winning counter is the maximum number (for example, 10). It has been reached. When the main CPU 101a determines that the auxiliary game end condition is satisfied, the main CPU 101a moves the process to step S450-10, and when it determines that the auxiliary game end condition is not satisfied, the main CPU 101a ends the auxiliary game process. .

  In step S450-10, the main CPU 101a sets "0" in the general electric operation number storage area and sets "0" in the second start opening prize prescribed counter. That is, the general electric operation number storage area and the second start opening prescribed winning counter are cleared.

  In step S450-11, the main CPU 101a sets an ending designation command according to the normal-design stop symbol data in the effect transmission data storage area, and at the same time, the ending time according to the regular-design stop symbol data based on the auxiliary game control table. Is set in the auxiliary game timer counter.

  If the main CPU 101a determines that the second start port 22 is not open in step S450-6, the main CPU 101a determines in step S450-13 whether or not the closing time set in step S450-8 has elapsed. To do. Note that the closing time is also determined by whether or not the auxiliary game timer counter = 0 as in the opening time. As a result, when determining that the closing time has not elapsed, the main CPU 101a ends the auxiliary game process, and when determining that the closing time has elapsed, the main CPU 101a moves the process to step S450-4.

  Next, in step S450-12, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the set ending time has elapsed. If the main CPU 101a determines that the ending time has elapsed, the main CPU 101a moves the process to step S450-14, If it is determined that the time has not elapsed, the auxiliary game process is terminated.

  In step S450-14, the main CPU 101a sets the ordinary power transmission process data = 0, and ends the auxiliary game process.

(Production control board main processing)
Next, processing executed by the sub CPU 102a in the effect control board 102 will be described.

  First, the main process of the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIG. When power is supplied from the power supply board 107 to the sub CPU 102a, a system reset occurs in the sub CPU 102a, and the sub CPU 102a performs the following processing.

  First, in step S1001, the sub CPU 102a performs an initialization process. In this processing, the main processing program is read from the sub ROM 102b, and the sub RAM 120c in which flags and commands are stored is initialized.

  In step S1002, the sub CPU 102a performs an effect random number update process. In this process, the sub CPU 102a performs a process of updating the random numbers for effect (variable effect pattern determination random number, prefetch effect pattern determination random number, etc.) stored in the sub RAM 102c. The sub CPU 102a waits for a predetermined interrupt process while repeatedly performing the process of step S1002.

(Timer interrupt processing of production control board)
A clock pulse is generated every predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) by the reset clock pulse generation circuit provided on the effect control board 102, whereby the timer interruption process shown in FIG. 37 is executed.

  First, in step S1100, the sub CPU 102a saves information stored in the register of the sub CPU 102a to the stack area.

  In step S1200, the sub CPU 102a performs time control processing for updating each timer counter for performing time management related to various effects.

  In step S1300, the sub CPU 102a performs command analysis processing. In this processing, the sub CPU 102a performs processing for analyzing a command stored in the reception buffer of the sub RAM 102c. Details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 38 to 46. When the effect control board 102 receives the command transmitted from the main control board 101, the effect control board 102 performs a reception interrupt process of the effect control board 102 (not shown) and stores the received command in the reception buffer. Thereafter, processing for analyzing the received command is performed in step S1300.

  In step S1400, the sub CPU 102a performs an effect button effect control process related to an effect (effect button effect) based on the operation of the effect button device 10. Details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 47 and 48.

  In step S1500, the sub CPU 102a performs a special figure holding effect control process. In this process, the main CPU 101a performs a special figure hold effect control process for controlling the special figure hold effect. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S1600, the sub CPU 102a performs a power saving mode control process for controlling the power saving mode performed in the customer waiting state.

  In step S1700, the sub CPU 102a performs data output processing for transmitting various effect control commands set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105.

  In step S1800, the sub CPU 102a restores the information saved in step S1100 to the register of the sub CPU 102a.

(Command analysis processing of production control board)
A command analysis process performed by the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 to 39.

  In step S1301, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not a newly transmitted command is stored in the reception buffer. If there is no command, the sub CPU 102a ends the command analysis processing, and if there is a command in the reception buffer, the sub CPU 102a shifts the processing to step S1302.

  In step S1302, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a start slot winning designation command. If the command stored in the reception buffer is a start opening winning designation command, the sub CPU 102a moves the process to step S1303, and if not the starting buffer winning designation command, moves the process to step S1305.

  In step S1303, the sub CPU 102a analyzes the start opening prize designation command, confirms the type of the start opening related to the start opening prize designation command, and displays the special figure holding effect storage area (for each type). (A first special figure hold effect storage area and a second special figure hold effect storage area) and a hold number addition process of adding a counter value of a special figure hold effect counter provided in the sub-RAM 102c is performed, step S1304 The pre-reading effect determination process based on the start opening prize designation command stored in the special figure hold effect storage area is performed, and the command analysis process ends. The hold number addition process will be described later with reference to FIG. 40, and the prefetch effect process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In step S1305, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is an effect designating command. If the command stored in the reception buffer is an effect symbol designation command, the sub CPU 102a moves the process to step S1306, and if it is not an effect symbol designation command, moves the process to step S1307.

  In step S1306, the sub CPU 102a analyzes the effect designating command and, based on the information included in the received effect designating command, displays the effect design to be stopped and displayed on the first image display device 71, that is, the combination of the decorative design. The effect design pattern determination process to be determined is performed, and the command analysis process ends.

  In step S1307, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a special figure variation pattern designation command. If the command stored in the reception buffer is a special figure variation pattern designation command, the sub CPU 102a moves the process to step S1308 and step S1309, and if it is not a special figure variation pattern designation command, the sub CPU 102a moves the process to step S1310.

  In step S1308, the sub CPU 102a performs a variation effect pattern determination process for determining a variation effect pattern that is a variation effect aspect constituting the lottery effect, and the process proceeds to step S1309. The variation pattern determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S1309, the sub CPU 102a confirms the type of the start port related to the variation pattern designation command, performs the shift process of the data stored in the special symbol holding storage area corresponding to the start port, and for each type The hold number subtraction process for subtracting “1” from the counter value of the special figure hold effect counter provided in FIG. The hold number subtraction process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the data shift process, each data stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit of each special figure holding effect storage area to be described later is shifted to the previous storage unit. For example, data stored in the fourth storage unit of the first special figure hold effect storage area is shifted to the third storage unit of the first special figure hold effect storage area. In addition, the data stored in the first storage unit of the first special figure holding effect storage area is shifted to the fluctuation storage unit (the zero storage unit) common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol, The data stored in the 0 storage unit is deleted.

  In step S1310, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is an effect symbol stop designation command. If the command stored in the reception buffer is an effect symbol stop designation command, the sub CPU 102a moves the process to step S1311 and step S1312, and if it is not an effect symbol stop designation command, moves the process to step S1313.

  In step S1311, the sub CPU 102a sets an effect symbol stop command indicating that the effect symbol is to be stopped and displayed in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c. The effect symbol stop command is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process of step S1700. The lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 recognize the end of the variation effect by receiving the effect symbol stop designation command, terminate the variation effect, and stop the effect symbols constituting the lottery effect. Display. Further, the sub CPU 102a performs an effect mode control process for controlling the effect mode in step S1312, and ends the command analysis process. The effect mode control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the present embodiment, the effect mode is performed by an effect device including the first image display device 71, the second image display device 72, and the like corresponding to a special symbol lottery (or a special symbol variation display). It is a classification mode (category) of the variation effect that is associated with the state of the game condition and the type of period. That is, it suggests the state of the game condition and the type of period. For example, as the effect mode of the fluctuating effect by the first image display device 71, various elements constituting the effect such as the scene by location, situation, time, etc., the main characters and angles that appear, are appropriately set.

  In step S1313, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a gaming state designation command. If the command stored in the reception buffer is a gaming state designation command, the sub CPU 102a moves the process to step S1314, and if not the gaming state designation command, moves the process to step S1315. In step S1314, the sub CPU 102a sets data indicating the gaming state based on the received gaming state designation command in the gaming state storage area in the sub RAM 102c, and ends the command analysis processing.

  In step S1315, the sub CPU 102a checks whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is an opening designation command. If the command stored in the reception buffer is an opening designation command, the sub CPU 102a moves the process to step S1316, and if not the opening designation command, moves the process to step S1317.

  In step S1316, the sub CPU 102a performs a special game effect pattern determination process for determining a special game effect pattern that is an aspect of the special game effect that is an effect related to the special game, and ends the command analysis process.

  In step S1317, the sub CPU 102a checks whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a round designation command. If the command stored in the reception buffer is a round designation command, the sub CPU 102a moves the process to step S1318, and if it is not a round designation command, moves the process to step S1319.

  In step S1318, the sub CPU 102a performs a round effect pattern determination process for determining a round effect pattern that is a mode of the round effect, and ends the command analysis process. Specifically, the sub CPU 102a determines a round effect pattern based on the round designation command, sets round effect data indicating the determined round effect pattern in the round effect pattern storage area, and indicates the determined round effect pattern. The round effect control command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c.

  In step S1319, the sub CPU 102a checks whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is an ending designation command. If the command stored in the reception buffer is an ending designation command, the sub CPU 102a moves the process to step S1320, and if not the ending designation command, moves the process to step S1321.

  In step S1320, the sub CPU 102a performs an ending effect pattern determination process for determining an ending effect pattern that is an aspect of the ending effect, and ends the command analysis process.

  In step S1321, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a demonstration designation command. If the command stored in the reception buffer is a demo designation command, the sub CPU 102a moves the process to step S1322, and ends the command analysis process if it is not a demonstration designation command.

  In step S1322, the sub CPU 102a turns on the demonstration effect standby flag in the demonstration effect standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c as pre-processing for executing the demonstration effect informing the customer waiting state where the game is not performed for a predetermined period. At the same time, the time until the demonstration production is started (demo production standby time) is set in the demonstration production timer counter.

(Processing board addition processing)
With reference to FIG. 40, the hold number addition processing by the effect control board 102 will be described. In step S1303-1, the sub CPU 102a stores the start opening winning designation command stored in the reception buffer of the sub RAM 102c in the special figure holding effect storage area of the sub RAM 102c.

  As shown in FIG. 50A, the sub RAM 102 c has a first special figure holding effect storage area capable of storing a start opening prize designation command based on a winning to the first start opening 21, and the second start opening 22. And a second special figure holding effect storage area capable of storing a start opening winning designation command based on winning. Each special figure holding effect storage area is divided into a first storage unit to a fourth storage unit (see FIGS. 50B and 50C). Further, each storage unit stores a start opening prize designation command storage area for storing a start opening prize designation command, and a special figure hold display for storing information (a special figure hold display form data) indicating a display form of a special figure hold image described later. It has a mode data storage area and a prefetch effect pattern determination random number storage area for storing a prefetch effect pattern determination random number described later (see FIG. 50D).

  Note that the start opening winning designation command is stored in order from the storage unit with the smallest number in the storage unit in which the command is not stored.

  In step S1303-2, the sub CPU 102a stores data representing a normal mode that is a normal display mode in the special figure hold display mode data storage area of the storage unit that stores the start port winning designation command in step S1303-1 (for example, “00H”) is stored.

  In step S1303-3, the sub CPU 102a confirms the start opening prize designation command stored in step S1303-1. In step S1303-4, the start opening prize designation command is a command based on winning in the first start opening 21. It is determined whether or not.

  If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command is based on a winning to the first starting port 21, the process moves to step S1303-5, and is not a command based on the winning to the first starting port 21, that is, the second starting port. If it is determined that the command is based on the winning to 22, the process proceeds to step S1303-7.

  In step S1303-5, the sub CPU 102a updates the counter value of the first special figure hold effect counter provided in the sub RAM 102c by adding “1”, and in step S1303-6, the first special figure hold effect generation designation flag is updated. Is stored in the first special figure hold effect generation designation flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and the hold number addition process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in step S1303-7, the sub CPU 102a updates the counter value of the second special figure holding effect counter provided in the sub RAM 102c by adding “1”, and in step S1303-8, the second special figure holding effect is generated. The designation flag is stored in the second special figure hold production occurrence designation flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and the hold number addition process is terminated.

  The first special figure hold effect counter is “1” each time a start opening prize designation command based on a win to the first start opening 21 is received and stored in the first special figure hold effect storage area of the sub RAM 102c. Is added. That is, the first special figure reservation effect counter counts the first special figure reservation number (U1), which is the number of determination information stored in the first special symbol reservation storage area of the main RAM 101c. Similarly, the second special figure reservation effect counter receives “1” every time a start opening prize designation command based on winning in the second start opening 22 is received and stored in the second special figure hold effect storage area of the sub RAM 102c. Is added. That is, the second special figure reservation effect counter counts the second special figure reservation number (U2), which is the number of determination information stored in the second special symbol reservation storage area of the main RAM 101c.

(Pre-reading effect processing of effect control board)
The prefetch effect processing by the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIG. In step S1304-1, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not a lottery effect is currently being performed corresponding to the special symbol display (special symbol variation display + special symbol stop display). If the sub CPU 102a determines that the variation effect is not currently being performed, the sub CPU 102a ends the prefetch effect process. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the variation effect is being performed, the process proceeds to step S1304-2.

  In step S1304-2, the sub CPU 102a receives all of the start opening prize designation commands stored before the start opening prize designation command stored in step S1303-1 (hereinafter referred to as “the start opening prize designation command”). It is determined whether or not it indicates a loss without reach. If the sub CPU 102a determines that all are not reach-less loses, the sub-CPU 102a ends the pre-reading effect process. If the sub CPU 102a determines that all are not reach-less, the process proceeds to step S1304-3.

  In step S1304-3, the sub CPU 102a sets the random numbers indicated by the first and second random number counters related to the prefetch effect pattern determination random number as the prefetch effect pattern determination values 1 and 2, and the start opening winning designation command of the sub RAM 102c. Is stored in the pre-reading effect pattern determination random number storage area of the storage unit, and pre-reading special figure hold effect determination processing is performed in step S1304-4.

Here, the prefetch special figure hold effect determination process will be described with reference to FIG.
As shown in FIG. 42, in step S1304-4-1, the sub CPU 102a displays the final form of an image (hereinafter referred to as “special figure holding image”) that represents the right to execute special symbol display related to the start opening prize designation command. To decide. Specifically, the sub CPU 102a collates the start opening prize designation command with the prefetch effect pattern determination value 1 acquired in step S1304-3 of FIG. 41 to the special figure reserved image final mode determination table shown in FIG. Thus, the final mode of the special figure reservation image is determined, and the determined final mode is stored as the final mode data in the final mode storage area of the sub RAM 102c.

  In this case, the sub CPU 102a confirms the start opening prize designation command in the special figure reservation image final mode determination. This is because, as shown in FIG. 52, the special figure reserved image final mode determination table is divided according to the start opening prize designation command, that is, the result of the preliminary determination. Therefore, the sub CPU 102a selects the special figure reservation image final mode determination table associated with the start opening prize designation command based on the received start opening prize designation command in the special figure reservation image final mode determination.

As shown in FIG. 52, in the special figure reservation image final mode determination table associated with the start opening prize designation command, a final display showing a plurality of prefetch effect pattern determination values 1 and a special figure reservation image final mode. The mode data is stored in association with a predetermined probability.
For example, when the start opening prize designation command is E3H0BH corresponding to the first special figure hold and the prefetch effect pattern determination value 1 is “245”, the final form of the special figure hold image is the special form 1 (final form data = 01H). It is determined.

  Next, in step S1304-4-2, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the result of the special figure reservation image final mode determination is a predetermined special mode. The “special aspect” here refers to a special aspect different from the normal aspect. If the sub CPU 102a determines that it is not in the special mode, the sub CPU 102a ends the prefetched special figure hold effect determination processing, and if it is determined that the mode is in the special mode, the process proceeds to step S1304-4-3.

  In step S1304-4-3, the sub CPU 102a determines that the current game poem state is a jackpot gaming state (big hit) based on the data indicating the gaming state set in the gaming state storage area of the sub RAM 102c (see step S1314 in FIG. 39). It is determined whether it is medium). If the sub CPU 102a determines that it is a jackpot gaming state, it moves the process to step S1304-4-4, and if it determines that it is not a jackpot gaming state, it moves the process to step S1304-4-5.

  In step S1304-4-4, the sub CPU 102a determines the jackpot gaming state in which the current jackpot gaming state shifts to the short-time gaming state after the jackpot is ended based on the data indicating the gaming state set in the gaming state storage area of the sub RAM 102c. It is determined whether or not the game state schedule after the jackpot is the short-time game state. If the sub CPU 102a determines that it does not shift to the short-time gaming state (transfers to the non-time-saving gaming state), it moves the process to step S1304-4-8, and if it determines that it shifts to the short-time gaming state, it performs the process to step S1304-4-9. Move.

  In step S1304-4-5, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the current game poem state is a small hit gaming state (meeting a small hit) based on the data indicating the gaming state set in the gaming state storage area of the sub RAM 102c. Determine whether. If the sub CPU 102a determines that it is a small hit gaming state, it moves the process to step S1304-4-6, and if it determines that it is not a small hit gaming state, it moves the process to step S1304-4-7.

  In step S1304-4-6, the sub CPU 102a determines the gaming state before the current small hit gaming state based on the data indicating the gaming state set in the gaming state storage area of the sub RAM 102c. It is determined whether or not the schedule of the later game state is the short-time game state. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the time-saving gaming state is not reached (becomes a non-time-saving gaming state (non-time saving)), the process proceeds to step S1304-4-8. If the sub-CPU 102a determines that the time-saving gaming state is set, processing proceeds to step S1304-4-9. Move.

  In step S1304-4-7, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the current game poem state is the short-time game state (short-time medium) based on the data indicating the game state set in the game state storage area of the sub-RAM 102c. judge. If the sub CPU 102a determines that it is not the time saving gaming state (non-time saving gaming state (non-time saving medium)), it moves the process to step S1304-4-8, and if it determines that it is the time saving gaming state, step S1304-4-9. Move processing to.

  In step S1304-4-8, the sub CPU 102a performs scenario determination of the special figure holding effect (scenario determination of the special figure holding effect for non-time saving) related to the start opening prize designation command corresponding to the non-time saving gaming state, The process moves to step S1304-4-10.

  Here, the “scenario of the special figure holding effect” means the special figure from when the special figure holding (right to execute special symbol display) related to the display of the special figure holding image occurs until it disappears. It is a transition mode (scenario) of the display mode of the hold image. “Scenario determination of the special figure holding effect” is to determine the transition mode of the display mode of the special figure holding image.

  The sub CPU 102a determines the transition mode of the display mode of the special figure hold image in the scenario determination of the special figure hold effect corresponding to the non-time-saving gaming state shown in step S1304-4-8. Specifically, the sub CPU 102a determines the start opening prize designation command, the final mode data of the special figure reservation image determined in step S1304-4-1, and the first special figure reservation number set in step S1303 in FIG. U1 (count value U1 of the first special figure hold effect counter) or second special figure hold number U2 (count value U2 of the second special figure hold effect counter), and the prefetch effect pattern acquired in step S1304-3 of FIG. By confirming the determination value 2 and collating the confirmed data with the non-temporal special figure reservation scenario determination table (see FIGS. 53 to 60), the transition mode of the display form of the special figure reservation image is determined. To do. In FIG. 53 to FIG. 60, such a process is performed in step S1304-4-8 because, as shown in FIG. 53 to FIG. This is because it is divided according to the final mode of the special figure hold image determined in S1304-4-1 and the counter value of the special figure hold effect counter (= number of special figure hold).

  For example, in the non-short-time gaming state, E3H0BH corresponding to the first special figure hold is selected as the start opening prize designation command by winning the game ball to the first start opening 21, and the first special figure hold number (U1) = 1 and the result of the determination of the final mode of the special figure reservation image related to the winning (step S1304-4-1) is “special mode 1” (final mode data = 01H), and the prefetch effect pattern determination value 2 is “ 15 ”, the special figure holding effect scenario determination table corresponding to the non-time saving gaming state shown in FIG. 53 is selected, the special figure holding effect scenario“ 0001 ”is selected, and the first special figure holding image shown in FIG. The effect that 261 changes to the first special figure reservation image 261-1 of the special mode 1 is executed on the first display unit 711 a of the first special figure reservation display area 711.

  In the non-short-time gaming state, E3H0BH corresponding to the first special figure hold is selected as the start opening prize designation command by winning the game ball to the first start opening 21, and the first special figure hold number (U1) = 1 and the result of the determination of the final mode of the special figure reservation image related to the winning (step S1304-4-1) is “special mode 1” (final mode data = 01H), and the prefetch effect pattern determination value 2 is “ In the case of “200”, the special figure holding effect scenario determination table corresponding to the non-time saving gaming state shown in FIG. 53 is selected, the special figure holding effect scenario “0002” is selected, and the variable display corresponding display area 713 shown in FIG. The first special figure variable display corresponding image 263 displayed on the screen is changed from the normal mode to the first special figure variable display corresponding image 263-1 of the special mode 1 and displayed.

  In step S1304-4-9, the sub CPU 102a performs scenario determination of the special figure holding effect (scenario determination of special drawing holding effect for the short time) related to the start opening prize designation command corresponding to the short time gaming state, and step S1304. Move to -4-10.

  The sub CPU 102a determines the transition mode of the display mode of the special figure holding image in the scenario determination of the special figure holding effect corresponding to the short-time gaming state. Specifically, the sub CPU 102a determines the start opening prize designation command, the final mode data of the special figure reservation image determined in step S1304-4-1, and the first special figure reservation number set in step S1303 in FIG. The U1 or second special figure reservation number U2 and the prefetch effect pattern determination value 2 acquired in step S1304-3 in FIG. 41 are confirmed, and the confirmed data is used as the special figure reservation scenario determination table for time reduction (FIG. 61 to FIG. 61). 68), the transition mode of the display mode of the special figure reservation image is determined. In step S1304-4-9, such processing is performed, as shown in FIGS. 61 to 68, in which the special figure holding effect scenario determination table corresponding to the short-time gaming state is the start opening prize designation command, step S1304- This is because it is divided according to the final mode of the special figure hold image determined in 4-1, and the counter value (= number of special figure hold) of the special figure hold effect counter.

  For example, in the short-time gaming state, E3H0BH corresponding to the first special figure hold is selected as the start opening prize designation command by winning the game ball to the first start opening 21, and the first special figure hold number (U1) = 1. Thus, the result of the determination of the final mode of the special figure reservation image related to the winning (step S1304-4-1) is “special mode 1” (final mode data = 01H), and the prefetch effect pattern determination value 2 is “200”. ”, The special figure holding effect scenario determination table corresponding to the short-time gaming state shown in FIG. 60 is selected, the special figure holding effect scenario“ 1001 ”is selected, and the first special figure holding image 261 shown in FIG. An effect of changing to the first special figure reservation image 261-1 of the special mode 1 is executed in the first display section 711a of the first special figure reservation display area 711.

  In step S1304-4-10, the sub CPU 102a receives special figure hold effect scenario information (see FIGS. 53 to 68) indicating the special figure hold effect scenario determined in step S1304-4-8 or step S1304-4-9. And stored in the special figure reservation effect scenario information storage area of the sub RAM 102c.

  In step S1304-4-11, the sub CPU 102a sets the counter value of the current special figure hold effect counter as the number of executions of the prefetch special figure hold effect (Z1) in the prefetch special figure hold effect counter provided in the sub RAM 102c. Then, the prefetch special figure hold effect determination process is terminated, and the process returns to the prefetch effect process. Note that the prefetched special figure holding effect counter constitutes a counting means for controlling the special figure protection drawing effect in a special mode.

  In step S <b> 1304-5, the sub CPU 102 a determines whether or not it is currently in “effect mode A” indicating a low probability state and a non-time-short state. If the sub CPU 102a determines that it is not the effect mode A, it ends the prefetch effect process, and if it determines that it is the effect mode A, it moves the process to step S1304-6.

  In step S1304-6, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the counter value of the special figure holding effect counter is 2 or more. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the counter value of the special figure hold effect counter is not 2 or more, the sub CPU 102a ends the prefetch effect process. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the counter value of the special figure hold effect counter is 2 or more, in step S1304-7 Prefetch effect mode determination processing is performed.

  Here, the prefetch effect mode determination process will be described with reference to FIG. In step S1304-7-1, the sub CPU 102a determines an effect mode when the variation effect performed in the special symbol display related to the start opening prize designation command is performed. Specifically, the sub CPU 102a collates the prefetch effect pattern determination random number stored in step S1304-3 with the effect mode final mode determination table.

  The sub CPU 102a confirms the start opening winning designation command in the final production mode determination. This is because, as shown in FIG. 52, the effect mode final mode determination table is divided according to the start opening prize designation command, that is, the result of the preliminary determination. Therefore, the sub CPU 102a selects the presentation mode final mode determination table associated with the start opening prize designation command based on the received start opening prize designation command in the presentation mode final mode determination.

  As shown in FIG. 52, a plurality of pre-reading effect pattern determination values and effect mode final mode data indicating the final mode of the effect mode are predetermined in the effect mode final mode determination table associated with the start opening winning designation command. Are stored in association with each other.

  In step S1304-7-2, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the result of the effect mode final aspect determination is the effect mode of the special aspect (hereinafter referred to as “special effect mode”). Here, the “special aspect” means a special aspect different from the normal aspect. If the sub CPU 102a determines that it is not the special effect mode, the sub CPU 102a ends the prefetch effect mode determination process. If the sub CPU 102a determines that it is the special effect mode, the process proceeds to step S1304-7-3.

  In step S <b> 1304-7-3, the sub CPU 102 a determines the scenario of the effect mode up to the change effect performed in the special symbol display related to the start opening prize designation command. The “scenario of the effect mode until the variation effect” is a transition mode of the effect mode of the variation effect until notification of the special symbol determination (stop display of the special symbol) related to the variation effect is performed. “Scenario determination up to the effect mode of the variation effect” is to determine the transition mode of the effect mode.

  In the scenario determination up to the variation effect effect mode, the sub CPU 102a compares the random number for prefetch effect pattern determination stored in step S1304-3 with the scenario determination table up to the variation effect effect mode. Determine the scenario of the production mode.

  In the scenario determination up to the effect mode of the variation effect, the sub CPU 102a determines the start opening prize designation command, the final mode of the effect mode determined in step S1304-7-1, and the counter value (= Confirm the number of special figure hold. As shown in FIG. 70, this is because the effect mode scenario determination table includes the start opening prize designation command, the final mode of the effect mode determined in step S1304-7-1, and the counter value (= This is because it is divided by the number of special figure hold. In the production mode scenario determination, the sub CPU 102a sets the start opening prize designation command, the final mode of the production mode determined in step S1304-7-1, and the counter value of the special figure hold production counter (= number of special figure hold). Based on this, an effect mode scenario determination table used in the determination is selected.

  In step S1304-7-4, the sub CPU 102a stores effect mode scenario information (see FIG. 69) indicating the effect mode scenario determined in step S1304-7-3 in the effect mode scenario information storage area of the sub RAM 102c. .

  In step S1304-7-5, the sub CPU 102a sets the counter value of the current special figure hold effect counter as the number of executions of the prefetch effect mode in the prefetch effect mode counter (Z2) provided in the sub RAM 102c, The effect mode determination process ends, and the process returns to the prefetch effect process. Note that the prefetch effect mode counter constitutes counting means for controlling the effect mode in a special mode.

(Change control pattern determination processing of effect control board)
The variation effect pattern determination process by the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIG. In step S1308-1, the sub CPU 102a checks the current effect mode by referring to the effect mode flag stored in the effect mode flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and is associated with the current effect mode. A variation production pattern determination table is selected. This is because the variation effect pattern determination table is classified according to the effect mode.

  In step S1308-2, the sub CPU 102a refers to the variation pattern designation command stored in the reception buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and selects the variation effect pattern determination table associated with the variation pattern designation command. This is because the variation effect pattern determination table classified according to the type of effect mode is also classified by the variation pattern designation command.

  In the variation effect pattern determination table, one or more variation effect patterns are stored in association with the variation effect pattern determination value (see FIG. 71). The variation effect pattern is identification information representing a mode (specific contents) of the variation effect. The first image display device 71, the second image display device 72, the audio output device 73, and the effect lighting devices 74 to. 79, the effect effect device 80 and the effect effect device performed by the effect button device 10 are associated with each other.

  The variation production pattern includes the variation production time, the decorative display variation display mode, the presence / absence of reach production, the content of reach production, the presence / absence of production button production, the content of production button production, the production deployment structure, and the decoration made up of scenes and characters The content of the variation effect which consists of the kind of background of the design, etc. is set. That is, each variation effect pattern determination table is a table that stores information related to the variation effect.

  In step S1308-3, the sub CPU 102a stores the random number value indicated by the random number counter related to the random effect pattern determination random number in the random effect pattern determination random number storage area of the sub RAM 102c. In step S1308-4, the stored variable effect pattern is stored. The variation effect pattern determination for determining the variation effect pattern is performed by comparing the determination random number with the determined variation effect pattern determination table. In step S1308-5, the sub CPU 102a sets the variable effect control command corresponding to the variable effect pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c and sets the variable effect data storage area of the sub RAM 102c.

  The variation effect control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output processing in step S1700. For example, when the image control board 105 receives the variation effect control command, the image control board 105 causes the first image display device 71 to perform a variation display of the effect symbol based on the variation effect pattern indicated by the command (the effect symbol variation display is performed). ) And a background image based on the variation effect pattern corresponding to the command are displayed on the first image display device 71.

  In step S1308-6, the sub CPU 102a confirms the special figure holding effect scenario information and the counter value of the prefetched special figure holding effect counter (prefetched special figure holding effect information). In step S1308-7, the sub CPU 102a relates to the special effect described later. It is determined whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, the sub CPU 102a is currently displaying the special figure hold image according to the specific special mode, and immediately after the special figure hold according to the specific special mode is canceled by the disappearance of the special figure hold related to the special figure hold image. It is determined whether the image is digested.

  If the sub CPU 102a determines “NO”, the sub CPU 102a ends the variation effect pattern determination process. If the sub CPU 102a determines “YES”, the process proceeds to step S1308-8. As will be described later, a special figure hold image according to a specific special mode is displayed until immediately before the start of the change effect, and the special figure hold image according to the specific special mode is displayed when the change effect is started. This is because the second image display device 72 executes a predetermined special effect when the display of is finished.

  In step S1308-8, the sub CPU 102a checks the variation pattern designation command stored in the reception buffer of the sub RAM 102c. This is because the special production pattern associated with the production contents of the special production is a combination of the special figure variation pattern designation command of this time, and the special figure hold production scenario information and the counter value of the prefetch special figure hold production counter. This is because they are associated with each other. In other words, the special effect pattern determination table used to determine the special effect pattern associated with the effect contents of the special effect includes the special figure variation pattern designation command, the special figure hold effect scenario information, and the prefetch special figure hold effect counter. It is divided according to the counter value.

  In step S1308-9, the sub CPU 102a checks the random effect pattern determination random number acquired in step S1308-3. In the special effect pattern determination table used for determining the special effect pattern indicating the effect contents of the special effect, the special effect pattern and the random effect pattern random number are stored in association with each other with a predetermined probability. Because.

  In step S1308-10, the sub CPU 102a, based on the confirmed special figure variation pattern designation command and the counter value of the special figure hold effect scenario information and the prefetched special figure hold effect counter, The special effect pattern determination table associated with the counter value of the special figure hold effect scenario information and the prefetch special figure hold effect counter is selected.

  In step S1308-10, the sub CPU 102a performs special effect pattern determination in which the special effect pattern is determined by collating the random effect pattern determination random number with the selected special effect pattern determination table. In step S1308-11, the sub CPU 102a sets a special effect control command corresponding to the special effect pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c and also sets it in the special effect data storage area of the sub RAM 102c.

  The special effect control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process in step S1700. For example, when receiving a special effect control command, the image control board 105 causes the second image display device 72 to perform a special effect based on the special effect pattern indicated by the command. Details regarding the special effects will be described later.

(Processing control board hold count subtraction process)
With reference to FIG. 45, the hold number subtraction process by the effect control board 102 will be described. In step S1309-1, the sub CPU 102a checks the variation pattern designation command stored in the reception buffer of the sub RAM 102c.

  In step S 1309-2, the sub CPU 102 a determines whether or not the confirmed variation pattern designation command is based on winning in the first start port 21. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command is based on a winning to the first starting port 21, the process proceeds to step S1309-3, and is not a command based on the winning to the first starting port 21, that is, the second starting port. If it is determined that the command is based on a winning to 22, the process proceeds to step S1309-5.

  In step S1309-3, the sub CPU 102a updates the counter value of the first special figure hold effect counter provided in the sub RAM 102c by subtracting “1”, and in step S1309-4, the first special figure hold effect disappearance designation flag is updated. Is stored in the first special figure reservation effect disappearance designation flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c.

  On the other hand, the sub CPU 102a updates the counter value of the second special figure holding effect counter provided in the sub RAM 102c by subtracting “1” in step S1309-5, and the second special figure holding effect disappears in step S1309-6. The designation flag is stored in the second special figure reservation effect disappearance designation flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c.

  In step S1309-7, the sub CPU 102a shifts the data stored in the special figure holding effect storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and each data stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit is immediately previous. Shift to storage. For example, data stored in the fourth storage unit of the first special figure hold effect storage area is shifted to the third storage unit of the first special figure hold effect storage area. Further, the data stored in the first storage unit of the first special figure holding effect storage area is the variable storage unit (the first common figure holding effect storage area and the second special figure holding effect storage area) The data stored in the 0th storage unit is erased. Thereby, the data used in the previous game (variation effect) is deleted.

  In step S1309-8, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the special figure hold effect scenario information is set in the special figure hold effect scenario information storage area of the sub RAM 102c. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the special figure reservation effect scenario information is not set, it moves the process to step S1309-10. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the special figure reservation effect scenario information is set, the sub CPU 102a reads in advance in step S1309-9. The counter value of the special figure hold effect counter is updated by subtracting “1”, and the process proceeds to step S1309-10. (Although omitted in the drawing, the pre-read special figure hold effect counter is provided with a first special figure hold and a second special figure hold separately, and the hold number subtraction process is the first special figure hold. And the 2nd special figure hold is done individually.)

  In step S1309-10, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not effect mode scenario information is set in the effect mode scenario information storage area of the sub RAM 102c. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the production mode scenario information is not set, the sub CPU 102a ends the hold number subtraction process. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the production mode scenario information is set, in step S1309-11, the pre-reading production mode counter is set. The counter value is updated by subtracting “1”, and the pending number subtraction process is terminated.

(Produce mode control process of effect control board)
Next, the effect mode control process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S1312-1, the sub CPU 102a analyzes the special effect designating command stored in the reception buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and in step S1312-2, determines whether or not the result of the jackpot determination is a loss. judge.

  If the sub CPU 102a determines that it is not lost, it moves the process to step S1312-2, and if it determines that it is lost, it determines in step S1312-3 whether it is currently in the effect mode “A”.

  If the sub CPU 102a determines that the effect mode is “A”, the process proceeds to step S1312-2. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the effect mode is not “A”, the sub CPU 102a sets the counter value of the effect mode remaining number counter in step S1312-4. “1” is subtracted to update the remaining number (M) of the effect mode, and in Step 1312-5, it is determined whether or not the counter value of the effect mode remaining number counter is “0”. This effect mode remaining number counter has a function of counting the remaining number of times of execution of the variable effect in the effect mode in which the number of executions of the variable effect is set (M: remaining number of effects mode).

  If the sub CPU 102a determines that the counter value of the effect mode remaining number counter is “0”, in step S1312-6, the effect mode flag “F20” is turned on in the effect mode flag storage area, and the effect mode setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when determining that the counter value of the effect mode remaining number counter is not “0”, the sub CPU 102a ends the effect mode control process.

  In step S1312-7, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the result of the special symbol lottery is a small hit. If the sub CPU 102a determines that it is not a small hit, the process proceeds to step S1312-9. If the sub CPU 102a determines that it is a small hit, in step S1312-8, the current predetermined rendering mode (in this embodiment, the rendering mode “ A ”or effect mode“ C ”). If the sub CPU 102a determines that it is not the predetermined effect mode, it moves the process to step S1312--3, and if it determines that it is the predetermined effect mode, it moves the process to step S1312-2.

  In step S1312-9, the sub CPU 102a determines the effect mode stored in the sub ROM 102b in association with the type of the special effect symbol designating command based on the information included in the special effect symbol designating command analyzed in step S1312-1. A table is selected (see FIG. 74).

  The effect mode determination value and the effect mode are associated with each other in the effect mode determination table for each type of special effect designating command. Therefore, in step S1312-9, the sub CPU 102a performs an effect mode determination for determining an effect mode in the subsequent variable effects. Specifically, sub CPU102a collates a special effect designating command with an effect mode determination table, and determines an effect mode.

  In step S1312-10, the sub CPU 102a stores an effect mode flag corresponding to the determined effect mode in the effect mode flag storage area. In step S1312-2, the sub CPU 102a is set corresponding to the determined effect mode. The production mode execution count (Ma) is set in the production mode remaining frequency counter, and the process proceeds to step S1312-2.

  In step S1312-2, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not effect mode scenario information is set. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the production mode scenario information is not set, the sub CPU 102a ends the production mode control process. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the production mode scenario information is set, the sub CPU 102a moves the process to step S1312-2.

  The sub CPU 102a confirms the effect mode scenario information and the counter value of the prefetch effect mode counter (prefetch effect mode information) in step S1312-2, and the effect mode scenario information and the counter value of the prefetch effect mode counter in step S1312-2. The effect mode in the next variation effect is determined based on the effect mode scenario determination table, and in step S1312-2, an effect mode flag indicating the effect mode is set in the effect mode storage area of the sub RAM 102c.

  In step S1312-16, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the count value of the prefetch effect mode counter is “0”. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the counter value of the prefetch effect mode counter is not “0”, the sub CPU 102a ends the effect mode control process. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the counter value of the prefetch effect mode counter is “0”, step S1312-2 The production mode scenario information is cleared and the production mode control process ends.

(Production button production control processing of production control board)
Next, the effect button effect control process will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S1401, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the effect button first vibration flag = 01 is set in the effect button first vibration flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c. Here, if the effect button first vibration flag = 01 is not set, the sub CPU 102a proceeds to the process of step S1404. If the effect button first vibration flag = 01 is set, the sub CPU 102a proceeds to the process of step S1402. Transition.

  In step S1402, the sub CPU 102a is currently in the first vibration period, which is the first candidate for the period for vibrating the effect button 10A, based on the count value of the button effect counter and the specific hold effect scenario information (FIG. 84 (b). ))). Here, if it is during the first vibration period, the sub CPU 102a proceeds to the process of step S1403, and if not during the first vibration period, it proceeds to the process of step S1410.

  In step S1403, the sub CPU 102a sets the effect button vibration command in the transmission buffer, and proceeds to the process of step S1410. The effect button vibration command is a command for causing the lamp control board 104 to perform control to vibrate the effect button 10A.

  In step S1404, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the effect button second vibration flag = 01 is set in the effect button second vibration flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c. Here, if the effect button second vibration flag = 01 is not set, the sub CPU 102a proceeds to the process of step S1407. If the effect button second vibration flag = 01 is set, the sub CPU 102a proceeds to the process of step S1405. Transition.

  In step S1405, based on the count value of the button effect counter and the specific hold effect scenario information, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not it is currently in the second vibration period that is the second candidate of the period for vibrating the effect button 10A. To do. Here, if it is during the second vibration period, the sub CPU 102a proceeds to the process of step S1406, and if not during the second vibration period, it proceeds to the process of step S1410.

  In step S1406, the sub CPU 102a sets the effect button vibration command in the transmission buffer, and proceeds to the process of step S1410.

  In step S1407, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the effect button third vibration flag = 01 is set in the effect button second vibration flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c. Here, if the effect button third vibration flag = 01 is not set, the sub CPU 102a proceeds to the process of step S1410. If the effect button third vibration flag = 01 is set, the sub CPU 102a proceeds to the process of step S1408. Transition.

  In step S1408, based on the count value of the button effect counter and the specific hold effect scenario information, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not it is currently in the third vibration period that is the third candidate for the period for vibrating the effect button 10A. To do. Here, if it is during the third vibration period, the sub CPU 102a proceeds to the process of step S1409, and if not during the third vibration period, it proceeds to the process of step S1410.

In step S1409, the sub CPU 102a sets the effect button vibration command in the transmission buffer, and proceeds to the process of step S1410.
In step S1410, the sub CPU 102a performs an effect input control process corresponding to the operation of the effect button 10A, and ends the current process. The effect input control process will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

(Production control board production input control processing)
The effect input control process will be described with reference to FIG.
First, in step S1411, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not there is a valid effect button detection signal from the effect button detection switch 17a. If the sub CPU 102a determines that there is no such signal, the sub CPU 102a ends the process. If it determines that there is the signal, the sub CPU 102a proceeds to the process of step S1412.

  In step S1412, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the button effect executable flag = 01 is set in the button effect executable flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c. Here, if the button effect executable flag = 01 is not set, the sub CPU 102a ends the process. If the button effect executable flag = 01 is set, the sub CPU 102a proceeds to the process of step S1413.

  In step S1413, the sub CPU 102a sets a button effect execution command in the transmission buffer. This command is a command for causing the image control board 105 to execute the button effect of the moving image.

  Here, the sub CPU 102a transmits the command set in the transmission buffer to the image control board 105 and the lamp control board 104 in step S1700 (see FIG. 37) after the effect input control process. Based on the received command, the image control board 105 operates the first image display device 71, the second image display device 72, the sound output device 73, the liquid crystal display device 31, and the sound output device 32 to control the lamp. The board 104 operates the effect button device 10, the effect lighting devices 74 to 79, and the effect accessory device 80 based on the received command.

(Special drawing hold production control processing of production control board)
Next, the special figure reservation effect control process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S1501, the sub CPU 102a stores, in the sub RAM 102c, a first special figure hold effect generation designation flag, a second special figure hold effect generation designation flag, a first special figure hold effect disappearance designation flag, and a second special figure hold effect. It is determined whether or not the special figure hold effect change designation flag constituted by the disappearance designation flag is ON. This special figure hold effect change designation flag means that the special figure hold effect change timing is due to a change in the number of special figure holds (U1 and U2) based on the generation or disappearance of the right to execute the special symbol display.

  If the sub CPU 102a determines that the special figure hold effect change designation flag is not turned on, the sub CPU 102a ends the special figure hold effect change control process, and if the sub CPU 102a determines that the special figure hold effect change designation flag is turned on, the process proceeds to step S1502. Move.

  In step S1502, the sub CPU 102a determines the contents of the special figure hold effect change designation flag, that is, the first special figure hold effect generation designation flag, the second special figure hold effect generation designation flag, the first special figure hold effect disappearance designation flag or It is confirmed which of the second special figure hold effect disappearance designation flag is ON.

  In step S1503, the sub CPU 102a checks the counter value (U1) of the first special figure hold effect counter and the counter value (U2) of the second special figure hold effect counter.

  In step S1504, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not special figure reservation effect scenario information is set. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the special figure holding effect scenario information is not set, the sub CPU 102a moves the process to step S1506. The counter value of the special figure holding effect counter is confirmed, and the process proceeds to step S1506.

  In step S1506, the sub CPU 102a determines the contents of the special figure hold effect change flag, the counter value (U1) of the first special figure hold effect counter, the counter value (U2) of the second special figure hold effect counter, and the special figure hold effect scenario. Based on the information and the counter value of the prefetch special figure hold effect counter, a special figure hold effect control command indicating the contents of the special figure hold effect is generated. In step S1507, the special figure hold effect control command sub-RAM 102c stores the special figure hold effect control command. At the same time, it is set in the special figure holding effect data storage area of the sub RAM 102c. This is because the contents of the special figure hold effect include the contents of the special figure hold effect change flag, the counter value (U1) of the first special figure hold effect counter, the counter value (U2) of the second special figure hold effect counter, and the special value. This is because it is based on the figure hold effect scenario information and the counter value of the prefetch special figure hold effect counter. Details regarding the special figure holding effect will be described later.

  The special figure reservation effect control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output processing in step S1700. For example, when the image control board 105 receives the special figure hold effect control command, the image control board 105 displays the special figure hold image having the content indicated by the command on the first image display device 71 and / or the second image display device 72. Make it. In the present embodiment, this is performed in the first image display device 71.

  In step S1508, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the counter value of the prefetch special figure hold effect counter is “0”. If the counter value of the prefetch special figure hold effect counter is not “0”, the sub CPU 102a turns off the special figure hold effect change designation flag in step S1510, and ends the special figure hold effect control process. If the count value of the prefetch special figure hold effect counter is “0”, the sub CPU 102a clears the special figure hold effect scenario information in step S1509, and moves the process to step S1510.

  Next, the special figure holding effect will be described. The special figure hold effect is an effect related to the right to execute special symbol display (special symbol determination) based on winning in the first starting port 21 or the second starting port 22 (hereinafter referred to as “special symbol holding”), This is mainly performed in the first image display device 71 and / or the second image display device 72. The special figure hold effect is performed according to the occurrence of special figure hold due to winning a prize and the disappearance of special figure hold due to execution of special symbol display (special symbol determination).

  The special figure hold effect in the first image display device 71 and / or the second image display device 72 is performed by displaying a special figure hold image corresponding to the special figure hold. The special figure hold image is generated based on the first special figure hold image generated based on the winning at the first start port 21 and the special figure hold image generated based on the win at the second start port 22. It consists of.

  The first image display device 71 has a first special figure reservation display area 711 for displaying the first special figure reservation image at the lower left part of the display area, and a second special figure reservation image for displaying the second special figure reservation image at the lower right part of the display area. And a special figure hold display area 712 (see FIG. 1). In the gaming state excluding the jackpot, a frame image 721 indicating the first special figure hold display area is displayed around the first special figure hold display area 711, and the second special figure hold display area 712 is displayed around the first special figure hold display area 712. A frame image 722 indicating one special figure hold display area is displayed (see FIG. 72).

  The first special figure hold display area 711 further includes a first display unit 711a, a second display unit 711b, a third display unit 711c, and a fourth display unit 711d. Each of the display units 711a to 711d is arranged in order from the right side, and a special symbol display is executed out of special figure hold (hereinafter referred to as “first special figure hold”) based on winning in the first start port 21. It corresponds to the order. That is, the first display unit 711a is an area in which an image representing the first special symbol display executed in the first special figure hold is displayed, and the second display unit 711b is the first special figure. The third display unit 711c displays the image indicating that the second special symbol display is executed second in the hold, and the third special display is the third special symbol display in the first special symbol hold. An area in which an image representing what is to be executed is displayed, and the fourth display unit 711d is an area in which an image representing what is being executed in the first special symbol display for the fourth time in the first special figure hold is displayed. Yes (see FIG. 1). Similarly, the second special figure holding display area 712 of the first image display device 71 further includes a first display unit 712a, a second display unit 712b, a third display unit 712c, and a fourth display unit 712d (see FIG. 1). ). Each of the display units 712a to 712d is arranged in order from the left side, and a special symbol display is executed out of special figure hold (hereinafter referred to as “second special figure hold”) based on winning in the first start port 22 respectively. It corresponds to the order.

  A variable display corresponding display area 713 is set between the second special figure hold display area 712 of the first special figure hold display area 711 (see FIG. 1). During the non-time saving game state (non-time saving time), a frame image 723 indicating the special figure variable display corresponding display area is displayed around the variable display corresponding display area 713 (see FIG. 72). In the variable display corresponding display area 713, a variable display of a special symbol being executed by winning a prize at the first starting port 21 or the second starting port 22 (a special display based on winning at the first starting port 21 or the second starting port 22 is performed. The variable display corresponding display image corresponding to the special symbol currently being executed due to the figure hold) is displayed. The same normal mode and special modes 1 to 6 as those used for the first special reserved image are used for the variable display corresponding display image.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 51, the hold display areas (the first special figure hold display area 711 and the second special figure hold display area 712) have a non-short game state and a short time game state. Is displayed by the frame images 721 and 722, and is not displayed when the gaming state is the jackpot gaming state. The variable display corresponding display area 713 is displayed by the frame image 723 when the gaming state is the non-short game state, and is not displayed when the gaming state is the short-time gaming state and the jackpot gaming state.

Next, the display mode of the special figure hold image will be described.
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 52 and FIG. 53, eight types of display modes of the first special figure reservation number special figure reserved image are set: normal mode, special mode 1 to special mode 6, and special mode. Yes.

  The normal mode is a display mode that is a normal standard in the gaming machine Y, and is displayed with a white ball. The special mode 1 is a special display mode that suggests execution of a special effect, which will be described later, with a first expectation level (low expectation level), and is displayed with a blue ball. The special mode 2 is a special display mode that suggests execution of a special effect, which will be described later, with a second expectation level (medium expectation level) higher than the first expectation level, and is displayed with a green ball. The special mode 3 is a special display mode that suggests winning with a high probability of short and short wins or small hits in a state where the degree of expectation of winning is higher than the special mode 2, and is displayed with a red ball. Special mode 4 is a special display mode that suggests winning of a specific jackpot in a state where the expectation level of winning is higher than that of special mode 2, and is displayed with a gold ball. The special mode 5 is a special display mode that suggests that the expectation of winning the jackpot is higher than the special mode 2, and is displayed with a zebra pattern ball. The special mode 6 is a special display mode that suggests that the jackpot winning is confirmed and has a low appearance rate and a high rarity value, and is displayed with a rainbow ball. The special mode is a display mode indicating that the display mode is determined to change to any one of the special mode 1 to the special mode 6, and? The ball is displayed with a mark.

  FIG. 52 is a diagram illustrating an example of a special figure reserved image final mode determination table for the first special figure hold and the second special figure hold stored in the sub ROM 102b.

  FIG. 53 is a special figure holding effect scenario in the case of non-short-time gaming state (non-temporary short-time) in the first special figure hold stored in the sub-ROM 102b, and a loss (“lost without reach”, “lost with reach”). It is a figure showing an example of the determination table. FIG. 54 is a special figure on-holding effect scenario determination table in the case of winning A (hit 1: “per 1st long time with high probability”) during the non-time saving gaming state in the first special figure holding stored in the sub ROM 102b. It is a figure showing an example. FIG. 55 shows a win B (3 to 5 per hit: “high probability short-lived first specified big hit”, “high probability short-lived second specified during the non-short-time gaming state in the first special figure hold stored in the sub-ROM 102b. It is a figure showing an example of the special figure holding | maintenance production | presentation scenario determination table in the case of "big hit" and "high probability short-lived 3rd specific big hit"). FIG. 56 is a special view in the case of hit C (8, 9: “high probability short / short short hit”, “small win”) during the non-short-time gaming state in the first special figure hold stored in the sub-ROM 102b. It is a figure showing an example of a pending | holding effect scenario determination table.

  FIG. 57 shows an example of the special figure holding effect scenario determination table in the case of a loss (“losing without reach”, “losing with reach”) during the non-short-time gaming state in the second special figure hold stored in the sub ROM 102b. FIG. FIG. 58 is a special figure on-holding effect scenario determination table in the case of winning A (hit 1: “per 1st long time with high probability”) during the non-time saving gaming state in the second special figure holding stored in the sub ROM 102b. It is a figure showing an example. FIG. 59 shows a win B (3 to 5 per hit: “high probability short-lived first specified big hit”, “high probability short-lived second specified during the non-short-time gaming state in the second special figure hold stored in the sub-ROM 102b. It is a figure showing an example of the special figure holding | maintenance production | presentation scenario determination table in the case of "big hit" and "high probability short-lived 3rd specific big hit"). FIG. 60 is a special diagram in the case of hit C (8, 9: “high probability short / short short hit”, “small win”) in the non-short-time gaming state in the second special figure hold stored in the sub ROM 102b. It is a figure showing an example of a pending | holding effect scenario determination table.

  FIG. 61 is a special figure on-holding effect scenario determination table in the case of a short-time gaming state (short-time) in the first special figure hold stored in the sub-ROM 102b, and a loss (“lost without reach”, “lost with reach”). It is a figure showing an example. FIG. 62 shows the special figure on-holding effect scenario determination table in the case of winning A (winning 1: “per 1st long time with high probability”) during the short-time gaming state in the first special figure holding stored in the sub ROM 102b. It is a figure showing an example. FIG. 63 shows a win B (3 to 5 per hit: “high probability short-lived first specific jackpot”, “high probability short-lived second special jackpot during the short-time gaming state in the first special figure hold stored in the sub-ROM 102b. ], “A high probability short-lived third specific jackpot”) is a diagram illustrating an example of a special figure holding effect scenario determination table. FIG. 64 is a special figure hold in the case of a win C (8, 9: “high probability short and short wins”, “small win”) during the short-time gaming state in the first special figure hold stored in the sub ROM 102b. It is a figure showing an example of a production scenario determination table.

  FIG. 65 shows an example of a special figure holding effect scenario determination table in the case of a loss (“Leach without reach”, “Leach with reach”) during the short-time gaming state in the second special figure hold stored in the sub-ROM 102b. FIG. FIG. 66 shows a special figure on-holding effect scenario determination table in the case of winning A (per win 1: “per 1st long with high probability”) during the short-time gaming state in the second special figure hold stored in the sub ROM 102b. It is a figure showing an example. FIG. 67 shows a win B (3 to 5 per hit: “high probability short-lived first specific jackpot”, “high probability short-lived second special jackpot during the time-saving gaming state in the second special figure hold stored in the sub-ROM 102b. ], “A high probability short-lived third specific jackpot”) is a diagram illustrating an example of a special figure holding effect scenario determination table. FIG. 68 shows the special figure hold in the case of winning C (8, 9: “high probability short and short no hit”, “small hit”) in the short time gaming state in the second special figure hold stored in the sub ROM 102b. It is a figure showing an example of a production scenario determination table.

  Next, the special figure hold effect (prefetch special figure hold effect) based on the prior determination (S236 or S246) in the main control board 101 will be described. Here, as a premise, a variable display compatible display image corresponding to the variable display of the first special figure is displayed in the variable display compatible display area 713 (hereinafter referred to as the first special display) in the variable display compatible display area 713. (Referred to as a figure variable display compatible image) is displayed as the first special figure variable display compatible image 263 in the normal mode, and the current number of first special figure hold (U1) = 2, that is, there are two first special figure hold, It is assumed that the result of the prior determination relating to each first special figure hold is “no reach”. Further, the first special figure reservation images corresponding to both first special figure reservations are displayed in the first special figure reservation display area 711 of the first image display device 71 as the first special figure reservation image 261 of the normal mode. (See FIG. 72 (b)).

  Here, when the game ball wins the first start opening 21 and the first special figure hold occurs, the first pre-determination is performed on the main control board 101 (S236), and the first start opening winning representing the determination result is made. A designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 102. Then, in the effect control board 102, the first special figure hold generation designation flag is turned ON in the sub RAM 102c, and the counter value of the first special figure hold effect counter becomes “3”. At this time, the final mode of the special figure reservation image related to the winning is determined (step S1304-4-1). If the determination result is “normal mode”, the special figure hold effect scenario is not set, and the number of executions of the special figure hold effect is not set in the pre-read special figure hold effect counter (“NO” in S1304-4-2). ").

  Then, based on the first special figure hold generation designation flag, the first special figure hold effect counter, and the second special figure hold effect counter that are turned on, a special figure hold effect control command including information indicated by these is generated. (S1506), the image is transmitted to the image control board 105 (S1700). As a result, as shown in FIG. 72C, the first special figure holding image 261 of the normal mode is displayed on the third display unit 711c.

  Thereafter, when the variation display of the special symbol is finished, the first special figure hold erasure designation flag is turned ON in the sub RAM 102c, and the counter value of the first special figure hold effect counter becomes “2”. Therefore, the first special figure holding image 261 is shifted as it is. Specifically, the first special figure reservation image 261 displayed on the first display unit 711a disappears, and the first special figure reservation image 261 displayed on the second display unit 711b remains in the first form. It moves to the display part 711a, and the 1st special figure reservation image 261 currently displayed on the 3rd display part 711c moves to the 2nd display part 711b with the aspect. Also, the first special figure corresponding image 263 displayed in the variable display corresponding display area 713 disappears, and the first special figure corresponding to the first special figure holding image 261 displayed in the first display unit 711a. The variable display corresponding image 263 is newly displayed in the variable display corresponding display area 713.

  Thus, the current number of special figure hold (the counter value of the first special figure hold effect counter and the counter value of the second special figure hold effect counter), the cause of the current special figure hold number (special figure hold change designation) Special figure hold based on the transition type (prefetch special figure hold effect scenario information) and the time reference of the prefetch special figure hold effect (counter value of the prefetch special figure hold effect counter) The display of the image is controlled.

  Next, an example will be described in which a special figure hold image is displayed in a special manner as a prefetch special figure hold effect. The premise is the same as in the above example. Here, the first start opening 21 is won, and the result of the first pre-judgment is “E3H0BH (Leach without reach)”, and the final mode judgment of the special figure pending image related to the win (step S1304-4-) It is assumed that the result of 1) is “special aspect 1” and the special figure holding effect scenario is “0006” (see FIG. 53). In this case, as in the case of the normal mode example, the first special figure hold occurrence designation flag is turned ON in the sub RAM 102c, and the counter value of the first special figure hold effect counter becomes “3”. The special figure hold effect scenario “0006” is set, and “3” is set as the number of executions of the special figure hold effect in the prefetch special figure hold effect counter. As a result, as shown in FIG. 72 (d), after the first special figure hold image 261 in the normal mode is displayed on the third display unit 711c for a short time at the time of winning, the first special figure hold image in the special mode 1 is displayed. 261-1 is displayed on the third display unit 711c.

  Further, when the result of the determination of the final mode of the special figure hold image related to the winning (step S1304-4-1) is “special mode 1”, the special figure hold effect scenario is “0008” (FIG. 53). As shown in FIGS. 73 (a) and 73 (b), the first special figure holding image 261 in the normal mode is displayed on the third display unit 711c at the time of winning. However, when the variation display of the special symbol is finished and the next special symbol display (lottery effect) is executed, the first special diagram hold image 261 is shifted as a whole as shown in FIG. 73 (c). Thus, the first special figure reservation image 261 in the normal mode displayed on the third display unit 711c moves to the second display unit 711b, and the first special figure reservation image 261 in the normal mode is short on the second display unit 711b. After the time display, the first special figure holding image 261-1 of the special mode 1 is changed.

  Further, when the result of the determination of the final mode of the special figure hold image related to the winning (step S1304-4-1) is “special mode 1”, the special figure hold effect scenario is “0007” (FIG. 53). As shown in FIGS. 74 (a) to 74 (c), the special mode 1 is displayed after the first special figure holding image 261 of the normal mode is displayed on the third display unit 711c for a short time at the time of winning. The first special figure reservation image 261-1 is displayed on the third display unit 711 c, and all the first special figure reservation images 261 related to winnings before the winning are changed from the normal mode to the special mode 1.

  In the case of the special figure reservation effect scenario “0007”, the three first special figure reservation images 261-1 that have become the special mode 1 do not change to other display modes thereafter. Then, the first special figure reservation image 261-1 eventually disappears in the special mode 1 together with the execution of the special symbol display related to the first special figure reservation image 261-1, that is, the lottery effect. At the same time, the first special figure variable display corresponding image corresponding to the lottery effect executed in the variable display corresponding display area 713 is the first special figure variable display corresponding image of the special mode 1 similar to the first special figure reservation image 261. 263-1. The same applies to the first special figure hold image 261-1 that has become the special mode 1 in the case of the special figure hold effect scenario “0006” and the special figure hold effect scenario “0008”.

  As described above, the special mode 1 is a display mode that suggests execution of a special effect. The special effect is an effect that suggests the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot, and the change immediately after the special figure hold image disappears in the special mode 1 as shown in the special figure hold effect scenarios “0006” to “0008”, etc. Performed in production.

  Next, the contents of special effects will be described. The content of the single special effect is determined based on the type of the variation pattern designation command for which the special effect is performed and the acquired random number for determining the variation effect pattern. And the expectation degree of a big win is suggested by the weapon and attack content selected in the battle as the production content of the special performance.

  Thus, based on the prior determination result, one or a plurality of special figure hold images according to the same special mode 1 suggesting execution of a predetermined effect (special effect) are displayed, and a display form (one / multiple) is displayed. Since a predetermined effect in a form according to the number of pieces is executed, the interest of the game can be improved. Furthermore, the special performance is performed immediately after the disappearance of the special figure reserved image according to the special mode 1, and indicates the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot. In other words, the special type 1 image disappears, that is, the type of effect changes from the end of the prefetched special figure hold effect to the start of the special effect, and the content suggested by the effect changes and develops. In addition to preventing the game from becoming monotonous, it is possible to increase the expectation of the player while maintaining it.

Next, the button effect performed in combination with the special drawing reservation scenario of the special effect will be described.
(Special figure hold effect scenario determination table for the first special figure hold used in non-time-saving gaming state)

  As shown in FIGS. 53 and 54, the special figure hold effect scenario determination table used in the non-time saving gaming state associated with the first start opening prize designation command includes a plurality of prefetch effect pattern determination values and special figure hold. The production scenario is stored in association with a predetermined probability.

Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 53, the first special figure holding special figure holding effect scenarios “0031”, “0032”, “0033”, “0034”, “0035” used in the non-time-saving gaming state will be described.
(Special figure hold effect scenario “0031” of the first special figure hold used in non-short-time gaming state)
In FIG. 53, in the special figure holding effect scenario “0031” of the first special figure holding in the non-time-saving gaming state, the start opening prize designation command (preliminary determination result) is “E3H0AH (reach with reach)”, and the final mode data is “01H”, the initial counter value U1 of the first special figure hold effect counter is “4 (4 hold)”, and the prefetch effect pattern determination value is “135”.

  The contents of the special figure holding effect scenario “0031” are as follows. First, in the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (this variable display is referred to as the Nth special symbol variable display), The number of figure hold (U1) = 4 or the first special figure hold number (U1) = 3 from the state of the first special figure hold number (U1) = 3 and the first special figure hold number (U1) Assuming that the state becomes = 4, the first special figure holding image 261 of the normal mode corresponding to the start opening winning designation command generated by the latest entry to the first start opening 21 is the fourth display portion 711d. (See FIGS. 1 and 72).

  Next, when the N-th special symbol variation display is completed, the first special figure reservation image 261 of the normal mode moves to the third display unit 711c, and the N + 1-th special symbol variation display to be executed next is being performed (FIG. 47). During the first vibration period, which is the first candidate for the period of vibrating the effect button shown in step S1402), the button press requesting the operation of the effect button 10A and the operation of the effect button 10A by the effect button vibration device 10C The image of the operation request is displayed. While the button operation request image is displayed, when the effect button detection switch 10a detects the operation of the effect button 10A or when a predetermined time has elapsed, the image display of the button operation request disappears and the third display unit 711c (FIG. 1 and FIG. 72), the first special figure hold image 261-1 (see FIG. 72) of the special mode 1 is switched and displayed.

  When the (N + 1) th special symbol variation display ends, the first special figure reservation image 261-1 of the special mode 1 moves to the second display unit 711b (see FIGS. 1 and 72). During the subsequent (N + 2) th special symbol variation display, the first special figure hold image 261-1 of the special mode 1 is continuously displayed on the second display unit 711b.

  When the (N + 2) th special symbol variation display ends, the first special figure reservation image 261-1 of the special mode 1 moves to the first display unit 711a (see FIGS. 1 and 72). During the N + 3th special symbol variation display thereafter, the first special figure hold image 261-1 of the special mode 1 is continuously displayed on the first display unit 711a.

  When the N + 3th special symbol variation display is completed, the first special figure variable display corresponding image 263 disappears from the variable display corresponding display area 713, and the first special figure reserved image 261-1 of the special mode 1 is displayed from the first display unit 711a. Disappears, and the first special figure variable display corresponding image 263-1 (see FIG. 72) corresponding to the first special figure reservation image 261-1 displayed on the first display unit 711a is displayed in the variable display corresponding display area 713. Based on the start opening winning designation command that is newly displayed and corresponds to the first special figure holding image 261-1 of the special mode 1, the N + 4th special symbol variation display is executed.

  In the special figure holding effect scenario “0031”, an effect corresponding to the button operation request and the button operation is performed in the first and second periods of the N + 4th special symbol variation display, but the effect button vibration device 10C vibrates the effect button 10A. I will not.

(The special figure hold effect scenario “0032” of the first special figure hold used in the non-short-time gaming state)
In the special figure hold effect scenario “0032” of the first special figure hold used in the non-short-time gaming state, the start opening prize designation command (preliminary determination result) is “E3H0AH (reach with reach)”, and the final aspect data is “01H” ”, The initial counter value U1 of the first special figure hold effect counter is associated with“ 4 (4 hold) ”, and the prefetch effect pattern determination value is“ 136 to 137 ”.

  The contents of the special figure holding effect scenario “0032” are as follows. First, during the Nth special symbol variation display, the first special figure holding number (U1) = 4 or the first special figure holding number ( Assuming that a game ball enters the first starting port 21 from the state of U1) = 3 and becomes the state of the first special figure reservation number (U1) = 4, the newest to the first starting port 21 The first special figure holding image 261 in the normal mode corresponding to the start opening winning designation command generated by entering the ball is displayed on the fourth display unit 711d.

  Next, when the N-th special symbol variation display is completed, the first special symbol hold image 261 in the normal mode moves to the third display unit 711c, and the button is displayed during the (N + 1) -th special symbol variation display to be executed next. The image display of the operation request (the button pressing operation request or the button repeated operation request) is not performed, and the button is not vibrated. While the button operation request image is being displayed, the effect button detection switch 10a detects the operation of the effect button 10A, or when a predetermined time has elapsed, the button operation request image display disappears and the third display unit 711c has a special display. The first special figure reservation image 261-1 of the aspect 1 is displayed by switching.

  When the (N + 1) th special symbol variation display is completed, in the subsequent two special symbol variation displays (N + 2nd and N + 3 special symbol variation display), the first special symbol suspension special diagram used in the non-short game state. The same first special figure holding image 261 as the holding effect scenario “0031” is displayed. When the two special symbol variation displays are completed, the first special figure variable display corresponding image 263 disappears from the variable display corresponding display area 713, and the first special figure hold image 261 of the special mode 1 is displayed from the first display unit 711a. 1 disappears, and the first special figure variable display corresponding image 263-1 corresponding to the first special figure reservation image 261-1 displayed on the first display unit 711a is newly displayed in the variable display corresponding display area 713. The special symbol fluctuation display (N + 4th special symbol fluctuation display) corresponding to the first special figure reservation image 261-1 of the special mode 1 is executed.

In the first half of the special symbol variation display (N + 4th special symbol variation display) (during the second vibration period that is the second candidate of the period for vibrating the effect button shown in step S1405 in FIG. 47), the effect button vibration device The vibration of the effect button 10A by 10C and the image display of the button operation request for requesting the operation of the effect button 10A are performed.
In the latter period of the special symbol variation display (N + 4th special symbol variation display), the button operation request image is displayed, but the effect button 10A is not vibrated.

(Special figure reservation effect scenario “0033” of the first special figure hold used in non-short-time gaming state)
In the special figure hold effect scenario “0033” of the first special figure hold used in the non-short-time gaming state, the start opening prize designation command (preliminary determination result) is “E3H0AH (reach with reach)”, and the final aspect data is “01H” ”, The initial counter value U1 of the first special figure hold effect counter is associated with“ 4 (4 hold) ”, and the prefetch effect pattern determination value is“ 138 to 140 ”.

  The content of the special figure reservation effect scenario “0033” of the first special figure hold used in the non-short-time gaming state is as follows. First, during the Nth special symbol variation display, the first special figure hold number (U1) = 4 Or when the game ball enters the first starting port 21 from the state of the first special figure hold number (U1) = 3 and becomes the state of the first special figure hold number (U1) = 4 As a premise, the first special figure holding image 261 in the normal mode corresponding to the start opening winning designation command generated by the latest entry to the first start opening 21 is displayed on the fourth display unit 711d.

  Next, when the N-th special symbol variation display is completed, the first special symbol hold image 261 in the normal mode moves to the third display unit 711c, and the button is displayed during the (N + 1) -th special symbol variation display to be executed next. The image of the pressing operation request is displayed, but no button vibration is performed. While the button operation request image is being displayed, the effect button detection switch 10a detects the operation of the effect button 10A, or when a predetermined time has elapsed, the button operation request image display disappears and the third display unit 711c has a special display. The first special figure reservation image 261-1 of the aspect 1 is displayed by switching.

  When the (N + 1) th special symbol variation display is completed, in the subsequent two special symbol variation displays (N + 2nd and N + 3 special symbol variation display), the first special symbol suspension special diagram used in the non-short game state. The same first special figure holding image 261 as the holding effect scenario “0031” is displayed. When the two special symbol variation displays are completed, the first special figure variable display corresponding image 263 disappears from the variable display corresponding display area 713, and the first special figure hold image 261 of the special mode 1 is displayed from the first display unit 711a. 1 disappears and the first special figure variable display corresponding image of the special aspect 1 corresponding to the first special figure reservation image 261-1 of the special aspect 1 displayed on the first display unit 711a is the variable display corresponding display area 713. The special symbol variation display (N + 4th special symbol variation display) corresponding to the first special diagram hold image 261-1 of the special mode 1 is executed.

In the first half of the special symbol variation display (N + 4th special symbol variation display) (during the second vibration period that is the second candidate of the period for vibrating the effect button shown in step S1405 in FIG. 47), the effect button vibration device The vibration of the effect button 10A by 10C and the image display of the button operation request for requesting the operation of the effect button 10A are performed.
In the latter period of the special symbol variation display (N + 4th special symbol variation display), the button operation request image is displayed, but the effect button 10A is not vibrated.

(Special figure reservation effect scenario “0034” of the first special figure hold used in non-short-time gaming state)
In the special figure hold effect scenario “0034” of the first special figure hold used in the non-time-saving gaming state, the start opening prize designation command (preliminary determination result) is “E3H0AH (reach with reach)”, and the final aspect data is “01H” ”, The initial counter value U1 of the first special figure hold effect counter is associated with“ 4 (4 hold) ”, and the prefetch effect pattern determination value is“ 141 to 166 ”.

  The contents of the special figure reservation effect scenario “0034” are as follows. First, during the Nth special symbol variation display, the first special figure hold number (U1) = 4 or the first special figure hold number ( Assuming that a game ball enters the first starting port 21 from the state of U1) = 3 and becomes the state of the first special figure reservation number (U1) = 4, the newest to the first starting port 21 The first special figure holding image 261 in the normal mode corresponding to the start opening winning designation command generated by entering the ball is displayed on the fourth display unit 711d.

  Next, when the N-th special symbol variation display is completed, the first special symbol hold image 261 in the normal mode moves to the third display unit 711c, and the button is displayed during the (N + 1) -th special symbol variation display to be executed next. Although the image display of the continuous hit operation request is performed, the button is not vibrated. While the button operation request image is being displayed, the effect button detection switch 10a detects the operation of the effect button 10A, or when a predetermined time has elapsed, the button operation request image display disappears and the third display unit 711c has a special display. The first special figure reservation image 261-1 of the aspect 1 is displayed by switching.

  When the (N + 1) th special symbol variation display is completed, in the subsequent two special symbol variation displays (N + 2nd and N + 3 special symbol variation display), the first special symbol suspension special diagram used in the non-short game state. The same first special figure holding image 261 as the holding effect scenario “0031” is displayed. When the two special symbol variation displays are completed, the first special figure variable display corresponding image 263 disappears from the variable display corresponding display area 713, and the first special figure hold image 261 of the special mode 1 is displayed from the first display unit 711a. 1 disappears and the first special figure variable display corresponding image 263-1 of the special mode 1 corresponding to the first special figure reservation image 261-1 displayed on the first display unit 711a is displayed in the variable display corresponding display area 713. A special symbol variation display (N + 4th special symbol variation display) corresponding to the first special diagram hold image 261-1 of the special mode 1 is newly displayed.

In the first half of the special symbol variation display (N + 4th special symbol variation display) (during the second vibration period that is the second candidate of the period for vibrating the effect button shown in step S1405 in FIG. 47), the effect button vibration device The vibration of the effect button 10A by 10C and the image display of the button operation request for requesting the operation of the effect button 10A are performed.
In the latter period of the special symbol variation display (N + 4th special symbol variation display), the button operation request image is displayed, but the effect button 10A is not vibrated.

(Special figure reservation effect scenario “0035” of the first special figure hold used in non-short-time gaming state)

  In the special figure holding effect scenario “0035” of the first special figure holding used in the non-short-time gaming state, the start opening prize designation command (preliminary determination result) is “E3H0AH (reach with reach)”, and the final aspect data is “01H” ”, The initial counter value U1 of the first special figure hold effect counter is associated with“ 4 (4 hold) ”, and the prefetch effect pattern determination value is“ 167 to 170 ”.

  The contents of the special figure holding effect scenario “0035” are as follows. First, during the Nth special symbol variation display, the first special figure holding number (U1) = 4 or the first special figure holding number ( Assuming that a game ball enters the first starting port 21 from the state of U1) = 3 and becomes the state of the first special figure reservation number (U1) = 4, the newest to the first starting port 21 The first special figure holding image 261 in the normal mode corresponding to the start opening winning designation command generated by entering the ball is displayed on the fourth display unit 711d.

  Next, when the N-th special symbol variation display is completed, the following three special symbol variation displays (N + 1, N + 2, N + 3 special symbol variation display) are the same as the special figure hold effect scenario “0032”. The first special figure hold image is displayed. When the three special symbol variation displays are completed, the first special figure variable display corresponding image 263 disappears from the variable display corresponding display area 713, and the first special figure reserved image 261 of the special mode 1 is displayed from the first display unit 711a. 1 disappears and the first special figure variable display corresponding image 263-1 of the special mode 1 corresponding to the first special figure reservation image 261-1 displayed on the first display unit 711a is displayed in the variable display corresponding display area 713. A special symbol variation display (N + 4th special symbol variation display) corresponding to the first special diagram hold image 261-1 of the special mode 1 is newly displayed.

In the first half of the special symbol variation display (N + 4th special symbol variation display), the button operation request image is displayed, but the effect button 10A is not vibrated.
In the latter half of the special symbol variation display (N + 4th special symbol variation display) (during the third vibration period that is the third candidate for the period of vibrating the effect button shown in step S1408 in FIG. 47), the effect button vibration device The vibration of the effect button 10A by 10C and the image display of the button operation request for requesting the operation of the effect button 10A are performed.

  Non-time saving when the total number of selections of the special figure holding effect scenario “0031”, “0032”, “0033”, “0034”, “0035” used in the non-time saving gaming state is used as the denominator The selection rates of the special figure hold effect scenarios “0031”, “0032”, “0033”, “0034”, and “0035” of the first special figure hold used in the gaming state are each 1 / 36, 2/36, 3/36, 26/36, 4/36.

  Therefore, when the total number of selections of the special figure holding effect scenario “0031”, “0032”, “0033”, “0034”, “0035” used in the short time gaming state is used as the denominator, A first look-ahead effect requesting the player to operate the operation means (a special figure hold effect scenario “0031”, “0033”, “first special figure hold used in the non-short-time game state and the short-time game state” 0034 ”and“ 0035 ”) and a second prefetch effect that does not require the player to operate the operating means (a special figure hold effect scenario other than the first prefetch effect including“ 0032 ”) ) Are 34/36 and 2/36, respectively, based on the pre-reading effect pattern determination value.

Hereinafter, the special figure reservation effect scenarios “0109”, “0110”, “0111”, “0112”, and “0113” of the first special figure reservation used in the non-time-saving gaming state will be described with reference to FIG.
(Special figure hold effect scenario “0109” of the first special figure hold used in non-time-saving gaming state)
In FIG. 54, the special figure holding effect scenario “0109” of the first special figure holding used in the non-time-saving gaming state is “E3H00H (per high probability short-lived first length)” ) ”, The final mode data is“ 01H ”, the initial counter value U1 of the first special figure hold effect counter is“ 4 (4 hold) ”, and the prefetch effect pattern determination value is“ 112 to 115 ”. Yes.

  In the special figure holding effect scenario “0109”, the same effects as the special figure holding effect scenario “0031” of the first special figure holding used in the non-time-saving gaming state are performed in the effects other than the effects indicating the result of the jackpot lottery. .

(Special figure hold effect scenario “0110” of the first special figure hold used in the non-time-saving gaming state)
The special figure hold effect scenario “0110” of the first special figure hold used in the non-short-time gaming state has a start opening prize designation command (preliminary determination result) of “E3H00H (high probability short-lived first length per person)”, final The mode data is “01H”, the initial counter value U1 of the first special figure hold effect counter is “4 (4 hold)”, and the prefetch effect pattern determination value is “116 to 123”.

  In the special figure holding effect scenario “0110”, the same effects as the special figure holding effect scenario “0032” are performed in the effects other than the effects indicating the result of the big hit lottery.

(Special figure hold effect scenario “0111” of the first special figure hold used in non-time-saving gaming state)
The special figure hold effect scenario “0111” of the first special figure hold used in the non-short-time game state has the start opening prize designation command (preliminary determination result) “E3H00H (high probability short-lived first length per person)”, final The mode data is “01H”, the initial counter value U1 of the first special figure hold effect counter is “4 (4 hold)”, and the prefetch effect pattern determination value is “124 to 135”.

  In the special figure holding effect scenario “0111”, the same effects as the special figure holding effect scenario “0033” of the first special figure holding used in the non-time-saving gaming state are performed in the effects other than the effects indicating the result of the jackpot lottery. .

(Special figure hold effect scenario “0112” of the first special figure hold used in the non-time-saving gaming state)
The special figure hold effect scenario “0112” of the first special figure hold used in the non-short-time gaming state has the start opening prize designation command (preliminary determination result) “E3H00H (per high probability short-lived first length)”, final The mode data is “01H”, the initial counter value U1 of the first special figure hold effect counter is “4 (4 hold)”, and the prefetch effect pattern determination value is “136 to 239”.

  In the special figure holding effect scenario “0112”, the same effect as the special figure holding effect scenario “0034” of the first special figure holding that is used in the non-time-saving gaming state is performed in the effects other than the effects indicating the result of the jackpot lottery. .

(Special figure hold effect scenario “0113” of the first special figure hold used in non-time-saving gaming state)
The special figure holding effect scenario “0113” of the first special figure holding used in the non-time-saving gaming state has a start opening prize designation command (result of pre-determination) “E3H00H (per high probability short-lived first length)”, final The mode data is “01H”, the initial counter value U1 of the first special figure hold effect counter is “4 (4 hold)”, and the prefetch effect pattern determination value is “240 to 255”.

  In the special figure holding effect scenario “0113”, the same effects as the special figure holding effect scenario “0035” of the first special figure holding used in the non-time-saving gaming state are performed in the effects other than the effects indicating the result of the big win lottery. .

  Non-time saving when the total number of selected special figure holding scenario “0109”, “0110”, “0111”, “0112”, “0113” used in the non-time-saving gaming state is used as the denominator The selection ratios of the special figure holding effect scenarios “0109”, “0110”, “0111”, “0112”, and “0113” of the first special figure holding used in the gaming state are each 1 / 36, 2/36, 3/36, 26/36, 4/36.

  Therefore, in the case where the total number of selections of the special figure holding effect scenario “0109”, “0110”, “0111”, “0112”, “0113” used in the non-time-saving gaming state is used as the denominator. , A first look-ahead effect requesting the player to operate the operation means (a special figure hold effect scenario “0109”, “0111” of the first special figure hold used in the non-short-time game state and the short-time game state, "0112" and "0113" effects) and a second prefetch effect that does not require the player to operate the operating means (a special figure hold effect other than the first prefetch effect including "0110") The selection rate of scenario) is 34/36 and 2/36, respectively, based on the prefetch effect pattern determination value.

  As shown in FIGS. 57 and 58, the special figure hold effect scenario determination table used in the non-time saving gaming state associated with the second start opening winning designation command includes a plurality of prefetch effect pattern determination values and special figure hold. The production scenario is stored in association with a predetermined probability.

  Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 57, the second special figure holding special figure holding effect scenarios “0531”, “0532”, “0533”, “0534”, and “0535” used in the non-time-saving gaming state will be described.

Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 57, the second special figure holding special figure holding effect scenarios “0531”, “0532”, “0533”, “0534”, and “0535” used in the non-time-saving gaming state will be described.
(2nd special figure hold special figure hold production scenario “0531” used in non-time-saving gaming state)
In FIG. 57, in the special figure hold effect scenario “0531” of the second special figure hold in the non-time-saving gaming state, the start opening prize designation command (preliminary determination result) is “E4H0AH (reach with reach)”, and the final mode data is “01H”, the initial counter value U2 of the second special figure hold effect counter is “4 (4 hold)”, and the prefetch effect pattern determination value is “135”.

  The contents of the special figure holding effect scenario “0531” are as follows. First, in the variable display of the second special symbol or the second special symbol (this variable display is referred to as the Nth special symbol variable display), The figure holding number (U2) = 4 or the second special figure holding number (U2) = 3 and the game ball enters the second starting port 22 and enters the second special figure holding number (U2). Assuming that the state becomes = 4, the figure-reserved image 262 in the normal mode corresponding to the start opening winning designation command generated by the newest entry to the second start opening 22 is displayed on the fourth display unit 712d (FIG. 1). And FIG. 79).

  Next, when the N-th special symbol variation display is completed, the second special symbol hold image 262 of the normal mode moves to the third display unit 712c, and the N + 1-th special symbol variation display to be executed next is being performed (FIG. 47). During the second vibration period, which is the first candidate for the period of vibrating the effect button shown in step S1402), the button press requesting the vibration of the effect button 10A by the effect button vibration device 10C and the operation of the effect button 10A The image of the operation request is displayed. While the button operation request image is being displayed, when the effect button detection switch 10a detects the operation of the effect button 10A or when a predetermined time has elapsed, the image display of the button operation request disappears and the third display unit 712c (FIG. 1 and FIG. 79), the second special figure holding image 262-1 (see FIG. 79) of the special mode 1 is switched and displayed.

  When the (N + 1) th special symbol variation display is completed, the second special figure reservation image 262-1 of the special mode 1 moves to the second display unit 712b (see FIGS. 1 and 79). The second special figure hold image 262-1 of the special mode 1 continues to be displayed on the second display unit 712b during the subsequent display of the (N + 2) th special symbol variation.

  When the (N + 2) th special symbol variation display ends, the second special figure reservation image 262-1 of the special mode 1 moves to the first display unit 712a (see FIGS. 1 and 79). During the N + 3th special symbol variation display thereafter, the second special figure hold image 262-1 of the special mode 1 is continuously displayed on the first display unit 712a.

  When the N + 3th special symbol variation display is completed, the second special figure variable display corresponding image 264 disappears from the variable display corresponding display area 713, and the second special figure reserved image 262-1 of the special mode 1 is displayed from the first display unit 712a. Disappears, and the second special figure variable display corresponding image 264-1 (see FIG. 79) corresponding to the second special figure holding image 262-1 displayed on the first display unit 712a is displayed in the variable display corresponding display area 713 ( Based on the start opening winning designation command corresponding to the second special figure holding image 262-1 of the special mode 1 which is newly displayed in FIG. 1 and FIG. 79), the N + 4th special symbol variation display is executed.

  In the special figure holding effect scenario “0531”, an effect corresponding to the button operation request and the button operation is performed in the first and second periods of the N + 4th special symbol fluctuation display, but the effect button vibration device 10C vibrates the effect button 10A. I will not.

(Special figure reservation effect scenario “0532” of the second special figure hold used in the non-time-saving gaming state)
In the special figure holding effect scenario “0532” of the second special figure holding used in the non-short-time gaming state, the start opening prize designation command (preliminary determination result) is “E4H0AH (reach with reach)”, and the final mode data is “01H” ”, The initial counter value U2 of the second special figure hold effect counter is associated with“ 4 (4 hold) ”, and the prefetch effect pattern determination value is“ 136 to 137 ”.

  The contents of the special figure reservation effect scenario “0532” are as follows. First, during the Nth special symbol variation display, the second special figure hold number (U2) = 4 from the beginning, or the second special figure hold number ( Assuming that a game ball enters the second starting port 22 from the state of U2) = 3 and becomes the state of the second special figure reservation number (U2) = 4, the newest to the second starting port 22 The second special figure holding image 262 in the normal mode corresponding to the start opening winning designation command generated by entering the ball is displayed on the fourth display unit 712d.

  Next, when the Nth special symbol variation display is completed, the second special symbol hold image 262 in the normal mode moves to the third display unit 712c, and the button is displayed during the N + 1th special symbol variation display to be executed next. The image display of the operation request (the button pressing operation request or the button repeated operation request) is not performed, and the button is not vibrated. While the button operation request image is displayed, the effect button detection switch 10a detects the operation of the effect button 10A or when a predetermined time elapses, the button operation request image display disappears and the third display unit 712c is specially displayed. The second special figure holding image 262-1 of the aspect 1 is displayed by switching.

  When the (N + 1) th special symbol variation display is completed, the second special symbol suspension special symbol used in the non-short game state in the next two special symbol variation displays (N + 2 and N + 3 special symbol variation displays). The same second special figure holding image 262 as the holding effect scenario “0531” is displayed. When the two special symbol variation displays are finished, the second special figure variable display corresponding image 264 disappears from the variable display corresponding display area 713, and the second special figure hold image 262 of the special mode 1 is displayed from the first display unit 712a. 1 disappears, and the second special figure variable display corresponding image 264-1 corresponding to the second special figure holding image 262-1 displayed on the first display unit 712a is newly displayed in the variable display corresponding display area 713. Then, the special symbol fluctuation display (N + 4th special symbol fluctuation display) corresponding to the second special figure reservation image 262-1 of the special mode 1 is executed.

In the first half of the special symbol variation display (N + 4th special symbol variation display) (during the second vibration period that is the second candidate of the period for vibrating the effect button shown in step S1405 in FIG. 47), the effect button vibration device The vibration of the effect button 10A by 10C and the image display of the button operation request for requesting the operation of the effect button 10A are performed.
In the latter period of the special symbol variation display (N + 4th special symbol variation display), the button operation request image is displayed, but the effect button 10A is not vibrated.

(2nd special figure hold special figure hold production scenario “0533” used in non-time-saving gaming state)
In the special figure hold effect scenario “0533” of the second special figure hold used in the non-short-time gaming state, the start opening winning designation command (preliminary determination result) is “E4H0AH (reach with reach)”, and the final aspect data is “01H” ”, The initial counter value U2 of the second special figure hold effect counter is associated with“ 4 (4 hold) ”, and the prefetch effect pattern determination value is“ 138 to 140 ”.

  The content of the special figure hold effect scenario “0533” of the second special figure hold used in the non-short-time gaming state is as follows. First, the second special figure hold number (U2) = 4 during the Nth special symbol variation display. Or when the game ball enters the second starting port 22 from the state of the second special figure hold number (U2) = 3 and becomes the state of the second special figure hold number (U2) = 4 As a premise, the second special figure holding image 262 in the normal mode corresponding to the start opening winning designation command generated by the latest entry into the second start opening 22 is displayed on the fourth display unit 712d.

  Next, when the Nth special symbol variation display is completed, the second special symbol hold image 262 in the normal mode moves to the third display unit 712c, and the button is displayed during the N + 1th special symbol variation display to be executed next. The image of the pressing operation request is displayed, but no button vibration is performed. While the button operation request image is displayed, the effect button detection switch 10a detects the operation of the effect button 10A or when a predetermined time elapses, the button operation request image display disappears and the third display unit 712c is specially displayed. The second special figure holding image 262-1 of the aspect 1 is displayed by switching.

  When the (N + 1) th special symbol variation display is completed, the second special symbol suspension special symbol used in the non-short game state in the next two special symbol variation displays (N + 2 and N + 3 special symbol variation displays). The same second special figure holding image 262 as the holding effect scenario “0531” is displayed. When the two special symbol variation displays are finished, the second special figure variable display corresponding image 264 disappears from the variable display corresponding display area 713, and the second special figure hold image 262 of the special mode 1 is displayed from the first display unit 712a. 1 disappears and the second special figure variable display corresponding image of the special aspect 1 corresponding to the second special figure reservation image 262-1 of the special aspect 1 displayed on the first display unit 712a is the variable display corresponding display area 713. And the special symbol fluctuation display (N + 4th special symbol fluctuation display) corresponding to the second special figure hold image 262-1 of the special mode 1 is executed.

In the first half of the special symbol variation display (N + 4th special symbol variation display) (during the second vibration period that is the second candidate of the period for vibrating the effect button shown in step S1405 in FIG. 47), the effect button vibration device The vibration of the effect button 10A by 10C and the image display of the button operation request for requesting the operation of the effect button 10A are performed.
In the latter period of the special symbol variation display (N + 4th special symbol variation display), the button operation request image is displayed, but the effect button 10A is not vibrated.

(2nd special figure hold special figure hold production scenario “0534” used in non-time-saving gaming state)
The special figure hold effect scenario “0534” of the second special figure hold used in the non-time-saving gaming state has the start opening prize designation command (preliminary determination result) “E4H0AH (reach with reach)” and the final aspect data “01H”. ”, The initial counter value U2 of the second special figure hold effect counter is associated with“ 4 (4 hold) ”, and the prefetch effect pattern determination value is“ 141 to 166 ”.

  The contents of the special figure holding effect scenario “0534” are as follows. First, during the Nth special symbol variation display, the second special figure holding number (U2) = 4 or the second special figure holding number ( Assuming that a game ball enters the second starting port 22 from the state of U2) = 3 and becomes the state of the second special figure reservation number (U2) = 4, the newest to the second starting port 22 The second special figure holding image 262 in the normal mode corresponding to the start opening winning designation command generated by entering the ball is displayed on the fourth display unit 712d.

  Next, when the Nth special symbol variation display is completed, the second special symbol hold image 262 in the normal mode moves to the third display unit 712c, and the button is displayed during the N + 1th special symbol variation display to be executed next. Although the image display of the continuous hit operation request is performed, the button is not vibrated. While the button operation request image is displayed, the effect button detection switch 10a detects the operation of the effect button 10A or when a predetermined time elapses, the button operation request image display disappears and the third display unit 712c is specially displayed. The second special figure holding image 262-1 of the aspect 1 is displayed by switching.

  When the (N + 1) th special symbol variation display is completed, the second special symbol suspension special symbol used in the non-short game state in the next two special symbol variation displays (N + 2 and N + 3 special symbol variation displays). The same second special figure holding image 262 as the holding effect scenario “0531” is displayed. When the two special symbol variation displays are finished, the second special figure variable display corresponding image 264 disappears from the variable display corresponding display area 713, and the second special figure hold image 262 of the special mode 1 is displayed from the first display unit 712a. 1 disappears and the second special figure variable display corresponding image 264-1 of the special mode 1 corresponding to the second special figure reservation image 262-1 displayed on the first display unit 712a is displayed in the variable display corresponding display area 713. The special symbol variation display (N + 4th special symbol variation display) corresponding to the second special diagram hold image 262-1 of the special mode 1 is newly displayed.

In the first half of the special symbol variation display (N + 4th special symbol variation display) (during the second vibration period that is the second candidate of the period for vibrating the effect button shown in step S1405 in FIG. 47), the effect button vibration device The vibration of the effect button 10A by 10C and the image display of the button operation request for requesting the operation of the effect button 10A are performed.
In the latter period of the special symbol variation display (N + 4th special symbol variation display), the button operation request image is displayed, but the effect button 10A is not vibrated.

(The second special figure hold special scenario reservation scenario “0535” used in the non-time-saving gaming state)

  In the special figure holding effect scenario “0535” of the second special figure holding used in the non-short-time gaming state, the start opening prize designation command (preliminary determination result) is “E4H0AH (reach with reach)”, and the final mode data is “01H” ”, The initial counter value U2 of the second special figure hold effect counter is associated with“ 4 (4 hold) ”, and the prefetch effect pattern determination value is“ 167 to 170 ”.

  The content of the special figure hold effect scenario “0535” is, first, during the Nth special symbol variation display, the second special figure hold number (U2) = 4 from the beginning, or the second special figure hold number ( Assuming that a game ball enters the second starting port 22 from the state of U2) = 3 and becomes the state of the second special figure reservation number (U2) = 4, the newest to the second starting port 22 The second special figure holding image 262 in the normal mode corresponding to the start opening winning designation command generated by entering the ball is displayed on the fourth display unit 712d.

  Next, when the N-th special symbol variation display is completed, in the subsequent three special symbol variation displays (N + 1, N + 2, N + 3 special symbol variation display), the same as the special figure holding effect scenario “0532” The second special figure hold image 262 is displayed. When the three special symbol variation displays are finished, the second special figure variable display corresponding image 264 disappears from the variable display corresponding display area 713, and the second special figure hold image 262 of the special mode 1 is displayed from the second display unit 712a. 1 disappears and the second special figure variable display corresponding image 264-1 of the special mode 1 corresponding to the second special figure holding image 262-1 displayed on the second display unit 712a is displayed in the variable display corresponding display area 713. The special symbol variation display (N + 4th special symbol variation display) corresponding to the second special diagram hold image 262-1 of the special mode 1 is newly displayed.

In the first half of the special symbol variation display (N + 4th special symbol variation display), the button operation request image is displayed, but the effect button 10A is not vibrated.
In the latter half of the special symbol variation display (N + 4th special symbol variation display) (during the third vibration period that is the third candidate for the period of vibrating the effect button shown in step S1408 in FIG. 47), the effect button vibration device The vibration of the effect button 10A by 10C and the image display of the button operation request for requesting the operation of the effect button 10A are performed.

  Non-time saving when the total number of selected special figure holding effect scenarios “0531”, “0532”, “0533”, “0534”, and “0535” used in the non-time saving gaming state is the denominator The selection rates of the special figure reservation effect scenarios “0531”, “0532”, “0533”, “0534”, and “0535” for the second special figure hold used in the gaming state are each 1 / 36, 2/36, 3/36, 26/36, 4/36.

  Therefore, when the total number of selections of the special figure hold effect scenario “0531”, “0532”, “0533”, “0534”, “0535” used in the short-time game state is used as the denominator, A first look-ahead effect that requests the player to operate the operating means (a special figure hold effect scenario “0531”, “0533”, “0533” for the second special figure hold used in the non-short-time game state and the short-time game state) 0534 "and" 0535 ") and a second prefetch effect that does not require the player to operate the operating means (a special figure hold effect scenario other than the first prefetch effect including" 0532 ") ) And 34/36 and 2/36, respectively, based on the pre-reading effect pattern determination value.

Hereinafter, the special figure reservation effect scenarios “0609”, “0610”, “0611”, “0612”, and “0613” used in the non-time-saving gaming state will be described with reference to FIG.
(The second special figure hold special scenario reservation scenario “0609” used in the non-time-saving gaming state)
In FIG. 58, in the special figure hold effect scenario “0609” of the second special figure hold used in the non-short-time gaming state, the start opening prize designation command (result of the pre-judgment) is “E4H00H (per high probability short-lived first length ) ”, The final mode data is“ 01H ”, the initial counter value U2 of the second special figure hold effect counter is“ 4 (4 hold) ”, and the prefetch effect pattern determination value is“ 112 to 115 ”. Yes.

  In the special figure hold effect scenario “0609”, the same effects as the special figure hold effect scenario “0531” of the second special figure hold used in the non-time-saving gaming state are performed in the effects other than the effect indicating the result of the jackpot lottery. .

(2nd special figure hold special scenario hold effect scenario “0610” used in non-time-saving gaming state)
The special figure hold effect scenario “0610” for the second special figure hold used in the non-time-saving gaming state is “E4H00H (per high-probability short-lived first length)” for the start opening winning designation command (preliminary result). The mode data is “01H”, the initial counter value U2 of the second special figure hold effect counter is “4 (4 hold)”, and the prefetch effect pattern determination value is “116 to 123”.

  In the special figure holding effect scenario “0610”, the same effect as the special figure holding effect scenario “0532” is performed in an effect other than the effect indicating the result of the big hit lottery.

(Special figure hold effect scenario “0611” of the second special figure hold used in the non-time-saving gaming state)
The special figure reservation effect scenario “0611” of the second special figure hold used in the non-time-saving gaming state has a start opening prize designation command (preliminary determination result) of “E4H00H (per high probability short-lived first length)”, final The mode data is associated with “01H”, the initial counter value U2 of the second special figure hold effect counter is “4 (4 hold)”, and the prefetch effect pattern determination value is “124 to 135”.

  In the special figure hold effect scenario “0611”, the same effect as the special figure hold effect scenario “0533” of the second special figure hold used in the non-time-saving gaming state is performed in the effects other than the effect indicating the result of the jackpot lottery. .

(2nd special figure reservation special figure reservation effect scenario “0612” used in non-time-saving gaming state)
In the special figure hold effect scenario “0612” of the second special figure hold used in the non-time-saving gaming state, the start opening prize designation command (preliminary determination result) is “E4H00H (per high probability short-lived first length)”, final The mode data is “01H”, the initial counter value U2 of the second special figure hold effect counter is “4 (4 hold)”, and the prefetch effect pattern determination value is “136 to 239”.

  In the special figure reservation effect scenario “0612”, the same effect as the special figure reservation effect scenario “0534” of the second special figure reservation used in the non-time-saving gaming state is performed in an effect other than the effect indicating the result of the jackpot lottery. .

(2nd special figure reservation special figure reservation effect scenario “0613” used in non-time-saving gaming state)
In the special figure hold effect scenario “0613” of the second special figure hold used in the non-short-time game state, the start opening prize designation command (preliminary determination result) is “E4H00H (per high probability short-lived first long)”, the final The mode data is “01H”, the initial counter value U2 of the second special figure hold effect counter is “4 (4 hold)”, and the prefetch effect pattern determination value is “240 to 255”.

  In the special figure hold effect scenario “0613”, the same effect as the special figure hold effect scenario “0535” of the second special figure hold used in the non-time-saving gaming state is performed in the effects other than the effect indicating the result of the jackpot lottery. .

  Non-temporary when the total number of selections of the special figure on-holding scenario “0609”, “0610”, “0611”, “0612”, “0613” used in the non-temporary gaming state is the denominator The selection ratios of the special figure reservation effect scenarios “0609”, “0610”, “0611”, “0612”, and “0613” for the second special figure reservation used in the gaming state are each 1 / 36, 2/36, 3/36, 26/36, 4/36.

  Therefore, in the case where the total number of selected special figure holding effect scenarios “0609”, “0610”, “0611”, “0612”, “0613” used in the non-time-saving gaming state is used as the denominator. , A first look-ahead effect requesting the player to operate the operation means (a special figure hold effect scenario “0609”, “0611” of the second special figure hold used in the non-short-time game state and the short-time game state, "0612" and "0613") and a second prefetch effect that does not require the player to operate the operation means (a special figure hold effect other than the first prefetch effect including "0610") The selection rate with scenario) is 34/36 and 2/36, respectively, based on the pre-reading effect pattern determination value.

(Special figure reservation effect scenario determination table for the first special figure hold used in the short-time gaming state)
61 to 62 are diagrams showing an example of the special figure hold effect scenario determination table for the first special figure hold used in the short-time gaming state stored in the sub ROM 102b.

  As shown in FIGS. 61 to 62, the special figure hold effect scenario determination table for the first special figure hold associated with the first start opening winning designation command used in the short-time gaming state includes a plurality of prefetch effect pattern determinations. The value and the special figure holding effect scenario are stored in association with each other with a predetermined probability.

Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 61, the special figure reservation effect scenarios “1031”, “1032”, “1033”, “1034”, and “1035” of the first special figure reservation used in the short-time gaming state will be described.
(Special figure reservation effect scenario “1031” of the first special figure hold used in the short-time gaming state)
In FIG. 61, in the special figure hold effect scenario “1031” of the first special figure hold used in the short-time gaming state, the start opening winning designation command (preliminary determination result) is “E3H0AH (reach with reach)”, and final mode data Is “01H”, the initial counter value U1 of the first special figure hold effect counter is “4 (4 hold)”, and the prefetch effect pattern determination value is “135”.

  The special figure holding effect scenario “1031” displays an effect indicating that the game is in a short-time gaming state (time-short character image 290 shown in FIG. 100), no variable display corresponding display, and a variable display compatible display area. For effects other than not performing, the same effect as the special figure reservation effect scenario “0031” of the first special figure reservation used in the non-time-saving gaming state is performed.

(Special figure reservation effect scenario “1032” of the first special figure hold used in the short-time gaming state)
In the special figure holding effect scenario “1032” of the first special figure holding used in the short-time gaming state, the start opening prize designation command (preliminary determination result) is “E3H0AH (reach with reach)”, and the final aspect data is “01H”. The initial counter value U1 of the first special figure hold effect counter is associated with “4 (4 hold)”, and the pre-read effect pattern determination value is associated with “136 to 162”.

  The special figure holding effect scenario “1032” displays an effect indicating that the game is in the short-time gaming state (time-short character image 290 shown in FIG. 100), no variable display corresponding display, and a variable display compatible display area. For effects other than not performing, an effect similar to the special figure reservation effect scenario “0032” of the first special figure reservation used in the non-time-saving gaming state is performed.

(Special figure reservation effect scenario “1033” of the first special figure hold used in the short-time gaming state)
In the special figure holding effect scenario “1033” of the first special figure holding used in the short-time gaming state, the start opening prize designation command (preliminary determination result) is “E3H0AH (reach with reach)”, and the final aspect data is “01H”. The initial counter value U1 of the first special figure hold effect counter is associated with “4 (4 hold)” and the prefetch effect pattern determination value is “163 to 168”.

  The special figure holding effect scenario “1033” displays an effect (short character image 290 shown in FIG. 100) indicating that it is a short-time gaming state, a variable display corresponding display is not performed, and a variable display compatible display area is displayed. For effects other than not performing, an effect similar to the special figure reservation effect scenario “0033” of the first special figure reservation used in the non-time-saving gaming state is performed.

(Special figure reservation effect scenario “1034” for the first special figure hold used in the short-time gaming state)
In the special figure holding effect scenario “1034” of the first special figure holding used in the short-time gaming state, the start opening prize designation command (preliminary determination result) is “E3H0AH (reach with reach)”, and the final aspect data is “01H”. The initial counter value U1 of the first special figure hold effect counter is associated with “4 (4 hold)” and the prefetch effect pattern determination value is “169”.

  The special figure hold effect scenario “1034” displays an effect indicating that the game is in the short-time game state (time-short character image 290 shown in FIG. 100), no variable display corresponding display, and a variable display compatible display area. For effects other than not performing, an effect similar to the special figure reservation effect scenario “0034” of the first special figure reservation used in the non-time-saving gaming state is performed.

(Special figure reservation effect scenario “1035” of the first special figure hold used in the short-time gaming state)
In the special figure holding effect scenario “1035” of the first special figure holding used in the short-time gaming state, the start opening prize designation command (preliminary determination result) is “E3H0AH (reach with reach)”, and the final aspect data is “01H”. The initial counter value U1 of the first special figure hold effect counter is associated with “4 (4 hold)” and the prefetch effect pattern determination value is “170”.

  The special figure reservation effect scenario “1035” of the first special figure hold is an effect indicating that the game is in the short-time gaming state (short time character image 290 shown in FIG. 100), no variable display corresponding display, and variable For effects other than not displaying the display-corresponding display area, an effect similar to the special figure reservation effect scenario “0035” of the first special figure reservation used in the non-time-saving gaming state is performed.

  Special figure hold production scenario of the first special figure hold used in the short-time game state The special figure hold production scenario with the total number of selections of “1031”, “1032”, “1033”, “1034”, “1035” as the denominator The selection rates of “1031”, “1032”, “1033”, “1034”, and “1035” are 1/36, 27/36, 6/36, 1/36, 1 / 36.

  Therefore, in the case where the total number of selections of the special figure hold effect scenario “1031”, “1032”, “1033”, “1034”, “1035” used in the short-time game state is used as the denominator, A first look-ahead effect requesting the player to operate the operation means (a special figure hold effect scenario “1031”, “1033”, “1034”, “1035 of the first special figure hold used in the short-time game state) And a second prefetch effect that does not require the player to operate the operating means (a special figure hold effect scenario other than the first prefetch effect including “1032”). Are 9/36 and 27/36, respectively, based on the pre-reading effect pattern determination value.

  In addition, the special figure hold production scenario “0031”, “0032”, “0033”, “0034”, “0035”, “1031”, “1032”, “1033”, “1034”, “1035” of the first special figure hold. The special figure hold effect scenario corresponding to the loss other than "" is a second prefetch effect that does not require the player to operate the operation means, and the special figure hold of the first special figure hold. The selection rate with all the production scenarios as the denominator is the same in the time-saving gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state.

  Therefore, in the short-time gaming state, the selection of the second pre-reading effect (the player is not requested to operate the operation means) for the special figure holding effect scenario corresponding to all the suspensions of the first special figure holding. The rate becomes 27/2 times, and accordingly, the selection rate of the first prefetch effect that requests the player to operate the operation means is lowered.

  The first look-ahead effect corresponding to the loss of the first special figure hold is a first operation mode effect (time-short game state) that requires the player to operate the operation means in the first operation mode. The special figure hold effect scenario “1031”, “1033”, “1035” for the first special figure hold used in the game), and the operation means for the player is more difficult to operate than the first operation mode. A second operation mode operation effect that requires operation in two operation modes (the effect of the special figure hold effect scenario “1034” of the first special figure hold used in the short-time gaming state) is included.

  The selection rate of the second operation mode operation effect when the total number of selections of the first look-ahead effect corresponding to the loss of the first special figure hold is used as the denominator is 1/9 in the short-time game state, and the non-short-time game state Therefore, in the first special figure suspension, the non-timeless gaming state has a higher ratio of controlling the second operation mode than the timeless gaming state, and the timeless gaming state is higher than the timeless gaming state. The ratio of performing the control of the first operation mode is lower in the state.

(Special figure reservation effect scenario “1109” of the first special figure hold used in the short-time gaming state)
In FIG. 62, the special figure holding effect scenario “1109” of the first special figure holding used in the short-time gaming state has a start opening prize designation command (preliminary determination result) of “E3H00H (per high probability short-lived first long). ”, The final mode data is“ 01H ”, the initial counter value U1 of the first special figure hold effect counter is“ 4 (4 hold) ”, and the prefetch effect pattern determination value is“ 112 to 115 ”. .

  In the special figure hold effect scenario “1109”, the same effect as the special figure hold effect scenario “1031” of the first special figure hold used in the short-time gaming state is performed in an effect other than the effect indicating the result of the big hit lottery.

(Special figure reservation effect scenario “1110” of the first special figure hold used in the short-time gaming state)
The special figure hold effect scenario “1110” of the first special figure hold used in the short-time gaming state has a start mode winning designation command (pre-judgment result) “E3H00H (per high probability short-lived first length)”, final mode The data is associated with “01H”, the initial counter value U1 of the first special figure hold effect counter is “4 (4 hold)”, and the prefetch effect pattern determination value is “116 to 223”.

  In the special figure hold effect scenario “1110”, the same effect as the special figure hold effect scenario “1032” of the first special figure hold used in the short-time gaming state is performed in an effect other than the effect indicating the result of the jackpot lottery.

(Special figure reservation effect scenario “1111” of the first special figure hold used in the short-time gaming state)
The special figure holding effect scenario “1111” of the first special figure holding used in the short-time gaming state has a start mode winning designation command (preliminary determination result) “E3H00H (per high probability short-term first length)”, final mode The data is associated with “01H”, the initial counter value U1 of the first special figure hold effect counter is “4 (4 hold)”, and the prefetch effect pattern determination values are “224 to 247”.

  In the special figure hold effect scenario “1111”, the same effect as the special figure hold effect scenario “1033” of the first special figure hold used in the short-time gaming state is performed in an effect other than the effect indicating the result of the jackpot lottery.

(Special figure reservation effect scenario "1112" of the first special figure hold used in the short-time gaming state)
The special figure holding effect scenario “1112” of the first special figure holding used in the short-time gaming state has the start mode winning designation command (preliminary determination result) “E3H00H (per high probability short-lived first length)”, final mode The data is associated with “01H”, the initial counter value U1 of the first special figure hold effect counter is “4 (4 hold)”, and the prefetch effect pattern determination value is “248 to 251”.

  In the special figure hold effect scenario “1112”, the same effect as the special figure hold effect scenario “1034” of the first special figure hold used in the short-time gaming state is performed in an effect other than the effect indicating the result of the jackpot lottery.

(Special figure reservation effect scenario “1113” of the first special figure hold used in the short-time gaming state)
The special figure reservation effect scenario “1113” of the first special figure hold used in the short-time gaming state has the start mode winning designation command (preliminary determination result) “E3H00H (per high probability short-lived first length)”, final mode The data is associated with “01H”, the initial counter value U1 of the first special figure hold effect counter is “4 (4 hold)”, and the prefetch effect pattern determination value is “252 to 255”.

  In the special figure holding effect scenario “1113”, the same effects as the special figure holding effect scenario “1035” of the first special figure holding used in the short-time gaming state are performed in the effects other than the effects indicating the result of the jackpot lottery.

  Special figure hold with special figure hold effect scenario “1109”, “1110”, “1111”, “1112”, “1113” selected in the short-time gaming state as the denominator The selection rates of the production scenarios “1109”, “1110”, “1111”, “1112”, and “1113” are 1/36, 27/36, 6/36, 1/36, 1/36.

  Therefore, when the total number of selections of the special figure hold production scenario “1109”, “1110”, “1111”, “1112”, “1113” used in the short-time gaming state is used as the denominator, A first look-ahead effect requesting the player to operate the operation means (a special figure hold effect scenario “1109”, “1111”, “1112”, “1113” of the first special figure hold used in the short-time game state) And a second prefetch effect that does not require the player to operate the operation means (a special figure hold effect scenario other than the first prefetch effect including “1110”). The rates are 9/36 and 27/36, respectively, based on the prefetch effect pattern determination value.

  In addition, special figure hold production scenarios “0109”, “0110”, “0111”, “0112”, “0113”, “1109”, “1110”, “1111”, “1112”, “1113” are supported. All of the special figure hold effect scenarios that have been made are second prefetch effects that do not require the player to operate the operation means, and the special rate hold effect scenario is the denominator. However, the selection rate is the same for all types in the short-time gaming state and the non-short-time gaming state.

  Therefore, in the short-time gaming state, the selection of the second pre-reading effect (the player is not requested to operate the operation means) for the special figure holding effect scenario corresponding to all winnings of the first special figure holding. The rate becomes 27/2 times, and accordingly, the selection rate of the first prefetch effect that requests the player to operate the operation means is lowered.

  The first look-ahead effect corresponding to the first special figure hold is a first operation mode effect (non-short game) that requires the player to operate the operation means in the first operation mode. (1109), “1111”, “1113”) and the operation means for the player from the first operation mode. And a second operation mode operation effect requiring operation in the second operation mode with a high degree of difficulty (the effect of the special figure hold effect scenario “1112” of the first special figure hold used in the non-time-saving gaming state). .

  The selection rate of the second operation mode operation effect when the total number of selections of the first look-ahead effect corresponding to the first special figure hold is used as the denominator is 1/9 in the short-time game state, and the non-short-time game state 26/34, the non-timeless gaming state is more likely to control the second operation mode than the time-saving gaming state, and the non-timeless gaming state is more likely to control the first operation mode than the time-saving gaming state. The ratio of controlling the operation mode is reduced.

(2nd special figure hold special figure hold production scenario determination table used in short-time gaming state)
65 to 66 are diagrams showing an example of the special figure hold effect scenario determination table for the second special figure hold used in the short time gaming state stored in the sub ROM 102b.

  As shown in FIGS. 65 to 66, the special figure hold effect scenario determination table for the second special figure hold associated with the second start opening winning designation command used in the short-time gaming state includes a plurality of prefetch effect pattern determinations. The value and the special figure holding effect scenario are stored in association with each other with a predetermined probability.

Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 65, the special figure reservation effect scenarios “1531,” “1532,” “1533,” “1534,” and “1535” of the second special figure reservation used in the short-time gaming state will be described.
(2nd special figure hold special figure hold production scenario “1531” used in short-time gaming state)
In FIG. 65, in the special figure hold effect scenario “1531” of the second special figure hold used in the short-time gaming state, the start opening winning designation command (preliminary determination result) is “E4H0AH (reach with reach)”, and final mode data Is “01H”, the initial counter value U2 of the second special figure hold effect counter is “4 (4 hold)”, and the prefetch effect pattern determination value is “135”.

  The special figure holding effect scenario “1531” displays an effect indicating that it is a time-saving gaming state (time-short character image 290 shown in FIG. 100), does not perform variable display correspondence display, and displays a variable display correspondence display area. For effects other than not performing, the same effect as the special figure reservation effect scenario “0531” of the second special figure reservation used in the non-time-saving gaming state is performed.

(Special figure reservation effect scenario “1532” for the second special figure hold used in the short-time gaming state)
In the special figure holding effect scenario “1532” of the second special figure holding used in the short-time gaming state, the start opening prize designation command (preliminary determination result) is “E4H0AH (reach with reach)”, and the final aspect data is “01H”. The initial counter value U2 of the second special figure hold effect counter is associated with “4 (4 hold)” and the prefetch effect pattern determination value is “136 to 162”.

  The special figure holding effect scenario “1532” displays an effect indicating that the game is in a short-time gaming state (time-short character image 290 shown in FIG. 102), no variable display corresponding display, and a variable display compatible display area. For effects other than not performing, an effect similar to the special figure reservation effect scenario “0532” of the second special figure reservation used in the non-time-saving gaming state is performed.

(2nd special figure hold special figure hold production scenario “1533” used in short-time game state)
In the special figure hold effect scenario “1533” of the second special figure hold used in the short-time game state, the start opening prize designation command (preliminary determination result) is “E4H0AH (reach with reach)”, and the final aspect data is “01H”. The initial counter value U2 of the second special figure hold effect counter is associated with “4 (4 hold)” and the prefetch effect pattern determination value is “163 to 168”.

  The special figure holding effect scenario “1533” displays an effect indicating that the game is in the short-time gaming state (the image 290 of the short-time character shown in FIG. 100), the variable display corresponding display is not performed, and the variable display compatible display area is displayed. For effects other than not performing, the same effect as the special figure reservation effect scenario “0533” of the second special figure reservation used in the non-time-saving gaming state is performed.

(Special figure reservation effect scenario “1534” for the second special figure hold used in the short-time gaming state)
In the special figure holding effect scenario “1534” of the second special figure holding used in the short-time gaming state, the start opening prize designation command (preliminary determination result) is “E4H0AH (reach with reach)”, and the final aspect data is “01H”. The initial counter value U2 of the second special figure hold effect counter is associated with “4 (4 hold)” and the prefetch effect pattern determination value is “169”.

  The special figure holding effect scenario “1534” displays an effect indicating that it is a time-saving gaming state (time-short character image 290 shown in FIG. 100), does not perform variable display corresponding display, and displays a variable display compatible display area. For effects other than not performing, the same effect as the special figure reservation effect scenario “1534” of the second special figure reservation used in the non-time-saving gaming state is performed.

(2nd special figure hold special figure hold production scenario “1535” used in short-time gaming state)
In the special figure hold effect scenario “1535” of the second special figure hold used in the short-time gaming state, the start opening prize designation command (preliminary determination result) is “E4H0AH (reach with reach)”, and the final aspect data is “01H”. The initial counter value U2 of the second special figure hold effect counter is associated with “4 (4 hold)” and the prefetch effect pattern determination value is “170”.

  The special figure reservation effect scenario “1535” of the second special figure reservation is an effect indicating that the game is in the short-time gaming state (time-short character image 290 shown in FIG. 100), no variable display corresponding display, and variable For effects other than not displaying the display-corresponding display area, an effect similar to the special figure reservation effect scenario “0535” of the second special figure reservation used in the non-time-saving gaming state is performed.

  Special figure hold production scenario of the second special figure hold used in the short-time gaming state with the total number of selections of “1531”, “1532”, “1533”, “1534”, “1535” selected as the denominator The selection rates of “1531”, “1532”, “1533”, “1534”, and “1535” are 1/36, 27/36, 6/36, 1/36, 1 / 36.

  Therefore, in the case where the total number of selections of the special figure hold effect scenario “1531,” “1532,” “1533,” “1534,” and “1535” used in the short-time game state is used as the denominator, Second look-ahead effect requesting the player to operate the operating means (second special figure holding special figure holding effect scenarios “1531”, “1533”, “1534”, “1535 used in the short-time gaming state” And a second prefetch effect that does not require the player to operate the operating means (a special figure hold effect scenario other than the first prefetch effect including “1532”). The rates are 9/36 and 27/36, respectively, based on the prefetch effect pattern determination value.

  In addition, special figure hold production scenarios “0531”, “0532”, “0533”, “0534”, “0535”, “1531”, “1532”, “1533”, “1534” and “1535” are supported. The special figure hold effect scenario is a second prefetch effect that does not require the player to operate the operation means, and all the special figure hold effect scenarios of the second special figure hold are denominator. The selection rate is the same for all types in the short-time gaming state and the non-short-time gaming state.

Therefore, in the short-time gaming state, the selection of the second pre-reading effect (the player is not requested to operate the operation means) for the special figure holding effect scenario corresponding to all the suspensions of the second special figure hold. The rate becomes 27/2 times, and accordingly, the selection rate of the first prefetch effect that requests the player to operate the operation means is lowered.
The first look-ahead effect corresponding to the loss of the second special figure hold is a first operation mode effect (time-short game state) that requires the player to operate the operation means in the first operation mode. 1st special figure reservation effect scenario “1531”, “1533”, “1535” effect) used in the game, and the operation means for the player is more difficult to operate than the first operation mode. A second operation mode operation effect that requires operation in two operation modes (the effect of the special figure hold effect scenario “1534” of the first special figure hold used in the short-time gaming state) is included.

  The selection rate of the second operation mode operation effect is 1/9 in the short-time game state when the total number of selections of the first look-ahead effect corresponding to the second special figure holding loss is used as the denominator, and the non-short-time game state 26/34, the non-timeless gaming state is more likely to control the second operation mode than the time-saving gaming state, and the non-timeless gaming state is more likely to control the first operation mode than the time-saving gaming state. The ratio of controlling the operation mode is reduced.

(2nd special figure hold special figure hold production scenario “1609” used in short-time game state)
In FIG. 66, in the special figure hold effect scenario “1609” of the second special figure hold used in the short-time gaming state, the start opening prize designation command (result of prior determination) is “E4H00H (per high probability short-lived first long). ”, The final mode data is“ 01H ”, the initial counter value U2 of the second special figure hold effect counter is“ 4 (4 hold) ”, and the prefetch effect pattern determination value is“ 112 to 115 ”. .

  In the special figure hold effect scenario “1609”, the same effect as the special figure hold effect scenario “1531” of the second special figure hold used in the short-time gaming state is performed in an effect other than the effect indicating the result of the jackpot lottery.

(2nd special figure hold special figure hold production scenario “1610” used in short-time game state)
The special figure hold effect scenario “1610” of the second special figure hold used in the short-time gaming state has a start mode winning designation command (preliminary determination result) “E4H00H (per high probability short-lived first length)”, final mode The data is associated with “01H”, the initial counter value U2 of the second special figure hold effect counter is “4 (4 hold)”, and the prefetch effect pattern determination value is “116 to 223”.

  In the special figure hold effect scenario “1610”, the same effect as the special figure hold effect scenario “1532” of the second special figure hold used in the short-time gaming state is performed in an effect other than the effect indicating the result of the jackpot lottery.

(2nd special figure reservation special figure reservation effect scenario “1611” used in short-time gaming state)
The special figure hold effect scenario “1611” of the second special figure hold used in the short-time gaming state has a start mode winning designation command (predetermined result) “E4H00H (per high probability short-lived first length)”, final mode The data is associated with “01H”, the initial counter value U2 of the second special figure hold effect counter is “4 (4 hold)”, and the prefetch effect pattern determination value is “224 to 247”.

  In the special figure hold effect scenario “1611”, the same effect as the special figure hold effect scenario “1533” of the second special figure hold used in the short-time gaming state is performed in an effect other than the effect indicating the result of the jackpot lottery.

(2nd special figure hold special figure hold production scenario “1612” used in short-time gaming state)
The special figure hold effect scenario “1612” of the second special figure hold used in the short-time gaming state has a start mode winning designation command (pre-determined result) “E4H00H (per high probability short-lived first length)”, final mode The data is associated with “01H”, the initial counter value U2 of the second special figure hold effect counter is “4 (4 hold)”, and the prefetch effect pattern determination value is “248 to 251”.

  In the special figure hold effect scenario “1612”, the same effect as the special figure hold effect scenario “1534” of the second special figure hold used in the short-time gaming state is performed in an effect other than the effect indicating the result of the big hit lottery.

(2nd special figure hold special figure hold production scenario “1613” used in short-time gaming state)
The special figure hold effect scenario “1613” of the second special figure hold used in the short-time gaming state has a start mode winning designation command (pre-determination result) “E4H00H (per high probability short-lived first length)”, final mode The data is associated with “01H”, the initial counter value U2 of the second special figure hold effect counter is “4 (4 hold)”, and the prefetch effect pattern determination value is “252 to 255”.

  In the special figure holding effect scenario “1613”, the same effects as the special figure holding effect scenario “1535” of the second special figure holding used in the short-time gaming state are performed in the effects other than the effects indicating the result of the big hit lottery.

  Special figure hold when the total number of selected special figure hold effect scenarios “1609”, “1610”, “1611”, “1612”, “1613” used in the short-time gaming state is the denominator The selection rates of the production scenarios “1609”, “1610”, “1611”, “1612”, “1613” are 1/36, 27/36, 6/36, 1/36, 1/36.

  Therefore, in the case where the total number of selections of the special figure holding effect scenario “1609”, “1610”, “1611”, “1612”, “1613” of the second special figure holding used in the short-time gaming state is used as the denominator, A first look-ahead effect requesting the player to operate the operation means (a special figure hold effect scenario “1609”, “1611”, “1612”, “1613” of the second special figure hold used in the short-time game state) And a second prefetch effect that does not require the player to operate the operation means (a special figure hold effect scenario other than the first prefetch effect including “1610”). The rates are 9/36 and 27/36, respectively, based on the prefetch effect pattern determination value.

  In addition, the special figure hold production scenario “0609”, “0610”, “0611”, “0612”, “0613”, “1609”, “1610”, “1611”, “1612”, “1613” of the second special figure hold. All of the special figure hold effect scenarios corresponding to the hits other than "" are the second prefetch effects that do not require the player to operate the operation means, and all of the special figure hold effect scenarios The selection rate with the denominator as the denominator is the same for all time types in the short-time gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state.

  Therefore, in the short-time gaming state, the selection of the second prefetch effect (the player is not requested to operate the operation means) for the special figure hold effect scenario corresponding to all the second special figure hold hits. The rate becomes 27/2 times, and accordingly, the selection rate of the first prefetch effect that requests the player to operate the operation means is lowered.

  In addition, the first pre-reading effect corresponding to the second special figure hold is a first operation mode effect (non-short-time game) that requires the player to operate the operation means in the first operation mode. Special figure hold effect scenario “1609”, “1611”, “1613” effect for the first special figure hold used in the state and the short-time game state) and the operation means to the player from the first operation mode 2nd operation mode operation effect which requires operation with the 2nd operation mode with high difficulty (the effect of the special figure hold effect scenario “1612” of the 1st special figure hold which is used in non-time saving game state) is included .

  The selection rate of the second operation mode operation effect of the second special figure hold when the total number of selections of the first prefetch effect corresponding to the second special figure hold is used as the denominator is 1/9 in the short-time gaming state. Therefore, the non-short game state has a higher ratio of controlling the second operation mode than the short-time game state, and the non-short-time game state has a higher ratio than the non-short-time game state. The ratio of performing the control of the first operation mode is lower.

Also, the special figure reservation effect scenarios “0109”, “0110”, “0111”, “0112”, “0113”, “1109”, “1110”, “1111”, “1112” of the first and second special figure reservations. , “1113”, “0609”, “0610”, “0611”, “0612”, “0613”, “1609”, “1610”, “1611”, “1612”, “1613” In the special figure holding effect scenario, the selection ratio is the same as the total selection ratio of the first special figure holding and the second special figure holding. The selection rate of the second look-ahead effect (the player is not requested to operate the operation means) for the special figure hold production scenario corresponding to all the special figure hold wins is 27/2 times, According to this The selection rate of the first look-ahead effect that requests the player to operate the operation means will decrease.
Further, in the first look-ahead effect corresponding to the first special figure hold and the second special figure hold, the first operation that requires the player to operate the operation means in the first operation mode. A mode effect and a second operation mode operation effect that requires the player to operate the operation means in a second operation mode that is more difficult to operate than the first operation mode are included.

  Second operation mode operation effect of the first special figure hold and the second special figure hold when the total number of first prefetch effects selected corresponding to the first special figure hold and the second special figure hold is used as the denominator The selection rate is 1/9 in the short-time gaming state and 26/34 in the non-short-time gaming state. Therefore, the ratio of performing the control of the second operation mode in the non-short-time gaming state is higher than that in the short-time gaming state. The ratio of performing the control of the first operation mode is lower in the non-short-time gaming state than in the short-time gaming state.

  Next, an example in which a special figure hold image is displayed in another special mode in the prefetch special figure hold effect will be described. The premise is the same as in the example in which the special figure hold image is not displayed according to the special mode described above. Here, when the first special symbol display is performed, the first start port 21 is won, and the result of the first pre-determination is “E3H07H (high probability time short / short)”, and Assume that the result of the determination of the final mode of the special figure hold image (step S1304-4-1) is “special mode 3” and the special figure hold effect scenario is “358” (see FIG. 56). In this case, as shown in FIGS. 75 (a) to 75 (b), the first special figure hold image 261 in the normal mode is displayed on the third display unit 711c at the time of the winning, but FIGS. As shown in FIG. 75 (d), when the special symbol display (lottery effect) one time before the special symbol display (lottery effect), that is, the special symbol display (lottery effect) based on the winning is executed one after another. In addition, the normal mode is changed to the special mode 3.

  Similarly, when the final mode is “special mode 3” but the special figure holding effect scenario is “362” (see FIG. 58), as shown in FIGS. 76 (a) to 76 (b), The first special figure reserved image 261-1 of the special aspect 1 is displayed on the third display unit 711c at the time of winning a prize, but when the next special symbol display is executed, the special figure reserved image of the special aspect 1 is special. When it changes to aspect 2 and the special symbol display of the next time is performed, the special figure reservation display of the special aspect 2 changes to special aspect 3.

  Even when the result of the prior determination is “E3H09H (small hit)”, “E3H0AH (losing with reach)”, or “E3H0BH (losing without reach)”, determination of the final mode of the special figure reserved image (step) The result of S1304-4-1) can be “special aspect 3”. That is, the special figure on-hold image in the special mode 3 indicates a winning of “high probability short / short short hit” or “small win”. Then, as shown in FIG. 52, when the final aspect of the special figure reservation image is “special aspect 3” that suggests “high probability time short / short hits” or “small wins”, the special figure hold related to the winning is held Various image mode displacement modes (scenarios) are set based on the number of special figure reservations (U1 or U2) when winning.

  However, in any of the patterns, the special figure reservation image is in the special mode 3 when the special symbol display (lottery effect) that is performed one time before the special symbol display (lottery effect) corresponding to the winning is performed. It disappears with special mode 3. Thus, when the degree of profit given to the player is relatively low (not the highest), specifically, the gaming state can be advantageous to the player (high probability state), but a prize ball is obtained. In the case of a profit that is difficult to do, the special figure hold image display (prefetched special figure hold effect) according to the special mode 3 suggesting the profit of the game is performed once when the special symbol display related to the special symbol determination is executed. It is executed in the previous special symbol display (lottery effect), and the profit of the game is suggested. In this way, by shortening the expected period for relatively low gaming profits, an increase in disappointment and weakness due to excessive expectations can be suppressed, and a decrease in gaming motivation can be suppressed. In addition, the pre-read special figure hold effect is executed in the special symbol display (lottery effect) one time before the special symbol display related to the special symbol determination is executed, for example, from the occurrence of the special figure hold to the disappearance. The pre-reading special figure hold production suggests incorrect information due to the transition from the high probability state to the low probability state (for example, the pre-judgment result is “High probability short and short per win” when winning a prize) However, since the low-probability state has occurred in the middle, the determination result is “lost”), and it is possible to prevent the production effect and the reliability of the production from being lowered.

  From another point of view, when the result of the pre-determination is “E3H00H (per high first time with high probability)” that is most advantageous to the player, the prefetched special figure holding effect that suggests the profit of the game ( The display of the special figure hold image according to the special mode 5) is easy to be executed at the time of winning (see FIG. 53). That is, the prefetched special figure holding effect (display of the special figure holding image by the special mode 3) suggesting that the result of the prior determination is “high probability short / short hits” or “small hit” is “high probability short / short hits” It is likely to be performed after the pre-reading special figure holding effect that suggests that the degree of profit is higher than that of “winning” or “small winning” and “per the first long with high probability”. Specifically, when the result of the pre-determination is “per 1st long with high probability”, the pre-reading special figure holding effect is easy to be executed at the time of winning the prize, and “per short with high probability” or “small hit” In such a case, the pre-read special figure hold effect is easily executed when the special figure hold related to the winning before the winning is digested and the variable effect relating to the winning one time before the winning is started. In this way, the jackpot with a relatively low degree of game profit tends to shorten the period of suggestion of the result. In other words, since the period of expectation for winning can be shortened, the feeling of disappointment and weakness due to the reaction of the big win winning that the degree of profit is not high can be alleviated, and the decline of the game motivation can be suppressed.

  In addition, in the gaming machine Y to which a plurality of types of jackpots (game profits) can be given in this way, a plurality of types of special-pitch holding images according to the types of jackpots can be displayed. improves.

  Next, the special symbol start winning area (the first start port 21 or the second start port 22) with no hold information in the hold storage means (the first special symbol hold storage area and the second special symbol hold storage area of the main RAM 101c). ) Describes the change in the special figure hold display when the hold information based on the winning of the game ball is set as a change target (a target in which the final mode shown in FIG. 52 changes to any of the special modes 1 to 6). To do.

  77 to 82 are pre-read when the hold information based on the fact that the start condition is satisfied (the game ball wins in the special drawing start winning area) is set as the change target in the state where there is no hold information in the hold storage means. FIG. 77 is a diagram showing a state in which a special figure holding effect is performed. FIG. 77 shows the first start port 21 during the variable display of the special symbol being executed by winning the first start port 21 in the non-time-saving gaming state. A first example of a change in the special figure hold display when the hold information based on winning in the game is set as a change target will be described. FIG. 78 shows a result of winning in the first start port 21 in the non-short game state. A second example of the change in the special figure hold display when the hold information based on the winning to the first start port 21 is set as the change target during the variable display of the special symbol being executed will be described, and FIG. During the non-time-saving gaming state, the second start port 22 A first example of the change in the special figure hold display when the hold information based on the winning to the second start port 22 is set as the change target during the variable display of the special symbol being executed by winning the prize will be described. 80 is a special case when the hold information based on the winning at the second starting port 22 is set as the change target during the variable display of the special symbol being executed by the winning at the second starting port 22 in the non-short-time gaming state. A first example of the change in the figure hold display will be described. FIG. 81 shows the winning to the first starting port 21 during the variable display of the special symbol being executed by the winning to the first starting port 21 in the short-time gaming state. FIG. 82 is a variable display of a special symbol being executed by winning the second starting port 22 in the short-time gaming state. Based on winning the second starting port 22 That describes Japanese view hold display change in the case of distillate information is set to change the subject.

First, an example shown in FIG. 77 will be described.
In the state shown in FIG. 77 (a), the game is in the non-time-saving gaming state as a premise, and the variable display (variable effect) of the first special symbol is being performed. The image is displayed in the normal mode, the first special figure hold number (U1) = 0, the second special figure hold number (U2) = 0, the first special figure hold number is zero, and the second special figure hold number is zero. Is zero.

  After this, the first special figure holding number (U1) = 1 is obtained by winning the game ball at the first start opening 21, and the result of the first pre-determination is “E3H0BH (unreach without reach)”. It is assumed that the result of the determination of the final mode of the special figure hold image related to (step S1304-4-1) is “special mode 1” and the selected special figure hold effect scenario is “0001” (see FIG. 53). ). In this case, in the sub-RAM 102c, the first special figure hold generation designation flag is turned ON, the counter value of the first special figure hold effect counter becomes “1”, and the special figure hold effect scenario “0001” is set. “1” is set as the number of times of execution of the first special figure hold effect in the pre-read special figure hold effect counter for 1 special figure hold.

  Then, based on the first special figure hold generation designation flag, the first special figure hold effect counter, and the second special figure hold effect counter that are turned on, a special figure hold effect control command including information indicated by these is generated. (S1506), the image is transmitted to the image control board 105 (S1700). As a result, as shown in FIG. 77 (b), the first special figure holding image 261 in the normal mode is displayed on the first display unit 711a at the time of winning, and thereafter the normal mode displayed on the first display unit 711a. The first special figure reservation image 261 changes to the first special figure reservation image 261-1 of the special mode 1 to be in the state shown in FIG. 77 (c).

  In the case of the special figure reservation effect scenario “0001”, the single first special figure reservation image 261-1 that has become the special mode 1 does not change to another display mode thereafter. And the 1st special figure reservation image 261-1 which became the special aspect 1 is a lottery effect corresponding to the hold information shown by the said 1st special figure reservation image 261-1, as shown in FIG.77 (d). Disappears from the first display unit 711a while maintaining the special mode 1. At the same time, the first special figure variable display corresponding image 263-1 of the special mode 1 similar to the first special figure reservation image 261-1 is displayed in the variable display corresponding display area 713. The first special figure variable display corresponding image 263-1 corresponds to the lottery effect to be executed. Then, with the end of the lottery effect, the first special figure variable display corresponding image 263-1 disappears.

Next, the example shown in FIG. 78 will be described.
In FIG. 78 (a), as a premise, the game is in the non-time-short game state, and the first special symbol is in a variable display (variable effect). Displayed in the normal mode, the first special figure hold number (U1) = 0, the second special figure hold number (U2) = 0, the first special figure hold number is zero, and the second special figure hold number is zero. It has become a piece.

  After this, the first special figure holding number (U1) = 1 is obtained by winning the game ball at the first start opening 21, and the result of the first pre-determination is “E3H0BH (unreach without reach)”. It is assumed that the result of the determination of the final mode of the special figure hold image related to (step S1304-4-1) is “special mode 1” and the selected special figure hold effect scenario is “0002” (see FIG. 53). ). In this case, in the sub RAM 102c, the first special figure hold generation designation flag is turned ON, the counter value of the first special figure hold effect counter becomes “1”, and the special figure hold effect scenario “0002” is set. “0” is set as the number of times of execution of the first special figure hold effect in the pre-read special figure hold effect counter for 1 special figure hold.

  When the special figure reservation effect scenario is “0002” (see FIG. 53), as shown in FIG. 78 (b), the first special figure reservation image 261 in the normal mode is displayed on the first display unit 711a at the time of winning. Is done. Then, as shown in FIG. 78 (c), the first special figure reservation image 261 of the normal mode is in the normal mode together with the execution of the lottery effect corresponding to the hold information indicated by the first special figure reservation image 261. It disappears from the first display portion 711a. At the same time, the first special figure variable display corresponding image 263 corresponding to the lottery effect executed in the variable display corresponding display area 713 is temporarily displayed as a normal mode similar to the first special figure reservation image 261. At this time, the counter value of the first special figure hold effect counter becomes “0”, which matches the counter value of the prefetch special figure hold effect counter for the first special figure hold, so that it is displayed in the variable display corresponding display area 713. As shown in FIG. 78D, the first special figure variable display corresponding image 263 is displayed by changing from the normal mode to the first special figure variable display corresponding image 263-1 of the special mode 1. Then, with the end of the lottery effect, the first special figure variable display corresponding image 263-1 disappears.

Next, an example shown in FIG. 79 will be described.
In the state shown in FIG. 79 (a), the non-short game state is assumed as a premise, and the variable display (variable effect) of the second special symbol is being performed. A variable display compatible display image corresponding to (hereinafter referred to as a second special figure variable display compatible image) is displayed in a normal mode, and the current first special figure hold number (U1) = 0, the second special figure hold number ( U2) = 0, there are zero first special figure holds, and there are zero second special figure holds.

  Thereafter, the second special figure holding number (U2) = 1 is obtained by winning the game ball to the second starting port 22, and the result of the second pre-determination is “E4H0BH (unreach without reach)”, and the winning Assume that the result of the determination of the final mode of the special figure hold image related to (step S1304-4-1) is “special mode 1” and the selected special figure hold effect scenario is “0501” (see FIG. 57). ). In this case, in the sub-RAM 102c, the second special figure hold generation designation flag is turned ON, the counter value of the second special figure hold effect counter becomes “1”, and the special figure hold effect scenario “0501” is set. “1” is set as the number of times of execution of the second special figure hold effect in the pre-read special figure hold effect counter for 2 special figure hold.

  Based on the second special figure hold generation designation flag, the second special figure hold effect counter, and the second special figure hold effect counter that are turned on, a special figure hold effect control command including information indicated by these is generated. (S1506), the image is transmitted to the image control board 105 (S1700). As a result, as shown in FIG. 79 (b), the second special figure holding image 262 of the normal mode is displayed on the first display unit 712a at the time of the winning, and then the second special image displayed on the first display unit 712a. The special figure hold image 262 changes from the normal mode to the second special figure hold image 262-1 of the special mode 1, and the state shown in FIG. 79 (c) is obtained.

  In the case of the special figure reservation effect scenario “0501”, the one second special figure reservation image 262-1 that has become the special mode 1 does not change to another display mode thereafter. And the 2nd special figure reservation image 262-1 which became the special aspect 1 is a lottery effect corresponding to the hold information shown by the said 2nd special figure reservation image 262-1 as shown in FIG.79 (d). Disappears from the first display portion 712a with the special mode 1 as it is executed. At the same time, the second special figure variable display corresponding image 264-1 of the special mode 1 similar to the second special figure reservation image 262 is displayed in the variable display corresponding display area 713. The second special figure variable display corresponding image 264-1 corresponds to the lottery effect to be executed. And the 2nd special figure variable display corresponding | compatible image 264-1 disappears with the completion | finish of the said lottery effect.

Next, the example shown in FIG. 80 will be described.
In FIG. 80 (a), as a premise, the game is in the non-time-saving gaming state, and the second special symbol is in a variable display (variable effect), and the second special figure variable display corresponding image is displayed in the variable display corresponding display area 713. Displayed in the normal mode, the first special figure hold number (U1) = 0, the second special figure hold number (U2) = 0, the first special figure hold number is zero, and the second special figure hold number is zero. It has become a piece.

  Thereafter, the result of the second pre-determination is “E4H0BH (unreach without reach)” due to the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 22, and determination of the final mode of the special figure holding image related to the winning (step It is assumed that the result of S1304-4-1) is “special aspect 1” and the selected special figure holding effect scenario is “0502” (see FIG. 57). In this case, in the sub RAM 102c, the second special figure hold generation designation flag is turned ON, the counter value of the second special figure hold effect counter becomes “1”, and the special figure hold effect scenario “0502” is set. “0” is set as the number of times of execution of the second special figure hold effect in the pre-read special figure hold effect counter for 2 special figure hold.

  When the special figure reservation effect scenario is “0502” (see FIG. 53), as shown in FIG. 80 (b), the second special figure reservation image 262 in the normal mode is displayed on the first display unit 712a at the time of the winning. Is done. Then, as shown in FIG. 80 (c), the second special figure hold image 262 of the normal mode is in the normal mode together with the execution of the lottery effect corresponding to the hold information indicated by the second special figure hold image 262. It disappears from the first display portion 712a. At the same time, the second special figure variable display corresponding image 264 corresponding to the lottery effect executed in the variable display corresponding display area 713 is temporarily displayed as a normal mode similar to the second special figure reservation image 262. At this time, the counter value of the second special figure holding effect counter becomes “0”, which matches the counter value of the pre-reading special figure holding effect counter for holding the second special figure, so that it is displayed in the variable display corresponding display area 713. The second special figure variable display corresponding image 264 is changed from the normal mode to the second special figure variable display corresponding image 264-1 of the special mode 1 as shown in FIG. And the 2nd special figure variable display corresponding | compatible image 264-1 disappears with the completion | finish of the said lottery effect.

Next, the example shown in FIG. 81 will be described.
In the state shown in FIG. 81 (a), the short-time gaming state is assumed as a premise, and the variable display (variable effect) of the first special symbol is being performed, and the first special symbol hold number (U1) = 0, second The special figure hold number (U2) = 0, the first special figure hold is zero, and the second special figure hold is zero. Further, as shown in FIG. 51, the variable display corresponding display area 713 is not set, and accordingly, the frame image 723 is not displayed.

  After this, the first special figure holding number (U1) = 1 is obtained by winning the game ball at the first start opening 21, and the result of the first pre-determination is “E3H0BH (unreach without reach)”. It is assumed that the result of the determination of the final mode of the special figure hold image related to (step S1304-4-1) is “special mode 1” and the selected special figure hold effect scenario is “1001” (see FIG. 61). ). In this case, in the sub-RAM 102c, the first special figure hold production designation flag is turned ON, the counter value of the first special figure hold production counter becomes “1”, and the special figure hold production scenario “1001” is set. “1” is set as the number of times of execution of the first special figure hold effect in the pre-read special figure hold effect counter for 1 special figure hold.

  Then, based on the first special figure hold generation designation flag, the first special figure hold effect counter, and the second special figure hold effect counter that are turned on, a special figure hold effect control command including information indicated by these is generated. (S1506), the image is transmitted to the image control board 105 (S1700). As a result, as shown in FIG. 81 (b), the first special figure reservation image 261 of the normal mode is displayed on the first display unit 711a at the time of the winning, and the first display displayed on the first display unit 711a thereafter. The special figure hold image 261 changes from the normal mode to the first special figure hold image 261-1 of the special mode 1, and the state shown in FIG. 81 (c) is obtained.

  In the case of the special figure reservation effect scenario “1001”, the first special figure reservation image 261 that has become the special mode 1 does not change to another display mode thereafter. And the 1st special figure reservation image 261-1 which became the special aspect 1 is a lottery effect corresponding to the hold information shown by the said 1st special figure reservation image 261-1, as shown in FIG.81 (d). Disappears from the first display unit 711a while maintaining the special mode 1.

Next, the example shown in FIG. 82 will be described.
In the state shown in FIG. 82 (a), the premise is that the game is in the short-time game state, and the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable display (variation effect), but the first special figure hold number (U1) = 0, 2 The number of special figure hold (U2) = 0, the number of the first special figure hold is zero, and the number of the second special figure hold is zero. As shown in FIG. 51, the variable display corresponding display area 713 is not displayed.

  Thereafter, the second special figure holding number (U2) = 1 is obtained by winning the game ball to the second starting port 22, and the result of the second pre-determination is “E4H0BH (unreach without reach)”, and the winning It is assumed that the result of the determination of the final mode of the special figure hold image related to (step S1304-4-1) is “special mode 1” and the selected special figure hold effect scenario is “1501” (see FIG. 65). ). In this case, in the sub RAM 102c, the second special figure hold generation designation flag is turned ON, the counter value of the second special figure hold effect counter becomes “1”, and the special figure hold effect scenario “1501” is set. “1” is set as the number of times of execution of the second special figure hold effect in the pre-read special figure hold effect counter for 2 special figure hold.

  Based on the second special figure hold generation designation flag, the second special figure hold effect counter, and the second special figure hold effect counter that are turned on, a special figure hold effect control command including information indicated by these is generated. (S1506), the image is transmitted to the image control board 105 (S1700). As a result, as shown in FIG. 82 (b), the second special figure holding image 262 of the normal mode is displayed on the first display unit 712a at the time of the winning, and then the second display displayed on the first display unit 712a. The special figure hold image 262 changes from the normal mode to the second special figure hold image 262-1 of the special mode 1, and the state shown in FIG. 82 (c) is obtained.

  In the case of the special figure reservation effect scenario “1501”, one second special figure reservation image 262-1 that has become the special mode 1 does not change to another display mode thereafter. And the 2nd special figure reservation image 262-1 which became the special aspect 1 is a lottery effect corresponding to the hold information shown by the said 2nd special figure reservation image 262-1 as shown in FIG.82 (d). Disappears from the first display portion 712a with the special mode 1 as it is executed.

  Here, in the present embodiment, during the non-time-saving gaming state, the variable display corresponding display area 713 is displayed, and the hold information based on the winning of the game ball at the first starting port 21 is changed (shown in FIG. 52). When the final mode is set to any of the special modes 1 to 6), the normal mode of the display corresponding to the hold information (first special figure hold display image, first special figure variable display support image) The change from the special modes 1 to 6 may be performed in all the display units 711a to 711d and the variable display corresponding display area 713 of the first special figure holding display area 711.

  Further, during the non-short game state, the variable display corresponding display area 713 is displayed, and the hold information based on the winning of the game ball at the second starting port 22 is the change target (the final mode shown in FIG. 52 is the special mode 1). To 6 to 6), the normal mode of the display corresponding to the hold information (the second special figure hold display image, the second special figure variable display support image) is changed from the normal mode to the special modes 1 to 6. The change to may be performed in all of the display units 712a to 712d and the variable display corresponding display area 713 of the second special figure holding display area 712.

  Further, during the non-short-time gaming state, the first special figure holding storage means (the first special symbol holding storage area of the main RAM 101c) has no holding information, and the holding is based on a game ball winning at the first starting port 21. When the information is set as a change target, the change from the normal mode to the special modes 1 to 6 of the display corresponding to the hold information (first special figure hold display image, first special figure variable display support image) This may be performed in either the first display unit 711a or the variable display corresponding display area 713 of the one special figure hold display area 711.

  In addition, during the non-time-saving gaming state, the second special figure holding storage means (second special symbol holding storage area of the main RAM 101c) has no holding information, and the holding is based on the game ball winning at the second starting port 22. When the information is set as a change target, the change from the normal mode to the special modes 1 to 6 of the display corresponding to the hold information (second special figure hold display image, second special figure variable display support image) This may be performed in either the first display section 712a or the variable display corresponding display area 713 of the 2 special figure hold display area 712.

  On the other hand, in the short-time gaming state, the variable display corresponding display area 713 and the first special figure variable display corresponding image are not displayed, and the hold information based on the winning of the game ball at the first starting port 21 is set as the change target. When it is done, the change from the normal mode of the display corresponding to the hold information (the first special figure hold display image) to the special modes 1 to 6 is changed in each display unit 711a to 711d of the first special figure hold display area 711. It is performed in either case and is not performed in the variable display corresponding display area 713.

  Further, during the short-time gaming state, the variable display corresponding display area 713 and the second special figure variable display corresponding image are not displayed, and the hold information based on the winning of the game ball at the second starting port 22 is set as the change target. When it is done, the display corresponding to the hold information (second special figure hold display image) changes from the normal form to the special forms 1 to 6 in each display unit 712a to 712d of the second special figure hold display area 712. It is performed in either case and is not performed in the variable display corresponding display area 713.

  In addition, during the short-time gaming state, the holding information based on the fact that the game ball has won the first starting port 21 in the state where there is no holding information in the first special figure holding storage means (the first special symbol holding storage area of the main RAM 101c). Is set as a change target, the change of the display corresponding to the hold information (first special figure hold display image) from the normal form to the special forms 1 to 6 is the first special figure hold display area 711 in the first state. This is performed in the display unit 711a and is not performed in the variable display corresponding display area 713.

  In addition, during the short-time gaming state, the holding information based on the fact that the game ball has won the second starting port 22 in the state where there is no holding information in the second special figure holding storage means (second special symbol holding storage area of the main RAM 101c). Is set as a change target, the change of the display corresponding to the hold information (second special figure hold display image) from the normal form to the special forms 1 to 6 is performed in the first special figure hold display area 712. This is performed in the display unit 712a and is not performed in the variable display corresponding display area 713.

  Next, a case where the display mode of the hold information based on the winning of the game ball in the special figure start winning area (first start port 21) changes from the normal mode to the special mode and changes from the special mode to the special mode 1. explain.

FIG. 83 shows a special mode in the case where the hold information based on the fact that the start condition is satisfied (the game ball wins in the special figure start winning area) is set as the change target in the state where there is no hold information in the hold storage means. It is a figure showing a mode that the prefetch special figure holding | maintenance effect including a display is performed.
As a previous premise state shown in FIG. 83 (a), the game is in the non-time-saving gaming state, and the first special symbol is in a variable display (variable effect), and the first special figure variable is displayed in the variable display corresponding display area 713. The display-corresponding image is displayed in the normal mode, and the first special figure reservation image 261 is normally displayed on the first display unit 711a, the second display unit 711b, and the second display unit 711c, and the current first special figure reservation number (U1). = 3, number of second special figure hold (U2) = 0, zero first special figure hold, and zero second special figure hold.

  Thereafter, in the state shown in FIG. 83 (a), the first special figure holding number (U1) = 1 is obtained due to the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 21, and the result of the first preliminary determination is “E3H0BH (reach) The result of the determination of the final aspect of the special figure reservation image related to the winning (step S1304-4-1) is “special aspect 1”, and the selected special figure reservation effect scenario is “ 0039 ”(see FIG. 53). In this case, in the sub RAM 102c, the first special figure hold generation designation flag is turned ON, the counter value of the first special figure hold effect counter becomes “1”, and the special figure hold effect scenario “0039” shown in FIG. It is set, and “1” is set as the number of times of execution of the first special figure hold effect in the prefetch special figure hold effect counter for the first special figure hold.

  Then, based on the first special figure hold generation designation flag, the first special figure hold effect counter, and the second special figure hold effect counter that are turned on, a special figure hold effect control command including information indicated by these is generated. (S1506), the image is transmitted to the image control board 105 (S1700). As a result, at the time of the winning shown in FIG. 83 (a), the first special figure holding image 261 in the normal mode is displayed on the fourth display unit 711d. However, when the variation display of the special symbol is finished and the next special symbol display (lottery effect) is executed, the first special symbol hold image 261 is entirely shifted and displayed on the fourth display unit 711d. The first special figure reservation image 261 in the normal mode moves to the third display unit 711c and changes to the first special figure reservation image 261-0 in the special mode as shown in FIG. 83 (b). Thereafter, the first special figure reservation image 261-0 in the special mode displayed on the third display unit 711c moves to the second display unit 711b, and as shown in FIG. 83 (c), the second display unit 711b. The first special figure reservation image 261-0 of the special mode displayed on is moved to the first display unit 711 a and the first special figure reservation image 261-1 of the special aspect 1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 83 (d). To change. And the 1st special figure reservation image 261-1 which became the special aspect 1 performs the lottery effect corresponding to the hold information shown by the said 1st special figure reservation image 261, as shown in FIG.83 (e). At the same time, it disappears from the first display portion 711a while maintaining the special mode 1. At the same time, the first special figure variable display corresponding image 263-1 corresponding to the lottery effect executed in the variable display corresponding display area 713 is displayed as the special mode 1 similar to the first special figure reservation image 261-1. . Then, with the end of the lottery effect, the first special figure variable display corresponding image 263-1 disappears.

Here, the first special figure reservation image 261-0 in a special mode is a display mode that always changes in a special mode after being displayed.
Also, the first special figure reservation image 261-0 in a special mode is displayed when a game ball wins the first start port 21 in a state where there is no reservation information in the first special symbol reservation storage area of the main RAM 101c, and in the main RAM 101c. This is not displayed when a game ball wins the second starting port 22 in a state where there is no holding information in the second special symbol holding storage area.

Next, the special effect mode will be described. The special effect mode includes a first special effect mode that suggests the grant of a game profit (winning of a big hit) over a plurality of variable effects, and a content that suggests the occurrence of the first special effect mode over a plurality of variable effects. There is a second special effect mode, both of which are mainly performed in the first image display device 71. In the present embodiment, the special effect mode is incorporated into the variable effect. That is, it is constituted by a background image of a lottery effect by the first image display device 71.
FIG. 69 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect mode final mode determination table stored in the sub ROM 102b according to the first embodiment of this invention. FIG. 70 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect mode scenario determination table stored in the sub ROM 102b according to the first embodiment of this invention. FIG. 71A is a diagram illustrating an example of a variation effect pattern determination table divided according to the effect mode stored in the sub ROM 102b, and FIG. 71B is stored in the sub ROM 102b in the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of the fluctuation production pattern determination table of production mode A0.

  The aspect of special production mode is demonstrated. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 69, the first special effect mode is set in two types: a first special effect mode A1 (effect mode A1) and a first special effect mode A2 (effect mode A2). Has been.

  Both the first special effect mode A1 and the first special effect mode A2 are different from the normal standard normal effect mode A (effect mode A0) in the effect mode A suggesting a low probability state and a non-time-short state. This is a special production mode. And 1st special production mode A1 is special production mode A which suggests that the expectation degree of jackpot winning is higher than normal production mode A, but lower than 1st special production mode A2. The first special effect mode A2 is a special effect mode A that suggests that the degree of expectation of winning the big hit is higher than the normal effect mode A and the first special effect mode A1.

  Next, the first special effect mode A1 and the first special effect mode A2 are generated based on the preliminary determination (S236 or S246) in the main control board 101. Here, the occurrence of the first special effect mode A1 and the first special effect mode A2 will be described. As a premise, it is assumed that the number of first special figure hold (U1) = 3, that is, there are three first special figure hold, and the result of the prior determination relating to each third special figure hold is “no reach”. . Further, as a premise, it is assumed that the user is staying in the normal performance mode A and the variation effect in the normal performance mode A is being executed.

  In this case, when the game ball wins the first start opening 21 and the first special figure hold occurs, the first preliminary determination is performed on the main control board 101 (S236), and the first start opening indicating the determination result. A winning designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 102. On the effect control board 102, the counter value of the first special figure reservation effect counter is “4”. Here, since it is currently the normal effect mode A and the counter value of the first special figure hold effect counter is “2” or more, the prefetch effect mode determination is performed (steps S1304-5 to S1304-7). Then, the effect mode (the final mode of the effect mode) when the variable effect related to the winning is performed is determined using the effect mode scenario determination table shown in FIG. 70 (step S1304-7-1). Here, for example, when the determination result is “normal mode”, the production mode scenario is not set, and the number of production mode executions is not set in the prefetch production mode counter (“NO” in S1304-7-2).

  On the other hand, in the pre-reading effect mode determination, when the effect mode (the final mode of the effect mode) when the variable effect related to the winning is performed is “first special effect mode A1 or first special effect mode A2”, the first An effect mode scenario indicating a transition mode of the effect mode up to the first special effect mode A1 or the first special effect mode A2 is determined (step S1304-7-3). Then, the production mode scenario is set (step S1304-7-4), and the current special figure reservation number “3” is set as the number of production mode executions in the prefetching production mode counter (step S1304-7-5). ).

  Then, the prefetch effect mode is controlled based on the set effect mode scenario and the counter value of the prefetch effect mode counter (prefetch effect mode information) from the variation effect next to the change effect performed at the time of winning the prize ( FIG. 71).

  Here, an example of the pre-reading effect mode when the effect mode (the final mode of the effect mode) when the variable effect related to the winning is performed is “first special effect mode A2” will be described. Since the first special figure hold number is “4” due to the winning (step S1303-5), if the result of the prior determination is “E3H0BH (unreach without reach)”, the production mode scenarios “017” to “017” to “ The production mode scenario is selected from “021”.

  If the effect mode scenario is “017”, the first special effect mode A2 is set at the end of the current change effect, and the change effect in the first special effect mode A2 is executed from the next change effect to the change effect. If the effect mode scenario is “018”, the first special effect mode A2 is set at the end of the next change effect, and the change effect in the first special effect mode A2 is executed from the next change effect to the change effect. The

  On the other hand, if the production mode scenario is “019”, the second special production mode A (production mode A3) suggesting the occurrence of the first special production mode A2 is set at the end of the current variation production, and the next variation production is performed. At the end, the first special effect mode A2 is set. That is, the variation effect by the second special effect mode A is executed in the next variation effect, and the variation effect by the first special effect mode A2 is executed from the next variation effect to the variation effect. If the effect mode scenario is “020”, the second special effect mode A (effect mode A3) is set at the end of the current variation effect, and the first special effect mode A2 is set at the end of the next change effect. . That is, the variation effect in the second special effect mode A is executed in the next variation effect from the next variation effect, and the variation effect in the first special effect mode A2 is executed in the variation effect one after another. Further, if the effect mode scenario is “021”, the second special effect mode A is set at the end of the current variation effect, and the first special effect mode A2 is set at the end of the subsequent change effect. That is, the variation effect by the second special effect mode A is executed in the variation effect one after another from the next variation effect, and the variation effect by the first special effect mode A2 is executed in the variation effect.

  As described above, when the first special figure hold number (U1) at the time of winning is “3”, the result of the pre-determination is “E3H0BH (unreach without reach)”, and the variable effect related to the winning is performed. When the production mode (the final mode of the production mode) is “first special production mode A2”, the mode changes to the first special production mode A2 in various transition modes. In the present embodiment, even when the result of the prior determination is another result and the effect mode (the final mode of the effect mode) when the variable effect related to the winning is performed is “first special effect mode A2”. The transition modes of possible production modes are set to be the same. However, the transition mode of each effect mode, that is, the probability of the selected effect mode scenario is different based on the result of the prior determination. Therefore, the degree of expectation of winning a big hit differs depending on the transition mode of the effect mode. This is the same even when the number of first special figure reservations at the time of winning a prize is other than “3”.

  Next, image effects performed on the display screen of the first image display device 71 will be described with reference to FIGS. 84 to 104.

  84 to 95 show the special figure holding effect scenarios “0031”, “0032”, “0033”, “0034”, “0034” of the first special figure holding used in the non-short-time gaming state shown in FIG. 53 to FIG. 0035 ”,“ 0109 ”,“ 0110 ”,“ 0111 ”,“ 0112 ”,“ 0113 ”and the special figure hold effect scenario“ 1031 ”of the first special figure hold used in the short-time game state shown in FIGS. ”,“ 1032 ”,“ 1033 ”,“ 1034 ”,“ 1035 ”,“ 1109 ”,“ 1110 ”,“ 1111 ”,“ 1112 ”,“ 1113 ”to explain the game contents from the hold display to the big hit game It is the 1st thru / or 18th explanatory view for this. The game contents shown in FIGS. 85 to 95 include the first special figure hold special scenario reserved in the non-short game state used in the non-short game state and the short time game state by the sub CPU 102a of the production control board 102. 1 special figure holding special scenario holding scenario “0031”, “0032”, “0033”, “0034”, “0035”, “0109”, “0110”, “0111”, “0112”, “0113” and Special figure reservation effect scenarios “1031”, “1032”, “1033”, “1034”, “1035”, “1109”, “1110”, “1111”, “ Some of the types of effects executed when “1112” and “1113” are selected are shown.

  In the first embodiment of the present invention, the effect control board 102 has the special figure hold effect scenarios “0031”, “0032”, “0033”, “0034” of the first special figure hold used in the non-time-saving gaming state, “0035”, “0109”, “0110”, “0111”, “0112”, “0113” and the special figure hold effect scenario “1031”, “1032”, “1032” for the first special figure hold used in the short-time gaming state. By transmitting the selected weapon change command to the image control board 105 when “1033”, “1034”, “1035”, “1109”, “1110”, “1111”, “1112”, “1113” are selected. The image effect of the first image display device 71 is changed.

  In addition, the effect control board 102 is used in the non-time saving game state, the special figure reservation effect scenarios “0109”, “0110”, “0111”, “0112”, “0113”, and the time saving game state. When the special figure reservation effect scenarios “1109”, “1110”, “1111”, “1112”, and “1113” used for the first special figure reservation are used, the selected weapon changing process described later and the weapon described below are performed. By the corresponding effect lottery process, the jackpot battle effect patterns 1 to 16 execution commands for respectively executing the 16 types of jackpot battle effect patterns 1 to 16 can be transmitted to the image control board 105. When receiving the jackpot battle effect patterns 1 to 16 execution commands, the image control board 105 causes the first image display device 71 to display images based on the jackpot battle effect patterns 1 to 16, respectively.

  In addition, when the special control holding scenario “0031”, “0032”, “0033”, “0034”, “0035” corresponding to the loss of the non-short-time gaming state and the short-time gaming state is selected, the production control board 102 In FIG. 5, the execution command for the losing battle effect patterns 1 to 16 for executing the 16 types of the losing battle effect patterns 1 to 16 can be transmitted to the image control board 105. When the image control board 105 receives the losing battle effect patterns 1 to 16 execution command, the image control board 105 causes the first image display device 71 to display images based on the losing battle effect patterns 1 to 16, respectively.

  Further, the effect control board 102 changes the image effect of the first image display device 71 by transmitting an attack execution image display command to the image control board 105 in a part of the jackpot battle effect pattern and the lose battle effect pattern. It is like that.

  First, an image displayed when the special figure holding effect scenario “0109” is selected in the non-time-saving gaming state will be described.

(Special figure hold effect scenario “0109” of the first special figure hold used in non-time-saving gaming state)
In the special figure reservation effect scenario “0109” of the first special figure hold used in the non-short-time gaming state, first, during the Nth special symbol variation display, the first special figure hold number (U1) = 4 from the beginning. Or a case where a game ball enters the first start port 21 from the state of the first special figure hold number (U1) = 3 and becomes the state of the first special figure hold number (U1) = 4 And the image shown in FIG. 84A is displayed.

Here, the effect symbol 251 is composed of four types of symbols. In FIG. 84A, the effect symbol 251a for the left, the effect symbol 251b for the middle, and the symbol for the right are shown in the center of the display area of the first image display device 71. And the fourth effect symbol 251d is displayed in the lower left of the display area of the first image display device 71. An information basic image 253 is displayed below the display area of the first image display device 71. The information basic image 253 includes a first display unit 711a and a second display in the first special figure holding display area 711. Unit 711b, third display unit 711c, fourth display unit 711d, and first display unit 712a, second display unit 712b, third display unit 712c, and fourth display unit 712d of second special figure holding display area 712. Is set. The first special figure hold image 261 in the normal mode is displayed on all of the first display unit 711a, the second display unit 711b, the third display unit 711c, and the fourth display unit 711d in the first special figure hold display area 711. ing. A variable display corresponding display area 713 is set between the first special figure hold display area 711 and the second special figure hold display area 712 (see FIG. 72). In the variable display corresponding display area 713, a first special figure variable display compatible image (variable display compatible display image) 263 of a normal mode corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol being executed by winning the first start port 21 is provided. It is displayed. In addition, on the information basic image 253, three ordinary reserved images 254a, 254b, and 254c are displayed.
Furthermore, a mountain background image 255a1 and an airplane image 255b used for the special effect are displayed in the background of the effect symbol 251.

  Next, when the Nth special symbol variation display is completed, the first special figure reservation image 261 of the normal mode is moved to the third display unit 711c, and during the N + 1th special symbol variation display to be executed next, The image shown in 84 (b) is displayed.

  In FIG. 84 (b), the first special figure hold image 261 in the normal mode is displayed on all of the first display unit 711a, the second display unit 711b, and the third display unit 711c of the first special figure hold display area 711. Has been. On the fourth display unit 711d, the first special figure holding image is not displayed. On the upper side of the third display unit 711c, an effect button pressing operation request image 270 for requesting an operation of the effect button 10A is displayed. In the effect button pressing operation request image 270, an arrow image 271 pointing downward and an image 272 simulating the effect button 10A are displayed side by side, and an image 273 of “Press!” Are displayed side by side. The display of the effect button pressing operation request image 270 is an effect of requesting the player to press the effect button 10A once.

  When the effect button 10A is operated by the player during the display period of the effect button pressing operation request image 270, as shown in FIG. 84 (c) as a button effect by the process shown in FIG. The image display of the button operation request disappears, and the first special figure hold image 261-1 of the special mode 1 is switched and displayed on the third display unit 711c. Even when the predetermined time has elapsed and the display period of the effect button pressing operation request image 270 has ended, the image shown in FIG. 84C is displayed.

  Also, during the (N + 1) th special symbol variation display, the production button first vibration flag = 01, the production button second vibration flag = 01 according to the special figure holding production scenario “0109” of the first special figure holding used in the non-time-saving gaming state = 00, the effect button third vibration flag = 00, and the count value of the button effect counter is in the first vibration period which is the first candidate for the period for causing the effect button to vibrate, and the effect button effect control process of FIG. 47 is performed in step S1401. → S1402 → S1403 → S1410 → RETURN The sub CPU 102a sets the effect button vibration command in the transmission buffer to cause the lamp control board 104 to perform control to vibrate the effect button 10A. In this case, the effect button vibration device 10 </ b> C vibrates the effect button 10 </ b> A by rotating the eccentric wheel 10 </ b> C <b> 3 by the electric motor 10 </ b> C <b> 1 being supplied with the driving voltage from the lamp control board 104. Thereby, the player who operated the effect button 10A feels the vibration of the effect button 10A.

  When the (N + 1) th special symbol variation display is completed, the first special figure hold image 261-1 of the special mode 1 moves to the second display unit 711b. During the subsequent (N + 2) th special symbol variation display, the first special figure hold image 261-1 of the special mode 1 is continuously displayed on the second display unit 711b. When the (N + 2) th special symbol variation display is completed, the first special figure reservation image 261-1 of the special mode 1 moves to the first display unit 711a. During the N + 3th special symbol variation display thereafter, the first special figure hold image 261-1 of the special mode 1 is continuously displayed on the first display unit 711a. When the N + 3th special symbol variation display is completed, the first special figure variable display corresponding image 263 disappears from the variable display corresponding display area 713, and the first special figure reserved image 261-1 of the special mode 1 is displayed from the first display unit 711a. Disappears and the first special figure variable display corresponding image 263-1 of the special mode 1 corresponding to the first special figure reservation image 261 displayed on the first display unit 711a is newly displayed in the variable display corresponding display area 713. Then, based on the start opening prize designation command corresponding to the first special figure reservation image 261-1 of the special mode 1, the (N + 4) th special symbol variation display is executed.

  In the (N + 4) th special symbol variation display, first, as shown in FIG. 85 (a), the effect symbols 251a, 251b, 251c, and 251d are variably displayed. The first special figure hold image is not displayed on all of the first display unit 711a, the second display unit 711b, and the third display unit 711c of the first special figure hold display area 711. In addition, in the variable display corresponding display area 713, a special mode is used until a state where the effect design 251b for the same type as the effect design 251a for the left and the effect design 251c for the right shown in FIG. 89 (a) is stopped and displayed. One first special figure variable display corresponding image 263-1 remains displayed.

FIG. 85B is a display screen showing a state in which a predetermined time has elapsed from the state of FIG.
At this time, in the left effect symbol 251a and the right effect symbol 251c, the same type of effect symbol (for example, 7) is stopped and displayed at both corners of the display area.
The “stop display” of the effect symbol 251 in the present embodiment includes a complete stop display in which the effect symbol 251 does not move at all and a temporary stop display in which the effect symbol 251 swings small.

  After a predetermined time has elapsed from the state of FIG. 85 (b), the background movement display shown in FIG. 85 (c) is performed. In the background movement display, a state is displayed in which the background is scrolled to the left to move from the mountain background image 255a1 to the flat background image 255a2. In addition, in the upper left corner of the display area of the first image display device 71 shown in FIG. 85 (c), the left and right effect symbols 251a1, 251b1, and 251c1 that are composed of only small numbers. Is displayed in a reach state that stops at the symbol that constitutes the jackpot. The reach state of the left middle right effect symbols 251a1, 251b1, and 251c1 is maintained until FIG. 88 (c).

  After the background has moved in the background movement display shown in FIG. 85 (c), as shown in FIG. 86 (a), the battle effect display period starts, and the first image display device 71 displays the image of the character C of the main character. 301 is displayed for a predetermined time, and then a weapon selection screen 302 shown in FIG. 86 (b) is displayed.

  The weapon selection screen 302 includes areas 321, 322, 323, and 324 obtained by dividing the screen into four parts. In areas 321, 322, 323, and 324, images of different types of weapons 331, 332, 333, and 334, characters 335 indicating weapon names “blade”, “drill”, “hammer”, and “missile”, 336, 337, and 338 are displayed. A background image 340 with an effect of stars is displayed on the background of the selected weapon image. In the center of the screen, an effect button operation request image 325 requesting operation of the effect button 10A is displayed. The effect button operation request image 325 displays an arrow image 326 pointing downward, an image 327 simulating the effect button 10A, and a character 328 of “Press!” Arranged in order from the bottom.

  When the effect button 10A is operated on such a weapon selection screen 302, weapons selected in the order of blade → drill → hammer → missile → blade by the effect input control shown in step S1410 (see FIG. 48). The background image 340 is displayed in which the effect of the star is applied only to the background of the selected weapon.

  During the display period of the weapon selection screen 302, it is during the second vibration period, which is the second candidate for the period for vibrating the effect button, but the special figure hold effect scenario of the first special figure hold used in the non-short game state. The production button first vibration flag = 01, the production button second vibration flag = 00, and the production button third vibration flag = 00 due to “0109”, so that the production button production control process of FIG. 47 is performed in steps S1401 → S1402 → The flow proceeds from S1410 to RETURN, and the sub CPU 102a does not perform control for causing the lamp control board 104 to vibrate the effect button. Therefore, the player who operated the effect button 10A does not feel the vibration of the effect button 10A.

  When the effect button 10A is not operated on such a weapon selection screen 302, an initial blade is selected as a weapon. In the case of this initial setting, a background image 340 in which an effect by a star is applied only to the background of the blade is displayed.

Here, the effect of the special figure reservation effect scenario “0109” of the first special figure reservation used in the non-time-saving gaming state following FIG. 86 (b) is concretely shown using FIG. 86 (c) to FIG. 89 (c). I will explain it.
In FIG. 86 (c), the first image display device 71 displays an image 351 of the main character C having a blade (image 352). A window 361 is displayed in the lower left area of the screen of the first image display device 71. The window 361 includes a character 362 with the name “Great Kaiser V” of the character C, a character 363 of “weapon: blade”, a character 364 of “attack level: 7” indicating that the attack level of the character C is 7, and a character A character 365 of “defense level: 3” indicating that the defense level of C is 3 is displayed.

  After the image shown in FIG. 86C is displayed, the image shown in FIG. 87A is displayed on the first image display device 71.

  In FIG. 87 (a), an image 371 of the enemy character D is displayed on the first image display device 71. A window 381 is displayed in the lower left area of the screen of the first image display device 71. In the window 381, the character 382 of the name “Mechagorgos” of the character D, the character 383 of “weapon: missile”, the character 384 of “attack level: 5” indicating that the attack level of the character D is 5, A character 385 of “defense level: 5” indicating that the defense level is 5 is displayed.

  In the jackpot battle effect pattern 1, such a level display indicates that the attack level of the character C is higher than the defense level of the character D, and the defense level of the character C is lower than the attack level of the character D.

After the image shown in FIG. 87A is displayed, a confrontation notice screen 391 shown in FIG. 87B is displayed on the first image display device 71.
In FIG. 87 (b), the confrontation notice screen 391 is composed of regions 401L and 401R obtained by dividing the screen into left and right parts. In the right region 401R, an image 402 of the hero character C having a blade (image 403) is displayed. A window 404 obtained by reducing the window 361 shown in FIG. 86A is displayed in the lower right portion of the area 401R. An image 405 of the enemy character D is displayed in the left region 401L. A window 406 obtained by reducing the window 381 shown in FIG. 86B is displayed in the lower left portion of the area 401L. In the center of the confrontation notice screen 391, a VS character image 407 indicating confrontation is displayed.

After the image shown in FIG. 87 (b) is displayed, the attack selection screen 411 shown in FIG. 87 (c) is displayed on the first image display device 71.
On the attack selection screen 411, an image 412 of the hero character C having a blade (image 413) is displayed.

  In the upper right part of the attack selection screen 411, an effect button operation request image 414 for requesting an operation of the effect button 10A is displayed. The effect button operation request image 414 is an image in which an arrow 415 pointing downward, an image 416 simulating the effect button 10A, and an image 417 of the text “Press!” Are displayed side by side.

  When the effect button 10A is operated during the display period of the attack selection screen 411, a hero attack execution screen 421 shown in FIG. 88 (a) is displayed.

  During the display period of the attack selection screen 411, it is during the third vibration period that is the third candidate of the period for vibrating the effect button, but the special figure hold effect scenario of the first special figure hold used in the non-short game state. The production button first vibration flag = 01, the production button second vibration flag = 00, and the production button third vibration flag = 00 due to “0109”, so that the production button production control process of FIG. 47 is performed in steps S1401 → S1402 → The flow proceeds from S1410 to RETURN, and the sub CPU 102a does not perform control for causing the lamp control board 104 to vibrate the effect button. Therefore, the player who operated the effect button 10A does not feel the vibration of the effect button 10A.

  When the effect button 10A is not operated during the display period of the attack selection screen 411, the main character side attack execution screen 421 and the main character side attack success screen 431 shown in FIGS. 88 (a) and 88 (b) are displayed. Instead, a victory confirmation screen 441 shown in FIG. 88 (c) is displayed.

  In the main character side attack execution screen 421 shown in FIG. 88 (a), an image 422 of the character D is displayed, and a continuous image of the main character C that is slashed (attacked) by the blade D (image 424). 423 is displayed.

  After the main character side attack execution screen 421 shown in FIG. 88 (a), a main character side attack success screen 431 shown in FIG. 88 (b) is displayed. On the main character side attack success screen 431, an image 432 of the character D is displayed, and an image 433 of the main character C in which the blade (image 434) is swung down is displayed. An image 435 that is an image of a flash indicating that the attack of the character C was successful is displayed.

  A victory confirmation screen 441 shown in FIG. 88 (c) is displayed after the main character side attack success screen 431 shown in FIG. 88 (b). On the victory confirmation screen 441, an image 443 of the main character C and an image 444 of “WIN” indicating that the character C has won are displayed over the background image 442 of the mushroom cloud.

  After the victory confirmation screen 441 shown in FIG. 88 (c), a reach result display screen 451 shown in FIG. 89 (a) is displayed. On the reach result display screen 451, an image 452 of the character C is displayed, and a medium-use effect symbol 251b of the same type as the effect symbol 251a for the left and the effect symbol 251c for the right is stopped and displayed. In addition, as a result of the reach effect, an image 453 in which the character D is tilted is also displayed. At substantially the same time, the first special figure variable display corresponding image 263-1 disappears from the variable display corresponding display area 713.

In FIG. 89 (b), the predetermined period of time elapses from the state of FIG. 89 (a), the battle effect display period ends, and the big hit game “High probability short-lived first longest” (see FIG. 11). It is a display screen which displays that it transfers.
At this time, the character image 461 “big hit” is displayed in the display area of the first image display device 71. In the present embodiment, the display screen of FIG. 89 (b) is performed after the end of the effect time corresponding to the effect instruction command for the variable display of the effect symbol 251 and is included in the effect time of the jackpot game. .

FIG. 89 (c) is a display screen that displays that a big hit game has been played after a predetermined time has elapsed from the state of FIG. 89 (b).
At this time, a history image 255e, a big hit round image 255f, and a big hit background image 255g for informing the effect that has been a big hit opportunity are displayed.

  As shown in FIGS. 89 (b) and 89 (c), the hold display area (first special figure hold display area 711 and second special figure hold display area 712) and variable display corresponding display area 713 have a gaming state. It is not displayed in the jackpot game state.

Here, a change in the special figure hold display in the case where the hold information based on the winning by the winning to the second starting port 22 is set as the change target when the gaming state is the jackpot gaming state will be described.
FIG. 90 explains the change in the special figure hold display when the hold information based on the winning to the second starting port 22 in “high probability short-lived first length” is set as the change target, and FIG. The change in the special figure hold display when the hold information based on the winning at the second start port 22 in “high probability time short no second long” (see FIG. 11) is set as the change target is described. .

(The special figure reservation effect scenario “1501” for the second special figure hold used during the “high probability short-lived first long”)
The pre-reading special figure hold effect shown in FIG. 42 by winning the second starting port 22 in “High probability short-lived first per length” (see FIG. 11) shown in FIGS. 89 (b) and 89 (c). If it is determined that step S1304-4-2 of the determination process is a special mode, the subsequent processing is step S1304-4-3 → S1304-4-4 → S1304-4-9 → S1304-4-10 → S1304- 4-11 → RETURN. Here, when the special figure reservation effect scenario “1501” is selected in step S1304-4-9, after the jackpot ends, first, as shown in FIG. 91A, a mountain background image 255a1 is displayed. In addition, the left effect symbol 251a, the right effect symbol 251c, and the medium effect symbol 251b are stopped and displayed in a combination corresponding to “high probability short-lived first length per”. In the upper right area of the first image display device 71, an image 290 of the character "short time" is displayed as an effect indicating that the short time gaming state. Further, the variable display corresponding display area 713 is not set, and accordingly, the frame image 723 is not displayed. In addition, the second special figure hold image 262 in the normal mode is displayed on the first display unit 712a of the second special figure hold display area 712.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 90 (b), the left effect symbol 251a, the medium effect symbol 251b, and the right effect symbol 251c are displayed in a variable manner in the center of the display area of the first image display device 71. At the same time, the second special figure reservation image 262 of the normal mode is changed to the second special figure reservation image 262-1 of the special mode 1. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 90C, the second special figure reservation image 262 of the normal mode disappears from the first display unit 712a with the special mode 1 at an early stage of the lottery effect.

(Special figure reservation effect scenario “0502” for the second special figure hold used during the “high probability short time without second long”)
Step S1304-4-2 of the pre-reading special figure hold effect determination process shown in FIG. 42 is a special mode due to winning at the second starting port 22 during “high probability short-time second long” (see FIG. 11). If it is determined that there is, the subsequent processing is a flow of steps S1304-4-3 → S1304-4-4 → S1304-4-8 → S1304-4-10 → S1304-4-11 → RETURN. Here, when the special figure holding effect scenario “0502” is selected in step S1304-4-8, after the jackpot is ended, a mountain background image 255a1 is first displayed as shown in FIG. 91 (a). At the same time, the left effect symbol 251a, the right effect symbol 251c, and the medium effect symbol 251b are stopped and displayed in a combination corresponding to “high probability timeless second per second”. In addition, a variable display corresponding display area 713 is set, and a frame image 723 is displayed accordingly. In addition, the second special figure hold image 262 in the normal mode is displayed on the first display unit 712a of the second special figure hold display area 712.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 91 (b), the left effect symbol 251a, the medium effect symbol 251b, and the right effect symbol 251c are variably displayed in the center of the display area of the first image display device 71. . Further, the second special figure holding image 262 in the normal mode disappears from the first display unit 712a in the normal mode. At the same time, the second special figure variable display corresponding image 264 corresponding to the lottery effect executed in the variable display corresponding display area 713 is temporarily displayed as a normal mode similar to the second special figure reservation image 262. Thereafter, the second special figure variable display corresponding image 264 displayed in the variable display corresponding display area 713 is displayed as the second special figure variable display corresponding image 264 from the normal mode to the special mode 1 as shown in FIG. 90 (c). It changes to -1. And the 2nd special figure variable display corresponding | compatible image 264-1 disappears with the completion | finish of the said lottery effect.
(Special figure hold effect scenario “0110” of the first special figure hold used in the non-time-saving gaming state)
In the special figure reservation effect scenario “0110” of the first special figure reservation used in the non-time-saving gaming state, as shown in FIG. 92 (a) in the Nth special symbol variation table, the same as FIG. 84 (a). Will be performed.

  Next, when the Nth special symbol variation display is completed, the first special figure reservation image 261 of the normal mode is moved to the third display unit 711c, and during the N + 1th special symbol variation display to be executed next, The image shown in 92 (b) is displayed.

  During the (N + 1) th special symbol variation display shown in FIG. 92 (b), it is during the first vibration period that is the first candidate for the period in which the effect button is vibrated, but the first special figure used in the non-short game state. The production button first vibration flag = 00, the production button second vibration flag = 01, and the production button third vibration flag = 00 in the holding special figure holding production scenario “0110”, so the production button production control shown in FIG. The process proceeds from step S1401, S1404, S1405, S1410, and RETURN, and the sub CPU 102a does not control the lamp control board 104 to vibrate the effect button. Therefore, the player who operated the effect button 10A does not feel the vibration of the effect button 10A. Unlike FIG. 84 (a), an image display of a button operation request (a button press operation request or a button continuous operation request) is not performed.

  However, when the effect button 10A is operated by the player during the (N + 1) th special symbol variation display, as shown in FIG. 92 (c), as shown in FIG. In 711c, the first special figure hold image 261-1 of the special mode 1 is switched and displayed. The image shown in FIG. 92C is also displayed when the display period of the effect button pressing operation request image 270 ends after the predetermined time has elapsed.

  Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 85 (a) to 85 (b) are executed. During the display period of the weapon selection screen 302 shown in FIG. 86 (b), The first vibration flag = 00, the production button second vibration flag = 01, the production button by the special figure holding production scenario “0110” of the first special figure holding used in the non-time-saving gaming state. Since the third vibration flag = 00, the effect button effect control process of FIG. 47 is a flow of steps S1401, S1404, S1405, S1406, S1410, and RETURN, and the sub CPU 102a sets the effect button vibration command in the transmission buffer. By doing so, the lamp control board 104 is controlled to vibrate the effect button 10A. Thereby, the player who operated the effect button 10A feels the vibration of the effect button 10A.

  The display period of the attack selection screen 411 shown in FIG. 87 (c) is during the third vibration period which is the third candidate for the period for vibrating the effect button, but the first special figure used in the non-short game state. The production button first vibration flag = 00, the production button second vibration flag = 01, and the production button third vibration flag = 00 in the holding special figure holding production scenario “0110”, so the production button production control shown in FIG. The process proceeds from step S1401, S1404, S1405, S1410, and RETURN, and the sub CPU 102a does not control the lamp control board 104 to vibrate the effect button. Therefore, the player who operated the effect button 10A does not feel the vibration of the effect button 10A.

(Special figure hold effect scenario “0111” of the first special figure hold used in non-time-saving gaming state)
In the special figure reservation effect scenario “0111” of the first special figure reservation used in the non-time-saving gaming state, the effect shown in FIG. 84A is performed in the Nth special symbol variation table.
Next, when the Nth special symbol variation display is completed, the first special figure reservation image 261 of the normal mode is moved to the third display unit 711c, and during the N + 1th special symbol variation display to be executed next, The image shown in 84 (b) is displayed.

  In FIG. 84 (b), the first special figure hold image 261 in the normal mode is displayed on all of the first display unit 711a, the second display unit 711b, and the third display unit 711c of the first special figure hold display area 711. Has been. On the fourth display unit 711d, the first special figure holding image is not displayed. On the upper side of the third display unit 711c, an effect button pressing operation request image 270 for requesting an operation of the effect button 10A is displayed.

  While the (N + 1) th special symbol variation display shown in FIG. 84 (b) is in the first vibration period that is the first candidate for the period for causing the effect button to vibrate, the first special figure used in the non-short game state. The production button first vibration flag = 00, the production button second vibration flag = 01, and the production button third vibration flag = 00 in the holding special figure holding production scenario “0110”, so the production button production control shown in FIG. The process proceeds from step S1401, S1404, S1405, S1410, and RETURN, and the sub CPU 102a does not control the lamp control board 104 to vibrate the effect button.

However, when the effect button 10A is operated by the player during the (N + 1) th special symbol variation display, as shown in FIG. 84 (c), as shown in FIG. In 711c, the first special figure hold image 261-1 of the special mode 1 is switched and displayed. Even when the predetermined time has elapsed and the display period of the effect button pressing operation request image 270 has ended, the image shown in FIG. 84C is displayed.
Thereafter, the same effect as the special figure reservation effect scenario “0110” of the first special figure reservation used in the non-time-saving gaming state is executed.

(Special figure hold effect scenario “0112” of the first special figure hold used in the non-time-saving gaming state)
In the special figure reservation effect scenario “0112” of the first special figure reservation used in the non-time-saving gaming state, the same effect as in FIG. 84A is performed in the Nth special symbol variation table next. Is called.
Next, when the Nth special symbol variation display is completed, the first special figure reservation image 261 of the normal mode is moved to the third display unit 711c, and during the N + 1th special symbol variation display to be executed next, The image shown in 93 (b) is displayed.

  In FIG. 93 (b), the first special figure hold image 261 of the normal mode is displayed on all of the first display unit 711a, the second display unit 711b, and the third display unit 711c of the first special figure hold display area 711. Has been. On the fourth display unit 711d, the first special figure holding image is not displayed. On the upper side of the third display unit 711c, an effect button repeated operation request image 280 requesting operation of the effect button 10A is displayed. The effect button repeated hit operation request image 280 displays a plurality of arrow images 281 pointing downward and an image 282 simulating the effect button 10A side by side, and an image 283 of the characters “continuous hit!” Beside this line. Are displayed side by side. The display of the effect button consecutive hit operation request image 280 is an effect of requesting the player to repeatedly press the effect button 10A.

  While the (N + 1) th special symbol variation display shown in FIG. 93 (b) is in the first vibration period which is the first candidate for the period for vibrating the effect button, the first special figure used in the non-time-saving gaming state. The production button first vibration flag = 00, the production button second vibration flag = 01, and the production button third vibration flag = 00 in the holding special figure holding production scenario “0110”, so the production button production control shown in FIG. The process proceeds from step S1401, S1404, S1405, S1410, and RETURN, and the sub CPU 102a does not control the lamp control board 104 to vibrate the effect button.

However, when the effect button 10A is operated by the player during the (N + 1) th special symbol variation display, as shown in FIG. 93 (c), as shown in FIG. In 711c, the first special figure hold image 261-1 of the special mode 1 is switched and displayed. The image shown in FIG. 93C is also displayed when the display period of the effect button pressing operation request image 270 ends after the predetermined time has elapsed.
Thereafter, the same effect as the special figure reservation effect scenario “0110” of the first special figure reservation used in the non-time-saving gaming state is executed.

(Special figure hold effect scenario “0113” of the first special figure hold used in non-time-saving gaming state)
In the special figure hold effect scenario “0113” of the first special figure hold used in the non-short-time gaming state, the first period during which the effect button is vibrated is displayed during the (N + 1) th special symbol variation display shown in FIG. Although it is during the first vibration period as a candidate, the effect button first vibration flag = 00, the effect button second vibration flag = in accordance with the special figure hold effect scenario “0113” of the first special figure hold used in the non-time-saving gaming state = Since the effect button third vibration flag = 01, the effect button effect control process of FIG. 47 is performed in the flow of steps S1401 → S1404 → S1407 → S1408 → S1410 → RETURN, and the sub CPU 102a is connected to the lamp control board 104. Do not control to vibrate the production buttons. Therefore, the player who operated the effect button 10A does not feel the vibration of the effect button 10A.

  The display period of the weapon selection screen 302 shown in FIG. 86 (b) is during the second vibration period that is the second candidate for the period for vibrating the effect button, but the first special figure used in the non-short game state. The production button first vibration flag = 00, the production button second vibration flag = 00, and the production button third vibration flag = 01 in the special figure hold production scenario “0113” of the hold, so the production button production control of FIG. 47. The process is a flow of steps S1401, S1404, S1407, S1408, S1410, and RETURN, and the sub CPU 102a does not control the lamp control board 104 to vibrate the effect buttons. Therefore, the player who operated the effect button 10A does not feel the vibration of the effect button 10A.

  During the display period of the attack selection screen 411 shown in FIG. 87 (c), it becomes the third vibration period that is the third candidate of the period for vibrating the effect button, and the first special figure hold used in the non-short game state is held. The special button hold effect scenario “0113” results in the effect button first vibration flag = 00, the effect button second vibration flag = 00, and the effect button third vibration flag = 01. Step S1401 → S1404 → S1407 → S1408 → S1409 → S1410 → RETURN The sub CPU 102a controls the lamp control board 104 to vibrate the effect button 10A by setting the effect button vibration command in the transmission buffer. . Thereby, the player who operated the effect button 10A feels the vibration of the effect button 10A.

(Special figure hold effect scenario “0031” of the first special figure hold used in non-short-time gaming state)
The special figure hold effect scenario “0031” of the first special figure hold used in the non-short game state corresponds to the loss, and until FIG. 88 (a), the first special figure hold effect scenario “0031” used in the non-short game state corresponding to the jackpot. The same effect as the special figure reservation effect scenario “0109” of 1 special figure reservation is performed.

  After the main character side attack execution screen 421 shown in FIG. 88A, a main character side attack failure screen 471 shown in FIG. 94A is displayed. On the hero side attack failure screen 471, an image 472 of the character C of the hero who has fallen down is displayed, and further, an image 473 of the character “energy 0” is displayed superimposed on the image 472 of the character C.

  After the main character attack failure screen 471 shown in FIG. 94A, a defeat confirmation screen 481 shown in FIG. 94B is displayed. On the defeat confirmation screen 481, an image 482 of the character D is displayed, and an image 483 of the fallen character C is also displayed. Further, the character D is superimposed on the image 483, and a character image 484 of “LOST” indicating that the character C has been defeated is displayed.

  After the defeat confirmation screen 481 shown in FIG. 94 (b), a reach result display screen 491 shown in FIG. 94 (c) is displayed.

  At this time, the image 492 of the character D is displayed on the reach result display screen 491, and the effect design 251b for the left, the effect design 251c for the right, and another type of effect design 251b for the medium are stopped and displayed. Yes. Further, as a result of the reach effect, an image 493 in which the character C is defeated is also displayed.

(The special figure hold effect scenario “0032” of the first special figure hold used in the non-short-time gaming state)
The special figure hold effect scenario “0032” of the first special figure hold used in the non-short game state corresponds to the loss, and until FIG. 88 (a), the first special figure hold effect scenario “0032” is used in the non-short game state corresponding to the big hit. The same effect as the special figure reservation effect scenario “0110” of 1 special figure hold is performed. Thereafter, the same effect as the special figure reservation effect scenario “0031” of the first special figure reservation used in the non-time-saving gaming state is performed.

(Special figure reservation effect scenario “0033” of the first special figure hold used in non-short-time gaming state)
The special figure hold effect scenario “0033” of the first special figure hold used in the non-short game state corresponds to a loss, and until FIG. 88 (a), the first special figure hold effect scenario “0033” used in the non-short game state corresponding to the jackpot. The same effect as the special figure reservation effect scenario “0111” of 1 special figure reservation is performed. Thereafter, an effect similar to the special figure hold effect scenario “0031” is performed.

(Special figure reservation effect scenario “0034” of the first special figure hold used in non-short-time gaming state)
The special figure hold effect scenario “0033” of the first special figure hold used in the non-short game state corresponds to a loss, and until FIG. 88 (a), the first special figure hold effect scenario “0033” used in the non-short game state corresponding to the jackpot. The same effect as the special figure reservation effect scenario “0111” of 1 special figure reservation is performed. Thereafter, an effect similar to the special figure reservation effect scenario “0031” of the first special figure hold is performed.

(Special figure reservation effect scenario “0035” of the first special figure hold used in non-short-time gaming state)
The special figure hold effect scenario “0035” of the first special figure hold used in the non-short game state corresponds to the loss, and until FIG. 88 (a), the first special figure hold effect scenario “0035” used in the non-short game state corresponding to the jackpot. The same effect as the special figure hold effect scenario “0113” of 1 special figure hold is performed. Thereafter, an effect similar to the special figure hold effect scenario “0031” is performed.

(Special figure reservation effect scenario “1109” of the first special figure hold used in the short-time gaming state)
In the special figure reservation effect scenario “1109” of the first special figure hold used in the short-time game state, as shown in FIG. 95, the effect indicating that the short-time game state is present in the upper right area of the first image display device 71. As shown in FIG. Also in the screen display of the first image display device 71 not shown in FIG. 95, the image 290 of the “short time” character is displayed. The other effects are the same as the special figure hold effect scenario “0109” of the first special figure hold used in the non-time-saving gaming state.

(Special figure reservation effect scenarios “0031” to “0035”, “0110 to“ 0113 ”) of the first special figure hold used in the short-time gaming state)
Special figure holding effect scenarios “0031”, “0032”, “0033”, “0034”, “0035”, “0110”, “0111”, “0112”, “01”, which are used in the short-time gaming state. The special figure on-holding effect scenarios "0031", "0032", "0033", "0034", "0035", "0110", "0110" The difference from “0111”, “0112”, and “0113” is that an image 290 of the “short time” character is displayed in the upper right area of the first image display device 71 as an effect indicating the short time gaming state. Other than this, the special figure hold effect scenarios “031”, “0032”, “0033”, “0034”, “0035” of the first special figure hold that are used in the non-time-saving game state, respectively. , It has been in the same manner as in "0110", "0111", "0112", "0113".

Next, an image displayed when the special figure reservation effect scenario “0001” is selected in the non-time-saving gaming state will be described.
96 and 97, in the non-time-saving gaming state, the hold information based on the winning at the first starting port 21 is set as the change target during the variable display of the special symbol being executed due to the winning at the first starting port 21. FIG. 77 is a first and second explanatory diagram for explaining game contents from a hold display to a losing display according to a special figure hold effect scenario “0001” (see FIGS. 53 and 77) in the case of a game.

(Special figure reservation effect scenario “0001” of the first special figure hold used in the non-time-saving gaming state)
First, during the N-th special symbol variation display, the first start port 21 starts from the state where the first special figure hold number (U1) = 0 from the beginning or the first special figure hold number (U1) = 0. Assuming that a game ball enters the ball, the image shown in FIG. 96 (a) is displayed.

  In FIG. 96 (a), the left effect symbol 251a, the middle effect symbol 251b, and the right effect symbol 251c are variably displayed in the center of the display area of the first image display device 71, and the first image display device. A small fourth display pattern 251d is displayed at the lower left of the display area 71. In the variable display corresponding display area 713, a first special figure variable display compatible image (variable display compatible display image) 263 of a normal mode corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol being executed by winning the first start port 21 is provided. It is displayed.

  When the game ball enters the first starting port 21 from the state shown in FIG. 96 (a) and the special figure hold effect scenario “0001” of the first special figure hold used in the non-short game state is selected. As shown in FIG. 96 (b), the first special figure holding image 261 in the normal mode is displayed on the first display unit 711a at the time of the winning, and then the normal mode first screen displayed on the first display unit 711a is displayed. The 1 special figure reservation image 261 changes to the 1st special figure reservation image 261-1 of the special aspect 1, and it will be in the state shown in FIG.96 (c). Note that in the case of the special figure reservation effect scenario “0001”, one first special figure reservation image that has become the special mode 1 does not change to another display mode thereafter.

  When the Nth special symbol variation display is completed, the first special figure variable display corresponding image 263 disappears from the variable display corresponding display area 713, and the first special figure hold image 261-1 of the special mode 1 is displayed from the first display unit 711a. Disappears and the first special figure variable display corresponding image 263-1 of the special mode 1 corresponding to the first special figure reservation image 261-1 displayed on the first display unit 711a is newly added to the variable display corresponding display area 713. And the (N + 1) th special symbol variation display is executed based on the start opening winning designation command corresponding to the first special figure hold image 261-1 of the special mode 1.

  In the (N + 1) th special symbol variation display, first, as shown in FIG. 97 (a), the first special diagram variable display corresponding image 263-1 is displayed in the variable display corresponding display region 713, and the effect symbols 251a, 251b, 251c are displayed. , 251d are variably displayed. In this example, the first special figure reservation image 261 is not displayed on all of the first display part 711a, the second display part 711b, and the third display part 711c of the first special figure reservation display area 711. . Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 97 (b), the production symbols 251a, 251b, and 251c are stopped and displayed in combination with the loss, and as shown in FIG. 97 (c), the first special figure is displayed from the variable display corresponding display area 713. The variable display corresponding image 263-1 disappears.

Next, an image displayed when the special figure reservation effect scenario “0002” is selected in the non-time-saving gaming state will be described.
In FIG. 98 and FIG. 99, the hold information based on the winning to the first starting port 21 is set as the change target during the variable display of the special symbol being executed by winning the first starting port 21 in the non-short-time gaming state. It is the 1st and 2nd explanatory views for explaining the contents of the game from the hold display to the losing display by the special figure hold production scenario “0002” in the case of the game.

(Special figure reservation effect scenario “0002” of the first special figure hold used in non-time-saving gaming state)
First, during the N-th special symbol variation display, the first start port 21 starts from the state where the first special figure hold number (U1) = 0 from the beginning or the first special figure hold number (U1) = 0. Assuming that a game ball enters the ball, the image shown in FIG. 98 (a) is displayed.

  In FIG. 98 (a), a left effect symbol 251a, a middle effect symbol 251b, and a right effect symbol 251c are variably displayed in the center of the display area of the first image display device 71, and the first image display device. A small fourth display pattern 251d is displayed at the lower left of the display area 71. In the variable display corresponding display area 713, a first special figure variable display compatible image (variable display compatible display image) 263 of a normal mode corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol being executed by winning the first start port 21 is provided. It is displayed.

  From the state shown in FIG. 98 (a), a game ball enters the first start port 21, and the special figure hold effect scenario “0002” of the first special figure hold used in the non-short-time game state (FIG. 53 and FIG. 78) is selected, as shown in FIG. 98 (b), the first special figure holding image 261 of the normal mode is displayed on the first display unit 711a at the time of winning, and thereafter the first display unit 711a. The first special figure reservation image 261 in the normal mode displayed on the screen does not change until it disappears.

  When the Nth special symbol variation display is completed, the first special figure variable display corresponding image 263 disappears from the variable display corresponding display area 713, and as shown in FIG. 98 (c), the first display unit 711a displays the normal mode. The first special figure holding image 261 disappears, and the first special figure variable display corresponding image 263 of the normal mode corresponding to the first special figure holding image 261 displayed on the first display unit 711a is the variable display corresponding display area 713. And the (N + 1) th special symbol variation display is executed based on the start opening winning designation command corresponding to the first special figure holding image 261-1 of the special mode 1. Thereafter, the first special figure variable display corresponding image 263 in the normal mode displayed in the variable display corresponding display area 713 is changed to the first special figure variable display corresponding image 263-1 in the special mode 1, and FIG. ).

  In the (N + 1) th special symbol variation display, as shown in FIG. 99 (a), the effect symbols 251a, 251b, 251c, and 251d are variably displayed. In this example, the first special figure hold image is not displayed on all of the first display unit 711a, the second display unit 711b, and the third display unit 711c of the first special figure hold display area 711. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 99 (b), the production symbols 251a, 251b, 251c are stopped and displayed in combination with the loss, and as shown in FIG. 99 (c), the first special figure is displayed from the variable display corresponding display area 713. The variable display corresponding image 263-1 disappears.

Next, an image displayed when the special figure reservation effect scenario “0501” is selected in the short-time gaming state will be described.
In FIG. 100 and FIG. 101, the hold information based on the winning at the first starting port 21 is set as the change target during the variable display of the special symbol being executed by the winning at the first starting port 21 in the short-time gaming state. FIG. 61 is a first and second explanatory diagram for explaining game contents from a holding display to a losing display according to a special figure holding effect scenario “1001” (see FIG. 61 and FIG. 81).

(Special figure reservation effect scenario “1001” of the first special figure hold used in the short-time gaming state)
First, during the N-th special symbol variation display, the first start port 21 starts from the state where the first special figure hold number (U1) = 0 from the beginning or the first special figure hold number (U1) = 0. Assuming that a game ball enters the ball, the image shown in FIG. 100 (a) is displayed.

  In FIG. 100 (a), the left effect symbol 251a, the medium effect symbol 251b, and the right effect symbol 251c are variably displayed in the center of the display area of the first image display device 71, and the first image display device. A small fourth display pattern 251d is displayed at the lower left of the display area 71. However, the variable display corresponding display area 713 in the non-short game state shown in FIG. 96 is not displayed in the short-time game state. In addition, in the display area on the upper right side of the first image display device 71, an image 290 of “hour short” indicating that the state is a short time gaming state is displayed.

  When a game ball enters the first starting port 21 from the state shown in FIG. 100 (a) and the special figure hold effect scenario “1001” of the first special figure hold used in the short-time game state is selected, As shown in FIG. 100 (b), the first special figure holding image 261 in the normal mode is displayed on the first display unit 711a at the time of the winning, and thereafter the first normal mode image displayed on the first display unit 711a. The special figure reservation image 261 changes to the first special figure reservation image 261-1 of the special mode 1, and the state shown in FIG. Note that one first special figure reservation image 261-1 in which the special figure reservation effect scenario “1001” is selected does not change to another display mode thereafter.

  When the Nth special symbol variation display ends, the first special figure hold image 261-1 of the special mode 1 disappears from the first display unit 711a, and corresponds to the first special figure hold image 261-1 of the special mode 1. Based on the start opening winning designation command, the (N + 1) th special symbol variation display is executed.

  In the (N + 1) th special symbol variation display, as shown in FIG. 101 (a), the effect symbols 251a, 251b, 251c, and 251d are variably displayed. Further, in this example, the first special figure hold image is not displayed on all of the first display unit 711a, the second display unit 711b, and the third display unit 711c of the first special figure hold display area 711. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 101 (b), the effect symbols 251a, 251b, and 251c are stopped and displayed in combination with the loss.

Next, an image displayed when the special figure reservation effect scenario “1501” is selected in the short-time gaming state will be described.
FIG. 102 shows a special case when the hold information based on the winning at the second starting port 22 is set as the change target during the variable display of the special symbol being executed by the winning at the second starting port 22 in the short-time gaming state. FIG. 82 is a first explanatory diagram for describing game contents from a holding display to a losing display according to a figure holding effect scenario “1501” (see FIG. 65, FIG. 82).

(Special figure reservation effect scenario “1501” for the first special figure hold used in the short-time gaming state)
First, during the N-th special symbol variation display, the first special figure hold number (U1) = 0 from the beginning or the first special figure hold number (U1) = 0 from the state of the second start port 22 Assuming that a game ball enters the ball, the image shown in FIG. 100 (a) is displayed.

  In FIG. 102 (a), the left effect symbol 251a, the middle effect symbol 251b, and the right effect symbol 251c are variably displayed in the center of the display area of the first image display device 71, and the first image display device. A small fourth display pattern 251d is displayed at the lower left of the display area 71. However, the variable display corresponding display area 713 in the non-short game state shown in FIG. 96 is not displayed in the short-time game state. In addition, in the display area on the upper right side of the first image display device 71, an image 290 of “hour short” indicating that the state is a short time gaming state is displayed.

  When a game ball enters the second starting port 22 from the state shown in FIG. 102 (a) and the special figure hold effect scenario “1501” for the first special figure hold used in the short-time game state is selected, As shown in FIG. 102 (b), the second special figure hold image 262 of the normal mode is displayed on the first display unit 712a of the second special figure hold display area 712 at the time of the winning, and then the first display unit 712a. The second special figure hold image 262 in the normal mode displayed on the screen changes to the second special figure hold image 262-1 in the special mode 1, and the state shown in FIG. Note that one first special figure reservation image 261 for which the special figure reservation effect scenario “1501” is selected does not change to another display mode thereafter.

When the Nth special symbol variation display ends, the second special figure hold image 262-1 of the special mode 1 disappears from the first display unit 712a, and corresponds to the first special figure hold image 261-1 of the special mode 1. Based on the start opening winning designation command, the (N + 1) th special symbol variation display similar to the special figure holding effect scenario “1001” shown in FIG. 101A is executed.
In the above description, as a special figure hold effect scenario when changing the variable display compatible image in the variable display compatible display area 713, the normal hold image corresponding to the hold information (first special figure hold image, second map). After the special figure hold image) is displayed in the hold display area (the first special figure hold display area 711 and the second special figure hold display area 712), the normal corresponding to the hold information in the first special figure variable display corresponding image 263 is displayed. The variable display corresponding image (first special figure variable display compatible image, second special figure variable display compatible image) is temporarily displayed and then the variable display compatible image is changed to the special mode 1. Not limited to this, in the present embodiment, as a special figure holding effect scenario when changing the variable display compatible image in the variable display compatible display area 713, for example, in the hold display area, the hold corresponding to the hold information The image is changed from the normal mode to the special mode 2, and after that, in the variable display corresponding display area 713, the variable display corresponding image of the special mode 2 corresponding to the hold information is temporarily displayed and then the variable display compatible image is changed to the special mode 6. Various executions such as changing are possible.

  When the Nth special symbol variation display is completed, the first special figure variable display corresponding image 263 disappears from the variable display corresponding display area 713, and as shown in FIG. 98 (c), the first display unit 711a displays the normal mode. The first special figure holding image 261 disappears, and the first special figure variable display corresponding image 263 of the normal mode corresponding to the first special figure holding image 261 displayed on the first display unit 711a is the variable display corresponding display area 713. And the (N + 1) th special symbol variation display is executed based on the start opening winning designation command corresponding to the first special figure holding image 261-1 of the special mode 1. Thereafter, the first special figure variable display corresponding image 263 in the normal mode displayed in the variable display corresponding display area 713 is changed to the first special figure variable display corresponding image 263-1 in the special mode 1, and FIG. ).

  In the (N + 1) th special symbol variation display, as shown in FIG. 99 (a), the effect symbols 251a, 251b, 251c, and 251d are variably displayed. In this example, the first special figure hold image is not displayed on all of the first display unit 711a, the second display unit 711b, and the third display unit 711c of the first special figure hold display area 711. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 99 (b), the production symbols 251a, 251b, 251c are stopped and displayed in combination with the loss, and as shown in FIG. 99 (c), the first special figure is displayed from the variable display corresponding display area 713. The variable display corresponding image 263-1 disappears.

Next, an image displayed when the special figure reservation effect scenario “0039” is selected in the non-time-saving gaming state will be described.
In FIGS. 103 and 104, the hold information based on the winning at the first starting port 21 is set as the change target during the variable display of the special symbol being executed by the winning at the first starting port 21 in the non-time-saving gaming state. FIG. 52 is a first and second explanatory diagram for explaining the game content during the hold display according to the special figure hold effect scenario “0039” (see FIGS. 53 and 83) when

(The special figure hold production scenario “0039” of the first special figure hold used in the non-time-saving game state)
First, during the N-th special symbol variation display, the first start port 21 from the state where the first special figure hold number (U1) = 3 from the beginning or the first special figure hold number (U1) = 2. Assuming that the first special figure holding number (U1) = 3 is reached when the game ball enters the ball, the game ball enters the first start port 21 from this state and is used in the non-time-saving game state. It is assumed that the special figure reservation effect scenario “0039” of the first special figure hold is selected and the image shown in FIG. 103 (a) is displayed.

  In FIG. 103 (a), the left effect symbol 251a, the medium effect symbol 251b, and the right effect symbol 251c are displayed in a variable manner at the center of the display area of the first image display device 71. A small fourth display pattern 251d is displayed at the lower left of the display area 71. The first special figure hold image 261 in the normal mode is displayed on the first display part 711a, the second display part 711b, the third display part 711c, and the fourth display part 711d in the first special figure hold display area 711. . In the variable display corresponding display area 713, a first special figure variable display compatible image (variable display compatible display image) 263 of a normal mode corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol being executed by winning the first start port 21 is provided. It is displayed.

  When the variation display of the special symbol is finished and the (N + 1) th special symbol variation display is executed from the state shown in FIG. 103 (a), the first special diagram hold image 261 is entirely shifted, As shown in FIG. 103 (b), the first special figure holding image 261 in the normal mode displayed on the four display section 711d moves to the third display section 711c, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 103 (c). In this way, the first special figure reservation image 261-0 changes to a special mode. When the N + 2nd special symbol variation display is executed, the first special figure reservation image 261-0 in the special mode displayed on the third display unit 711c moves to the second display unit 711b, and the N + 3th special symbol is displayed. When the variable display is executed, as shown in FIG. 104 (a), the first special figure holding image 261-0 in the special mode displayed on the second display unit 711b moves to the first display unit 711a. Thereafter, the first special figure hold image 261-0 in the special mode of the first display unit 711a changes to the first special figure hold image 261-1 in the special mode 1 as shown in FIG. 104 (b). When the N + 3th special symbol variation display is completed, the first special figure variable display corresponding image 263 disappears from the variable display corresponding display area 713, and the first special figure reserved image 261-1 of the special mode 1 is displayed from the first display unit 711a. 104 disappears and the first special figure variable display corresponding image 263-1 of the special mode 1 corresponding to the first special figure reservation image 261-1 displayed on the first display unit 711a is shown in FIG. 104 (c). As described above, the N + 4th special symbol variation display is executed based on the start opening prize designation command newly displayed in the variable display corresponding display area 713 and corresponding to the first special figure reservation image 261-1 of the special mode 1. The Thereafter, the effect symbols 251a, 251b, and 251c are stopped and displayed in combination with the loss, and the first special figure variable display corresponding image 263-1 disappears from the variable display corresponding display area 713.

  In the present embodiment, during the non-time-saving gaming state, the holding information in which the first special figure holding number (U1) = 1 to 4 due to the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 21 is as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 56, the special figure which displays the first special figure variable display correspondence image of the special mode in the variable display correspondence display area 713 in any condition of the first special figure reservation number (U1) = 1 to 4. A holding effect scenario (for example, a special figure holding effect scenario “0001”, “0003”, “0006”) may be selected. However, during the short-time gaming state, the special figure holding effect scenario for displaying the first special figure variable display compatible image in the special mode in the variable display compatible display area 713 is selected as shown in FIGS. 61 to 64. Due to the winning of the game ball to the first start opening 21, the first special figure hold number (U1) is limited to the hold information of 2 to 4, and the first special figure hold number (U1) = 1. In the case of the hold information, the special figure holding effect scenario for displaying the first special figure variable display compatible image in the special display in the variable display compatible display area 713 is not selected.

  Further, in the present embodiment, during the non-time-saving gaming state, the holding information in which the second special figure holding number (U2) = 1 to 4 due to the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 22 is as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 50, the special figure which displays the second special figure variable display correspondence image of the special mode in the variable display correspondence display area 713 in any condition of the second special figure reservation number (U2) = 1 to 4. A holding effect scenario (for example, a special figure holding effect scenario “0501”, “0503”, “0506”) may be selected. However, during the short-time gaming state, the special figure holding effect scenario for displaying the second special figure variable display corresponding image in the special display in the variable display corresponding display area 713 is selected as shown in FIGS. Due to the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 22, the number of the second special figure reservation (U2) is limited to 2-4, and the second special figure reservation number (U2) = 1. In the case of the hold information, the special figure hold effect scenario for displaying the second special figure hold image in a special mode is not selected.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a special figure hold effect scenario (for example, special figure hold effect scenarios “0039”, “0155”, “0160”) that displays the first special figure hold image in a special mode in the first special figure hold display area. ”,“ 1039 ”,“ 1155 ”,“ 1160 ”), as shown in FIGS. 53 to 56 and FIGS. 61 to 64, The number of first special figure hold (U1) = 2 to 4 is limited to the hold information, and in the case of hold information where the first special figure hold number (U1) = 1, the first special figure in a special mode. The special figure hold production scenario for displaying the hold image is not selected.

In the present embodiment, a special figure hold effect scenario (for example, special figure hold effect scenarios “0539”, “0655”, “0660”) that displays the second special figure hold image in a special mode in the second special figure hold display area. ”,“ 1539 ”,“ 1655 ”,“ 1660 ”), as shown in FIG. 53 to FIG. 56 and FIG. 61 to FIG. The number of second special figure hold (U2) = 2 to 4 is limited to the hold information, and in the case of hold information where the second special figure hold number (U2) = 1, the second special figure is displayed in a special manner. The special figure hold production scenario for displaying the hold image is not selected.
Further, in the present embodiment, in the short-time gaming state and the non-short-time gaming state, when the game ball is won at the start ports 21 and 22 without storing the holding information and not displaying the special symbol variation, Although it is time, the hold information is held, and the image corresponding to the hold information (first special figure hold image, first special figure hold display area 711, first special figure hold display area 712) is displayed. (Second special figure holding image) is displayed for a short time, and then images corresponding to the holding information (first special figure variable display corresponding image, second special figure variable display corresponding image) are displayed in the variable display corresponding display area 713. It is like that.

  The configuration and operation of the embodiment of the present invention described above will be described together. The gaming machine 1 varies depending on the production means based on the fact that the start condition is satisfied (the game ball wins in the special drawing start winning area). After executing the display (variable display of the design symbol), the variable display result (variable display result) is displayed, and when the variable display result is a specific variable display result, control is made to a special gaming state advantageous to the player. To do.

  The first special symbol reservation storage area and the second special symbol reservation storage area of the main RAM 101c determine whether or not to make the specific variation display result for the variation display that has satisfied the start condition but has not yet started. This is a storage device for storing information to be stored as storage information within a predetermined upper limit storage number.

  The main CPU 101a, the special symbol determination table for winning winning stored in the main ROM 101b, the special symbol determining table for small win winning, the special symbol determining table for lose, the main RAM 101c, the variable display based on the hold information is the specified A pre-determining means for determining whether or not the fluctuation display result is,

The effect control board 102 is an effect control means for controlling the effect.
The gaming machine 1 can generate a short-time gaming state in which the number of executions per unit time of the variable display is increased from the non-short-time gaming state in a period from the end of the special gaming state to a lapse of a predetermined period. It has become.

  The sub-CPU 102a, the special figure hold image final mode determination table stored in the sub ROM 102b, and the sub RAM 102c make the hold information as either a change target or a non-change target based on the result of the determination by the prior determination means. This is a hold information setting means for setting.

  The production control means displays a hold display corresponding to each of the hold information stored in the hold storage means (for example, the first special figure hold images 261, 261-1 shown in FIGS. 77 and 78, FIG. 79 and Hold display control means for performing control to display the second special figure hold image 262, 262-1) shown in FIG. 80, and variable display corresponding to the dynamic display being executed by the hold information read from the hold storage means Corresponding display (for example, first special figure variable display corresponding image 263, 263-1 shown in FIGS. 77 and 78, second special figure variable display corresponding image 264, 264-1 shown in FIGS. 79 and 80) is displayed. And a variable display corresponding display control means for performing control.

  As shown in FIGS. 53 to 68, the effect control means displays the hold display and the variable display corresponding display during the non-short game state, and displays the hold display during the short time game state. When the change information corresponding to the change information is set as the change target in the non-time-saving gaming state without displaying the variable display correspondence display and the start condition is satisfied in a state where there is no hold information in the hold storage unit The display mode corresponding to the hold information is the first mode (for example, the first special figure hold image 261 in the normal mode shown in FIGS. 77 and 78, the first special figure variable display corresponding image 263 in the normal mode, FIG. 79). 80 and the second special figure holding image 262 in the normal mode and the second special figure variable display corresponding image 264 in the normal mode shown in FIG. 80, a second mode (for example, FIG. 77) having a display mode different from the first mode. And shown in FIG. 1st special figure reservation image 261-1 of another aspect 1, 1st special figure variable display corresponding image 263-1 of special aspect 1, 2nd special figure reservation image 262-1 of special aspect 1 shown in FIG. 79 and FIG. , The control to change to the second special figure variable display corresponding image 264-1) of the special mode 1 is performed in the hold display or the variable display corresponding display, and the hold information is stored in the hold storage means during the short-time gaming state. When the hold information based on the establishment of the start condition in the absence of the change is set as the change target, the display mode corresponding to the hold information is changed from the first mode to the second mode. , In the hold display.

  As shown in FIGS. 90 and 91, the production control means sets, as the change target, hold information based on the fact that the start condition is established in the special game state when there is no hold information in the hold storage means. If the control is performed, the control for changing the display mode corresponding to the hold information from the first mode to the second mode different from the first mode is performed after the special gaming state. Or, it is performed by the display corresponding to the variation display.

  The control by the hold display control means is configured such that the display mode of the hold display is changed from the first mode (for example, the first special figure hold image 261 in the normal mode shown in FIG. 103) to the first mode and the display mode. To a different second mode (for example, the first special figure holding image 261-0 of the special mode shown in FIG. 103), and from the second mode to the first mode and the second mode. The first control (for example, the special figure holding effect scenario “0039”) to be changed to the third aspect (for example, the first special figure holding image 261-1 having the special aspect shown in FIG. 104) having a different display form, And a second control for changing the display mode of the hold display from the first mode to the third mode (for example, the special figure hold effect scenario “0001”).

  When the hold information based on the establishment of the start condition in the state where the hold information is held in the hold storage means is set as the change target, the effect control means includes the first control corresponding to the hold information and When the hold information based on the fact that the start condition is established in a state where there is no hold information in the hold storage means is set as the change target, the second control can be executed, and the change information corresponding to the hold information The first control cannot be executed.

  The first start port 21 and the second start port 22 can receive a game ball flowing down the game area and can change into a first state that is disadvantageous to the player and a second state that is advantageous to the player. It is a winning area.

The first special symbol display device 11 and the second special symbol display device 12 perform variable display of a plurality of types of special symbols that can be distinguished from each other on the basis of the fact that a game ball has won the special figure start winning area. Special figure variable display means for deriving and displaying the result is provided.
The main control board 101 is a special game control means for controlling the special game state which is more advantageous than the non-special game state for the player when a special display result predetermined in the special figure variable display means is derived. ing.

  The first special symbol reservation storage area and the second special symbol reservation storage area of the main RAM 101c are the special display result for the variable display of special symbols that have been won in the special figure start winning area but have not yet started. This is a storage device for storing information for determining whether or not to perform storage as storage information within a range of a predetermined upper limit storage number.

  When the main CPU 101a, the special symbol determination table for winning winning stored in the main ROM 101b, the special symbol determining table for small win winning, the special symbol determining table for lose, and the main RAM 101c start variable display of the special symbols In addition, based on the hold information read from the hold storage means, a start time determining means for determining whether or not the display result of variable display of the special symbol is the special display result is used.

  The main CPU 101a, the special symbol determination table for winning winning stored in the main ROM 101b, the special symbol determining table for small win winning, the special symbol determining table for lose, and the main RAM 101c are determined by the start time determining means. In addition, it is a pre-determination means for determining whether or not the variable display of the special symbol based on the hold information generated based on the winning of the game ball in the special figure start winning area is the special display result. .

  The effect control board 102, the lamp control board 104, and the image control board 105 become prefetch effect control means for controlling the prefetch effect that suggests the result of the determination by the prior determination means when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Yes.

The sub-CPU 102a, the special figure hold image final mode determination table stored in the sub ROM 102b, and the sub RAM 102c make the hold information as either a change target or a non-change target based on the result of the determination by the prior determination means. This is a hold information setting means for setting.
The first winning gate 25 and the second winning gate 26 are normal start areas in which game balls flowing down the game area can enter.

The normal symbol display device 13 performs variable display of a plurality of types of normal symbols that can be distinguished from each other based on the fact that a game ball enters (wins) in the normal diagram start area, and derives and displays a display result. It is a figure variable display means.
The main control board 101 controls the special figure starting area to the auxiliary gaming state in which the special figure starting area changes from the first state to the second state when a predetermined display result is derived on the general variable display means. It is an auxiliary game control means.

  In the gaming machine 1, the number of executions per unit time of the special symbol variable display by the special symbol variable display means and the normal diagram variable during the period from the end of the special gaming state to the elapse of a predetermined period. It is possible to generate a time-short game state in which the number of executions per unit time of the variable display of the normal symbol by the display means is increased as compared to the non-time-short game state.

  The production control means displays a hold display corresponding to each of the hold information stored in the hold storage means (for example, the first special figure hold images 261, 261-1 shown in FIGS. 77 and 78, FIG. 79 and Corresponding to hold display control means for performing control to display the second special figure hold image 262, 262-1) shown in FIG. 80, and variable display of the special symbol being executed by the hold information read from the hold storage means Variable display corresponding display (for example, first special figure variable display corresponding image 263, 263-1 shown in FIGS. 77 and 78, second special figure variable display corresponding image 264, 264-1 shown in FIGS. 79 and 80) Variable display corresponding display control means for performing control to display the display.

  As shown in FIGS. 53 to 68, the effect control means displays the hold display and the variable display corresponding display during the non-short game state, and displays the hold display during the short time game state. In the non-time-saving gaming state without displaying the variable display corresponding display, the holding information based on the fact that the game ball has won the special figure start winning area without the holding information in the holding storage means is the change When set as the target, the display mode corresponding to the hold information is the first mode (for example, the first special figure hold image 261 in the normal mode shown in FIGS. 77 and 78, the first special figure variable display in the normal mode). From the corresponding image 263, the second special figure holding image 262 in the normal mode shown in FIG. 79 and FIG. 80, and the second special figure variable display corresponding image 264 in the normal mode, the second different in display mode from the first mode. Embodiment (eg, FIG. 77) 78, the first special figure holding image 261-1 of the special aspect 1 shown in FIG. 78, the first special figure variable display corresponding image 263-1 of the special aspect 1, and the second special figure of the special aspect 1 shown in FIGS. 79 and 80. Control to change to the hold image 262-1 and the second special figure variable display compatible image 264-1 of the special mode 1 is performed in the hold display or the variable display compatible display, and the hold storage is performed during the time-saving gaming state. When holding information based on a game ball winning in the special figure start winning area is set as the change target in a state where there is no holding information in the means, the display mode corresponding to the holding information is changed from the first mode. The control to change to the second mode is performed in the hold display.

  As shown in FIGS. 90 and 91, the production control means holds information based on the fact that a game ball has won a prize in the special drawing start winning area in the special game state without any hold information in the hold storage means. Is set as the change target, control for changing the display mode corresponding to the hold information from the first mode to the second mode different from the first mode is changed to the special gaming state. Later, the hold display or the variable display corresponding display is performed.

  In the special game state, the production control means is configured such that on-hold information based on a game ball winning in the special figure start winning area is set as the change target in a state where there is no on-hold information in the on-hold storage means. The control for changing the display mode corresponding to the hold information from the first mode to the second mode different from the first mode is performed after the special gaming state by the hold display or the variable Use display-compatible display.

  The effect button 10A can be changed from a normal mode (a state where the effect button 10A does not vibrate) to a special mode (a state where the effect button 10A vibrates by the effect button vibration device 10c) different from the normal mode.

  The effect control board 102, the lamp control board 104, and the image control board 105 become prefetch effect control means for controlling the prefetch effect that suggests the result of the determination by the prior determination means when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Yes.

  In the prefetching effect controlled by the prefetching effect control means, a first prefetching effect (non-requirement) that requests the player to operate the operation means and then suggests the result of the judgment by the prior judgment means. Special figure hold effect scenarios “0031”, “0033”, “0034”, “0035”, “0109”, “0111” for the first special figure hold and the second special figure hold used in the short time game state and the short time game state , “0112”, “0113”, “0031”, “0533”, “0534”, “0535”, “0609”, “0611”, “0612”, “0613”, “1031”, “1033”, “1033” 1034 ”,“ 1035 ”,“ 1109 ”,“ 1111 ”,“ 1112 ”,“ 1113 ”,“ 1533 ”,“ 1534 ”,“ 1535 ”,“ 1609 ”,“ 1611 ”,“ 1 ” 12 ”and“ 1613 ”) and a second pre-reading effect (non-short game state) that suggests the result of the determination by the prior determination means without requiring the player to operate the operation means. And the special figure holding effect scenarios “0032”, “0110”, “0532”, “0610”, “1032”, “1110”, “1532”, “1610” used in the short-time gaming state. A special figure hold effect scenario other than the first prefetch effect included).

  In the period from the end of the special gaming state to the elapse of a predetermined period, the number of executions per unit time of the special symbol variable display by the special figure variable display means, and the normal by the normal figure variable display means It is possible to generate a short-time game state in which the number of executions per unit time of variable display of symbols is increased as compared to a non-short-time game state.

  The pre-reading effect control means can control the first pre-reading effect in both the short-time gaming state and the non-short-time gaming state, and the non-short-time gaming state is more than the short-time gaming state. The ratio of performing the control of the first prefetch effect is high.

  The first look-ahead effect executed by the look-ahead effect control means includes a first operation mode effect (non-short game state and time-short game state) that requires the player to operate the operation means in the first operation mode. Special figure reservation effect scenarios “0031”, “0033”, “0035”, “0109”, “0111”, “0113”, “0531”, “0533”, “0535”, “0609”, “0611”, “0613”, “1031”, “1033”, “1035”, “1109”, “1111”, “1113”, “1531”, “1533”, “1535”, “1609” ”,“ 1611 ”,“ 1613 ”) and a second operation mode that requires the player to operate the operation means in a second operation mode that is more difficult to operate than the first operation mode. Production effects (first special figure hold special scenario reservation scenarios used in the non-short-time game state and the short-time game state “0034”, “0112”, “0534”, “0612”, “1034”, “1112”, “ 1534 ”and“ 1612 ”).

  The pre-reading effect control means has a higher ratio of controlling the second operation mode in the non-short-time gaming state than in the short-time gaming state, and the first operation in the non-short-time gaming state than in the short-time gaming state. The ratio of performing the aspect control is low.

  According to the first embodiment of the present invention described above, the hold display and the variable display corresponding display are displayed during the non-short game state, and the hold display is displayed during the short game state. In the non-short-time gaming state without displaying the variable display corresponding display, the start condition is satisfied (the game ball wins in the special figure start winning area) with no holding information in the holding storage means. When the hold information based is set as the change target, the control for changing the display mode corresponding to the hold information from the first mode to the second mode having a different display mode from the first mode is performed. When the hold information is set as the change target in the display or the variable display corresponding display, and the start condition is satisfied in the short-time gaming state in a state where there is no hold information in the hold storage means Since the control for changing the display mode corresponding to the hold information from the first mode to the second mode is performed in the hold display, when the start condition is satisfied without the hold information in the hold storage unit An effect of changing the hold display corresponding to the hold information based on the winning from the normal mode to the special mode can be selected, and the effect of the variable information on the special display variable display can be sufficiently enhanced.

  Also, according to the first embodiment of the present invention, the start condition is satisfied in the state where the average display time of the special symbol variation display is short in the short-time gaming state where there is no holding information in the holding storage means. When the based hold information is set as the change target, the control for changing the display mode corresponding to the hold information from the first mode to the second mode is performed in the hold mode, and the variable display is supported. Since it is not performed in the display, it is possible to prevent confusion in recognition of the player's pending change.

  Further, according to the first embodiment of the present invention, in the special game state in which the player's interest in satisfying the start condition is reduced, the start condition is set without holding information in the holding storage means. Control that changes the display mode corresponding to the hold information from the first mode to the second mode different from the first mode when the hold information based on establishment is set as the change target Since the line is displayed in the hold display or the variable display corresponding display after the special gaming state, an efficient presentation can be performed.

  Further, according to the first embodiment of the present invention, the player is requested to operate the operation means in both the short-time gaming state and the non-short-time gaming state, and thereafter, the prior determination means It is possible to control the first look-ahead effect that suggests the result of the determination, and the ratio of performing the control of the first look-ahead effect in the non-short game state is higher than that in the short-time game state. Therefore, in the gaming machine capable of controlling the short-time gaming state and the non-short-time state, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable in the operation corresponding to the pre-reading notice pattern.

  Further, according to the first embodiment of the present invention, the non-short-time gaming state has a higher ratio of performing the control of the second operation mode with a higher operation difficulty than the short-time gaming state, and the non-short-time gaming state is higher than the short-time gaming state. In the gaming machine capable of controlling the short-time gaming state and the non-short-time state, since the ratio of performing the control of the first operation mode having a smaller number of operations is lower in the non-time-short gaming state, On the other hand, the operation corresponding to the pre-reading notice pattern can be made less discomfort.

  In the first embodiment of the present invention, the special mode is a display mode indicating that the display mode is changed to any one of the special mode 1 to the special mode 6, but the special mode is The display mode is not determined to change to any one of the special modes 1 to 6, but may be a display mode that suggests that the display mode changes to any of the special modes 1 to 6. .

(First modification of the first embodiment)
FIG. 105 is an explanatory diagram showing a first modification of the first embodiment shown in FIGS. 1 to 104.
First, an image displayed when the special figure hold effect scenario “0109” or “0031” of the first special figure hold used in the non-time-saving gaming state is selected will be described.

(Special figure hold effect scenario “0109”, “0031” for the first special figure hold used in non-short-time gaming state)
In the special figure hold effect scenarios “0109” and “0031” of the first special figure hold used in the non-short-time gaming state, first, in the Nth special symbol variation display, the same figure 105 (FIG. The image shown in a) is displayed.
During the (N + 1) th special symbol variation display, the image shown in FIG. 105 (b) similar to FIG. 84 (b) is displayed.

  When the effect button 10A is operated by the player during the display period of the effect button pressing operation request image 270 shown in FIG. 105 (b), as shown in FIG. 105 (c), a button operation request is made as a button effect. Although the image display disappears, the first special figure holding image 261 in the normal mode is displayed as it is on the third display unit 711c.

  In addition, during the (N + 1) th special symbol variation display, it is during the first vibration period that is the first candidate for the period for vibrating the effect button, and the sub CPU 102a sets the effect button vibration command in the transmission buffer. The control board 104 is controlled to vibrate the effect button 10A. As a result, the player who operates the effect button 10A feels the vibration of the effect button 10A.

  When the (N + 1) th special symbol variation display is completed, the first special figure hold image 261 of the normal mode moves to the second display unit 711b. During the N + 2th special symbol fluctuation display thereafter, the first special figure hold image 261 in the normal mode continues to be displayed on the second display unit 711b. When the (N + 2) th special symbol variation display is completed, the first special figure hold image 261 in the normal mode moves to the first display unit 711a. During the N + 3th special symbol variation display thereafter, the first special figure hold image 261 in the normal mode continues to be displayed on the first display unit 711a. When the (N + 3) th special symbol variation display is completed, the first special figure reservation image 261 of the first display unit 711a disappears. Further, the first special figure variable display corresponding image 263 displayed in the variable display corresponding display area 713 disappears, and the first special figure variable image corresponding to the first special figure reservation image 261 displayed in the first display unit 711a is displayed. One special figure variable display corresponding image 263 is newly displayed in the variable display corresponding display area 713, and based on the start opening winning designation command corresponding to the first special figure reservation image 261-1 of the special mode 1, the N + 4th special display Symbol variation display is executed. Further, in the variable display corresponding display area 713, until the state in which the medium-type effect design 251b of the same type as the effect design 251a for the left and the effect design 251c for the right shown in FIG. The first special figure variable display corresponding image 263 is still displayed.

The effects of the special figure hold effect scenarios “0109” and “0031” of the first special figure hold used in the non-time-saving game state other than this are the same as those in the first embodiment shown in FIGS. Yes.
In the first special figure hold special scenario reservation effect scenarios “0109” and “0031” used in the non-time-saving gaming state of this modification, the first special figure hold image is not changed as the button effect, but the effect button Is controlled to vibrate.

In such a first modified example as well, it is possible to produce an effect that maintains the player's expectation as in the first embodiment shown in FIGS.
As a second modification, as a special mode different from the normal mode of the effect button 10A, instead of the effect button 10A vibrating, the effect button 10A protrudes, the effect button 10A emits light, and air blows out from the effect button 10A . Various applications such as a sound coming out from the effect button 10A are possible.

  As a third modified example, for example, (the special figure hold production scenario “0031”, “0109”, “0531” of the first special figure hold and the second special figure hold used in the non-short-time game state and the short-time game state) , “0609”, “1031”, “1109”, “1531”, “1609”) as a special mode of the effect button 10A during the pre-reading notice shown in FIG. ”And the second effect (the first special figure hold and the second special figure hold used in the non-short-time game state and the short-time game state, the special figure hold effect scenarios“ 0032 ”,“ 0033 ”,“ 0034 ”,“ “0110”, “0111”, “0112” “0532”, “0533”, “0534”, “0610”, “0611”, “0612”, “1032”, “1033”, “1034”, (1110), “1111”, “1112” “1532”, “1533”, “1534”, “1610”, “1611”, “1612”)) in the first half of the variable display shown in FIG. FIG. 87 in the third effect (the effect of the special figure hold effect scenario of the first special figure hold used in the non-short-time game state and the short-time game state) adopting “the effect button 10A emits light” as the special mode of the effect button 10A. The type of the special mode may be changed according to the timing of changing to the special mode, such as adopting “the project button 10A protrudes” as the special mode of the latter half of the variable display shown in (c).

  As a fourth modification example, as a second operation mode having a high degree of operation difficulty, instead of using a continuous hit with a large number of operations, for example, the operation unit is long-pressed, or the operation unit is tilted in a predetermined direction. Various applications are possible, such as operation according to rhythm and multiple timings.

  The first look-ahead effect executed by the look-ahead effect control means includes a first operation mode effect (non-short game state and time-short game state) that requires the player to operate the operation means in the first operation mode. The special figure hold effect scenarios “0031”, “0033”, “0035”, “0109”, “0111”, “0113”, “0531”, “0533” of the first special figure hold and the second special figure hold used in FIG. ”,“ 0535 ”,“ 0609 ”,“ 0611 ”,“ 0613 ”,“ 1031 ”,“ 1033 ”,“ 1035 ”,“ 1109 ”,“ 1111 ”,“ 1113 ”,“ 1531 ”,“ 1533 ”, (“1535”, “1609”, “1611”, “1613”) and the player is required to operate the operation means in a second operation mode that is more difficult to operate than the first operation mode. The second operation mode operation effect (the special figure hold effect scenarios “0034”, “0112”, “0534”, “0612”, “1034” of the first special figure hold used in the non-short-time game state and the short-time game state, “1112”, “1534”, “1612”).

  Regarding the first effect, the player is requested to operate the operation means based on the result of the determination by the prior determination means, and the display mode of the hold display is changed from the first mode to the first mode. As long as the condition of changing to the second mode having a different display mode from the first mode is satisfied, various applications are possible, limited to those shown in the first embodiment and the modification of the present invention.

  Further, for the second effect, during the execution of the variable display, the player is requested to operate the operation means, and thereafter, a notice relating to the result of the variable display is given, and the operation means is changed to the normal mode. Various conditions can be applied if the condition that the ratio of changing to the special mode is higher than the first effect is satisfied.

In the first embodiment and the modification of the present invention, the effect button 10A of the effect button device 10 is used as the operation means operated by the player. However, the operation means operated by the player includes a lever. Other operation means such as a touch panel, a hand-holding detection device using a light emitting element and a light receiving element may be used.
When levers are used as the operation means, various applications such as tilting operations with many operations, pulling the levers long, operating the levers according to rhythms and multiple timings are possible as the second operation mode with high operation difficulty It is.

  When using a touch panel as an operation means, the second operation mode with a high degree of operation difficulty includes various operations such as repeated hits with a large number of operations, operation of the touch panel in accordance with rhythm and multiple timings, writing of letters, numbers, etc. on the touch panel. Applicable.

  When a hand-holding detection device is used as the operation means, as a second operation mode with a high degree of operation difficulty, the hand-holding position is changed, the number of hand-holding is increased, and the hand-holding is performed in accordance with a rhythm or a plurality of timings. Various applications are possible.

  Further, as a combination of the first mode of the hold display and the first second mode, instead of using a combination of icons representing pachinko balls having different patterns (the normal mode and the special mode 1 shown in FIG. 84). In addition, various combinations such as combinations of icons having different colors and shapes, combinations of different letters and numbers, combinations of different characters, combinations of different effect processes, combinations of pachinko balls and characters, and the like can be applied.

(Second embodiment of the present invention)
Hereinafter, the second embodiment of the present invention FIGS. 106 and 107 relate to the second embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 106 shows the display state of the hold display area and the variable display corresponding display area in each gaming state. FIG. 107 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the game contents displayed on the effect display device 71 when the special figure holding effect scenario “0109” is selected.

  In the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 106, the hold display area (the first special figure hold display area 711 and the second special figure hold display area 712) has a game state of non-short game state, jackpot game state, and Displayed when in short-time gaming state. The variable display corresponding display area 713 is displayed when the gaming state is the non-short-time gaming state, and is not displayed when the gaming state is the short-time gaming state and the jackpot gaming state.

  An image that is displayed when the special figure holding effect scenario “0109” (see FIG. 54) is selected in the non-time-saving gaming state will be described.

(Special figure hold effect scenario “0109” of the first special figure hold used in non-time-saving gaming state)
In the special figure hold effect scenario “0109” of the first special figure hold used in the non-short-time gaming state, the reach result display screen 451 shown in FIG. 107 (a) is shown in FIGS. 84 to 88 and FIG. 89 (a). An image similar to that of the first embodiment shown is displayed.

FIG. 107 (b) is a display screen displaying that a predetermined time has elapsed from the state of FIG. 107 (a), the battle effect display period ends, and the game shifts to a jackpot game.
At this time, the character image 461 “big hit” is displayed in the display area of the first image display device 71. In the present embodiment, the display screen of FIG. 107 (b) is performed after the end of the effect time corresponding to the effect indication command of the variable display of the effect symbol 251 and is included in the effect time of the jackpot game. . FIG. 107 (c) is a display screen that displays that a big hit game has been played after a predetermined time has elapsed from the state of FIG. 107 (b).

  Here, in the display screens of FIGS. 107 (b) and 107 (c), a first special figure hold display area 711 and a second special figure hold display area 712 are set, and the non-short game state and the short game state are set. A hold display is performed in the same first special figure hold display area 711 and the second special figure hold display area 712. A frame image 721 is displayed around the first special figure hold display area 711, and a frame image 722 is displayed around the second special figure hold display area 712. The frame images 723 respectively corresponding to the variable display corresponding display area 713 displayed in FIG. 107 (a) are not displayed on the display screens of FIGS. 107 (b) and 107 (c).

  Here, in the second embodiment, when a game ball enters the first start port 21 or the first start port 22 during a big hit, a normal-type hold image is displayed, and the look-ahead feature shown in FIG. The figure hold effect determination process is performed, and after the jackpot game is ended, display control of the first special figure hold image and the second special figure hold image similar to the first embodiment is performed.

  In the second embodiment as well, in the non-time saving game state and the time saving game state, the start condition is set in the state where there is no holding information in the holding storage means, as in the first embodiment shown in FIGS. When established (a game ball wins in the special figure start winning area), it is possible to select an effect that changes the hold display corresponding to the hold information based on the win from the normal mode to the special mode, and the variable symbol display of the special symbol In the special game state in which the effect of the hold information can be sufficiently enhanced and the player's interest in satisfying the start condition is reduced, the start condition is satisfied without the hold information in the hold storage means. When the hold information based on the information is set as the change target, the display mode corresponding to the hold information is changed from the first mode to the second mode that is different from the first mode. The control for changing as, after the the special game state, is performed by the hold display or the variable display corresponding display, it is possible to perform efficient effect.

(Third embodiment of the present invention)
The third embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to FIGS.
108 to 111 relate to the third embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 108 illustrates a case where the game is in a non-short-time gaming state in the first special figure hold stored in the sub ROM 102b. 109 is a diagram showing an example of the special figure hold effect scenario determination table in the case of FIG. 109, FIG. 109 is a hit A (per hit 1: “high probability short time in the non-short-time gaming state in the first special figure hold stored in the sub-ROM 102b) FIG. 110 is a diagram showing an example of a special figure hold effect scenario determination table in the case of “per 1st long”), and FIG. 110 shows a loss (reach without reach) during the short-time gaming state in the first special figure hold stored in the sub ROM 102b. It is a figure showing an example of the special figure holding | maintenance effect scenario determination table in the case of (reach with reach). FIG. 111 shows a special figure on-holding effect scenario determination table in the case of winning A (winning 1: “per 1st long time with high probability”) during the short-time gaming state in the first special figure holding stored in the sub-ROM 102b. It is a figure showing an example.

  In the third embodiment of the present invention, in the non-time-saving gaming state, in the holding information in which the first special figure holding number (U1) = 1 is obtained by winning the game ball to the first starting port 21, FIG. 109, when the final mode of the hold information is set to a special mode (for example, the special figure hold effect scenario “0002” in FIG. 108, the special figure hold effect scenario “0102”, “0252” in FIG. 109). ”), The first special figure holding image 261 in the normal mode is always displayed in the first display unit 711a, and the first special figure variable display corresponding image in the variable display corresponding display area 713 changes from the normal mode to the special mode. When the final mode of the hold information is set to the normal mode by winning the game ball to the first start port 21 in the non-time-saving gaming state, the first display screen 711a in the normal mode is always displayed on the first display unit 711a. 261 is displayed, and the first special figure variable display compatible image is displayed in the normal display mode 713 in the variable display compatible display area 713.

  In the non-time-saving gaming state, in the holding information where the second special figure holding number (U2) = 1 due to the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 22, the final mode of the holding information is set to the special mode. In this case, the second special figure holding image 262 in the normal mode is always displayed on the first display unit 712a, and the second special figure variable display corresponding image in the variable display corresponding display area 713 changes from the normal mode to the special mode. . When the final mode of the hold information is set to the normal mode, the second special figure hold image 262 in the normal mode is always displayed on the second display unit 712a, and the second special map variable display is displayed in the variable display corresponding display area 713. The corresponding image is displayed in the normal mode. If the final mode of the hold information is set to the normal mode by winning the game ball to the second start port 22 in the non-short game state, the first display image 712a in the normal mode is always displayed on the first display unit 712a. 262 is displayed, and the second special figure variable display-corresponding image is displayed in the variable display-corresponding display area 713 in the normal mode.

  In the short-time gaming state, in the holding information in which the first special figure holding number (U1) = 1 by the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 21, the variable display is supported as shown in FIG. 110 and FIG. When the display area 713 is not displayed and the final mode of the hold information is set to the special mode, the first special figure hold image 261 in the normal mode is always displayed on the first display unit 711a. The display of the hold information is terminated (for example, the special figure hold effect scenario “1000” in FIG. 110, the special figure hold effect scenario “0110”, “1500” in FIG. 109). When the final mode of the hold information is set to the normal mode by winning the game ball to the first start port 21 in the short-time game state, the first display image 711a in the normal mode is always displayed on the first display unit 711a. 261 is displayed, and thereafter the display of the hold information is terminated.

  In the short-time gaming state, in the holding information where the second special figure holding number (U2) = 1 due to the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 22, the final mode of the holding information is set to the special mode. In this case, the first display unit 712a always displays the second special figure holding image 262 in the normal mode, and thereafter ends the display of the holding information. When the final mode of the hold information is set to the normal mode, the second display diagram 262 in the normal mode is always displayed on the second display unit 712a, and thereafter the display of the hold information is ended. When the final mode of the hold information is set to the normal mode by winning the game ball to the second start port 22 in the short-time game state, the first display unit 712a always has the second special figure hold image in the normal mode. 262 is displayed, and thereafter the display of the hold information is terminated.

  The configuration and operation of the above-described third embodiment of the present invention will be described together. The production control means determines whether or not the hold information is to be changed or not changed based on the result of the determination by the prior determination means. Hold information setting means for setting to any one of the objects, hold display control means for performing control to display the hold display in the hold display area corresponding to each of the hold information stored in the hold storage means, and hold storage means Variable display corresponding display control means for performing control to display in the variable display corresponding display area a hold display corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol being executed based on the hold information read out from.

  During the short-time gaming state, as shown in FIG. 110 and FIG. 111, the holding is based on the fact that the starting condition is satisfied (the game ball has won a prize in the special drawing start winning area) with no holding information in the holding storage means. When the information is set as the change target, the control for changing the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the hold information from the first mode to the second mode different from the first mode, As shown in FIGS. 108 and 109, the start condition is satisfied without holding information in the holding storage means, as shown in FIGS. 108 and 109, without performing in the holding display area and the variable display corresponding display area. When the hold information based on is set as the change target, the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the hold information is changed from the first mode to the second mode different from the first mode. A control that is not performed in the hold display area is performed in the variable display corresponding display area.

  Also in the third embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment shown in FIGS. 1 to 104, in the non-time-saving gaming state, the game ball is placed in the special drawing start winning area with no holding information in the holding storage means. When a prize is won (start condition is established), it is possible to select an effect of changing the hold display corresponding to the hold information based on the win from the normal mode to the special mode, and the effect of the special symbol variable display hold information Can be increased sufficiently.

(Fourth embodiment of the present invention)
Hereinafter, a fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 112 to 118.
112 to 118 relate to the fourth embodiment of the present invention, FIG. 112 is an explanatory diagram showing the display state of the hold display area and the variable display corresponding display area in each gaming state, and FIG. 113 is stored in the sub ROM 102b. FIG. 114 is a diagram illustrating an example of a special figure holding effect scenario determination table in the case of a loss (losing without reach, loss with reach) during a non-short-time gaming state in the stored second special figure hold. FIG. 114 is stored in the sub ROM 102b. 115 is a diagram illustrating an example of a special figure holding effect scenario determination table in the case of winning A (winning 1: “per 1st long time with high probability”) during the non-time-saving gaming state in the second special figure holding that is being held, FIG. Is a special figure holding effect display case in the case of a losing (losing without reach, losing with reach) during the short-time gaming state in the second special figure hold stored in the sub ROM 102b. Is a diagram illustrating an example of Rio determination table. FIG. 116 shows a special figure on-holding effect scenario determination table in the case of winning A (per hit 1: “per 1st long with high probability short-lived”) during the short-time gaming state in the second special figure hold stored in the sub-ROM 102b. FIG. 117 is a diagram illustrating an example, FIG. 117 is a first explanatory diagram illustrating game contents displayed on the effect display device 71, and FIG. 118 is a second explanatory diagram illustrating game content displayed on the effect display device 71. It is.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 112, the hold display areas (the first special figure hold display area 711 and the second special figure hold display area 712) are displayed when the gaming state is the non-short game state and the short time game state. Displayed and not displayed when in jackpot gaming state. The variable display corresponding display area 713 is displayed when the gaming state is the non-short-time gaming state and the short-time gaming state, and is not displayed when the big hit gaming state.

  In the fourth embodiment of the present invention, in the non-time-saving gaming state, in the holding information in which the first special figure holding number (U1) = 1 is obtained by winning the game ball to the first starting port 21, the holding is performed. When the final mode of the information is set to the special mode, the first special figure hold image 261 in the normal mode is always displayed on the first display unit 711a, and the first special map variable display compatible image is displayed in the variable display corresponding display area 713. Changes from a normal mode to a special mode. When the final mode of the hold information is set to the normal mode by winning the game ball to the first start port 21 in the non-time-saving gaming state, the first display screen 711a in the normal mode is always displayed on the first display unit 711a. 261 is displayed, and the first special figure variable display compatible image is displayed in the normal display mode 713 in the variable display compatible display area 713.

  As shown in FIG. 113 and FIG. 114, in the holding information in which the second special figure holding number (U2) = 1 is obtained due to the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 22 in the non-time-saving gaming state, as shown in FIGS. When the final mode of information is set to the special mode, the second special figure holding image 262 in the normal mode is always displayed on the first display unit 712a, and the second special map variable display is supported in the variable display corresponding display area 713. The image changes from the normal mode to the special mode (for example, the special figure holding effect scenario “0502” in FIG. 113, the special figure holding effect scenario “0602”, “0652” in FIG. 109). When the final mode of the hold information is set to the normal mode, the second special figure hold image 262 in the normal mode is always displayed on the second display unit 712a, and the second special map variable display is displayed in the variable display corresponding display area 713. The corresponding image is displayed in the normal mode. If the final mode of the hold information is set to the normal mode by winning the game ball to the second start port 22 in the non-short game state, the first display image 712a in the normal mode is always displayed on the first display unit 712a. 262 is displayed, and the second special figure variable display-corresponding image is displayed in the variable display-corresponding display area 713 in the normal mode.

  In the short-time gaming state, in the holding information where the first special figure holding number (U1) = 1 by the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 21, the final mode of the holding information is set to the special mode. In this case, the first special figure holding image 261 in the normal mode is always displayed on the first display unit 711a, and then the first special figure variable display corresponding image is displayed in the normal mode in the variable display corresponding display area 713. . When the final mode of the hold information is set to the normal mode by winning the game ball to the first start port 21 in the short-time game state, the first display image 711a in the normal mode is always displayed on the first display unit 711a. 261 is displayed, and then the first special figure variable display corresponding image is displayed in the normal display in the variable display corresponding display area 713.

  In the short-time gaming state, in the holding information where the second special figure holding number (U2) = 1 due to the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 22, as shown in FIG. 115 and FIG. When the final mode is set to the special mode, the second special figure holding image 262 in the normal mode is always displayed on the first display unit 712a, and then the second special map variable display is displayed in the variable display corresponding display area 713. Corresponding images are displayed in the normal mode (for example, special figure holding effect scenario “0500” in FIG. 113, special figure holding effect scenario “0600”, “0650” in FIG. 109). When the final mode of the hold information is set to the normal mode by winning the game ball to the second start port 22 in the short-time game state, the second display diagram 712a in the normal mode is always displayed on the second display unit 712a. 262 is displayed, and then the first special figure variable display corresponding image is displayed in the normal display in the variable display corresponding display area 713.

Next, image effects performed on the display screen of the first image display device 71 will be described with reference to FIGS. 117 to 118.
(Special figure reservation effect scenario “0500” for the first special figure hold used in the short-time gaming state)
First, during the display of the Nth special symbol variation, the second special figure hold number (U2) = 0 from the beginning, or the second special figure hold number (U2) = 0 from the state of the second start port 22 Assuming that a game ball enters the ball, the image shown in FIG. 117 (a) is displayed.

  In FIG. 117 (a), a left effect symbol 251a, a middle effect symbol 251b, and a right effect symbol 251c are variably displayed in the center of the display area of the first image display device 71. A small fourth display pattern 251d is displayed at the lower left of the display area 71. In the present embodiment, the variable display corresponding display area 713 is also displayed for the short-time game friends. In the variable display corresponding display area 713, a second special figure variable display compatible image (variable display compatible display image) 264 of a normal mode corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol being executed by winning the second starting port 22 is provided. It is displayed.

  When the game ball enters the second starting port 22 from the state shown in FIG. 117 (a) and the special mode 1 is selected as the final mode of the second special figure hold in the short-time game state (final mode data = When the special figure reservation effect scenario “0500” of the second special figure reservation used for “01H” is selected, as shown in FIG. 117 (b), the second special figure reservation image 262 in the normal mode at the time of the winning is shown. Is displayed on the first display unit 712a, and thereafter, the second special figure reserved image 262 in the normal mode displayed on the first display unit 712a does not change until it disappears.

  When the Nth special symbol variation display is completed, the second special diagram variable display corresponding image 264 disappears from the variable display corresponding display region 713, and as shown in FIG. 117 (c), the normal display mode is displayed from the first display unit 712a. The second special figure holding image 262 disappears and the second special figure variable display corresponding image 264 of the normal mode corresponding to the second special figure holding image 262 displayed on the first display unit 712a is a variable display corresponding display area 713. The (N + 1) th special symbol variation display is executed based on the start opening winning designation command corresponding to the second special figure reservation image 262 that is newly displayed and displayed on the first display unit 712a.

  In the (N + 1) th special symbol variation display, the second special figure variable display of the normal mode displayed in the variable display corresponding display area 713 even though the special mode 1 is selected as the final mode of the second special figure hold. The corresponding image 264 is displayed as it is, and the effect symbols 251a, 251b, 251c, and 251d are variably displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 118 (a), the production symbols 251a, 251b, and 251c are stopped and displayed in combination with the loss, and, as shown in FIG. 2 Special figure variable display corresponding image 264 disappears.

  The configuration and operation of the embodiment of the present invention described above will be described collectively. As shown in FIGS. 115 and 116, the start is performed in the state where there is no holding information in the holding storage means during the short-time gaming state. When the hold information based on the established condition is set as the change target, the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the hold information is changed from the first mode to the second mode that is different from the first mode. The control to change the mode is not performed in the hold display area and the variable display corresponding display area, and there is no hold information in the hold storage means as shown in FIGS. 113 and 114 during the non-time saving game state When the hold information based on the establishment of the start condition is set as the change target, the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the hold information is changed from the first mode to the first mode. The control for changing to a different second aspect of the display mode is not performed in the hold display area is performed in the variable display corresponding display area.

  In the fourth embodiment as well, in the non-time saving game state and the time saving game state, the start condition is set in the state where there is no holding information in the holding storage means, similarly to the first embodiment shown in FIGS. When established, it is possible to select an effect of changing the hold display corresponding to the hold information based on the winning from the normal mode to the special mode, and it is possible to sufficiently enhance the effect by the variable information hold display of the special symbol.

  In the first to fourth embodiments of the present invention, the hold image (first special figure hold image, second special figure hold image) is changed from the normal mode to the special mode in a state where no button operation request is made. In this case, when the display start of the hold display area (the first special figure hold display area, the second special figure hold display area) or the display portion of the hold display area is shifted, the hold image in the normal mode is displayed for a short time. The reserved image is changed from the normal mode to the special mode later. However, the reserved image may be displayed in a special mode at the same time when the display of the reserved display area is started or the display unit is shifted. .

  In the first to fourth embodiments of the present invention, the variable display compatible image (first special figure variable display compatible image, second special figure variable display compatible image) is changed when changing from the normal mode to the special mode. A display image in a normal mode is displayed for a short time at the start of display in a display-compatible display area (a special map variable display-compatible display area, a special map variable display-compatible display area), and then the variable display-corresponding image is changed from a normal mode to a special mode. However, it may be configured such that the variable display-compatible image is displayed in a special mode simultaneously with the start of display in the variable display-compatible display area.

  In the first to fourth embodiments of the present invention, the image corresponding to the hold information (first special figure hold image, second special figure hold image, first special figure variable display compatible image, second special figure variable) The display-corresponding image is configured to be switched directly from the hold display area (first special figure hold display area 711, first special figure hold display area 712) to the area (variable display corresponding display area 713). As a modification, during the period during which the display area of the image corresponding to the hold information is switched from the hold display area to the area, the preparation hold effect (the display mode of the image corresponding to the hold information displayed in the area is changed). You may comprise so that the production | presentation regarding a change) may be performed.

  As the preparation hold effect, for example, various effects such as an effect suggesting a change in the display mode of the image corresponding to the hold information and an effect of changing the display mode of the image corresponding to the hold information can be applied. In addition, when the preparation hold effect is executed, as a later effect, the display mode of the image corresponding to the hold information is changed with high probability in the variable display corresponding display area 713. Various applications are possible, such as changing the display mode.

  In the first to fourth embodiments of the present invention, in the short-time gaming state and the non-short-time gaming state, there is no storage of holding information and no change display of special symbols is performed on the start ports 21 and 22. When a game ball wins, the hold information is held for a short time, and an image corresponding to the hold information is displayed in the hold display areas (first special figure hold display area 711 and first special figure hold display area 712). The first special figure hold image and the second special figure hold image) are displayed for a short time, but instead of displaying the image corresponding to the hold information in the hold display area, the above-described preparation hold effect is performed. Also good.

  Further, as in the first embodiment, when it is configured not to display the hold during the jackpot game (see FIG. 51), the hold information having the highest priority stored in the hold storage area during the jackpot is displayed. Instead of displaying in the hold display area in the game state after the jackpot game ends, the above-described preparation hold effect may be performed.

  In addition, the display mode of the image corresponding to the hold information is different in color or pattern (blue, green, red, zebra pattern, rainbow, etc.), different in shape (circle, triangle, square, flame, character difference, etc.) , Modes with different movements (differences in blinking intervals, differences in intensity of vibration, differences in flickering flames, etc.), modes with different brightness (dark, medium, bright, etc.), modes with different effects (blue aura on background) , Red aura on background, sparkle on background, etc.), different display characters (chance, hot, intense heat, finalized, etc.), etc. are applicable.

  Moreover, it is also possible to use the light emission of the lamp as the display mode of the hold display and to change the light emission color or the light emission pattern of the lamp as the display mode change.

  As a modification, a sound effect may be generated when a game ball wins at the start ports 21 and 22 or when the display mode of the image corresponding to the hold information changes.

  As an example of generating such a sound effect, for example, the display mode in which there is a high possibility that the image corresponding to the hold information will win the jackpot is changed, depending on the presence / absence or type of the sound effect according to the pre-determined result of the hold information In this case, various applications are possible, such as generating a loud sound or a sound effect that makes the player feel a special state (for example, thunder, speech, or cuin sound).

  Furthermore, it is also possible to use a sound to change the display mode of the hold display. As such an example, for example, a case where a game ball wins at the start ports 21 and 22 is set as the first sound and corresponds to the hold information. When the display mode of the image changes, the sound effect can be the second sound, and the second sound can be different from the first sound.

◆ (Appendix 1)
Conventionally, as a gaming machine, a game medium such as a game medium is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when the game medium enters (wins) a winning area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a predetermined number of prizes are awarded. Some prize media such as balls are given to players. In addition, a variable display device is provided that can variably display identification information (also referred to as “variation”) when a game medium wins in a predetermined winning area (start winning opening) (start condition is established). There are some which are configured to be controllable to a specific game state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the specific display result (big hit symbol).

  A game in which variable display cannot be started, such as when variable display is being executed in the variable display device, and when the start condition is satisfied, the variable display is held and stored, and the hold display for specifying the hold is performed. A machine has also been proposed. Also, a gaming machine that executes a notice effect by changing the display mode of such a hold display in accordance with the player's operation on the operating means has been put into practical use.

  Further, as an effect corresponding to the pre-reading notice pattern by the pre-reading of the variable display hold (display mode of the hold display), when the operation corresponding to the pre-reading notice pattern and the current operation stage is performed on the operation unit, There has also been proposed a gaming machine that causes the player to recognize that the operation corresponding to the pre-reading notice pattern is being executed by executing an effect that vibrates the operation means (for example, JP 2012-231295 A). ).

  Since the gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-231295 can control the effect of the pre-reading notice pattern in either the short-time gaming state or the non-short-time gaming state, the special symbol can be variably displayed in the short-time gaming state. The probability that a short time is selected as the variation time is high, and in the short variation time, the time during which the operation of the operation means is valid corresponding to the prefetch notice pattern is shortened. If the player does not notice or the player's operation is not in time for the operation period of the operation means, etc., there is a high possibility that an effect due to the operation of the operation means corresponding to the pre-reading notice pattern cannot be performed, and the player feels uncomfortable. There was a problem.

  In view of the above background, the first to fourth embodiments and the modifications thereof have a pre-read notice pattern for a player in a gaming machine capable of controlling a short-time gaming state and a non-short-time state. For the purpose of providing a gaming machine that can make it less likely to cause discomfort in the corresponding operation, it is possible to enter a game ball flowing down the game area, which is advantageous to the player in the first state that is disadvantageous to the player Based on the special figure starting area that changes to the second state and the game ball entering the special figure starting area, a plurality of types of special symbols that can be distinguished from each other are variably displayed and the display result is derived. Special figure variable display means for displaying, special game control means for controlling a special game state advantageous to a player when a special display result predetermined in the special figure variable display means is derived, and the special figure A game ball enters the starting area With respect to the variable display of the special symbol that has not yet been started, the storage unit for storing information for determining whether or not to obtain the special display result as the storage information within a predetermined upper limit storage number range, and the special symbol Starting time determining means for determining whether or not the display result of variable display of the special symbol is the special display result based on the holding information read from the holding storage means when starting the variable display of Prior to determining whether or not the variable display of the special symbol based on the hold information generated based on the game ball entering the special figure starting area becomes the special display result before the determination by the start time determining means A plurality of types of normal symbols that can be identified based on the determination means, a normal start area where a game ball flowing down the game area can enter, and a game ball entering the normal start area of A variable map display means for performing a variable display and deriving and displaying a display result; and when a predetermined display result is derived in the general map variable display means, the special figure starting area is moved from the first state to the first state. Auxiliary game control means for controlling the auxiliary game state to be changed into two states, an operation means operated by the player, and a prefetch effect that suggests the result of the determination by the prior determination means when a predetermined condition is satisfied A pre-reading effect control means for controlling the pre-reading effect control means, and for the pre-reading effect controlled by the pre-reading effect control means, the player is requested to operate the operation means, and then the pre-determination means performs the operation. A first pre-reading effect that suggests the result of the determination and a second pre-reading effect that suggests the result of the determination by the prior determination means without requiring the player to operate the operation means are included. , In the period from the end of the special gaming state to the elapse of a predetermined period, the number of executions per unit time of the special symbol variable display by the special figure variable display means, and the normal by the normal figure variable display means It is possible to generate a short-time gaming state in which the number of executions per unit time of variable display of symbols is increased as compared to the non-short-time gaming state, and the pre-reading effect control means can perform the above-mentioned in both the short-time gaming state and the non-short-time gaming state. The first prefetch effect can be controlled, and the non-short game state has a higher ratio of controlling the first prefetch effect than the short time game state. .

  In addition, in the first to fourth embodiments and the gaming machines of these modified examples, the first pre-reading effect executed by the pre-reading effect control unit is used by the player in the first operation mode. A first operation mode effect that requires operation, and a second operation mode operation effect that requires the player to operate the operation means in a second operation mode that is more difficult to operate than the first operation mode. The pre-reading effect control means is more likely to control the second operation mode in the non-short game state than in the short-time game state, and more in the non-short game state than in the short-time game state. However, the ratio of performing the control of the first operation mode is low.

  As a result, in the first to fourth embodiments and the modifications thereof, in the gaming machine capable of controlling the short-time gaming state and the non-short-time state, a pre-reading notice pattern is provided to the player. It is possible to make it difficult to make the corresponding operation uncomfortable.

◇ (Appendix 2)
Conventionally, as a gaming machine, a game ball (game medium) is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when a game medium enters a prize area (winning) such as a prize opening provided in the game area, Some prize media such as prize balls are given to players. Furthermore, based on the fact that the game ball has won (starting condition is established) in a predetermined winning area (starting winning opening), a variable display (“variation”) of a plurality of types of special symbols (identification information) that can be distinguished from each other. Special display variable display means for deriving and displaying the display result, and when a special display result (big hit symbol) predetermined in the special map variable display means is derived, a non-special game for the player Some control the special gaming state more advantageous than the state.

  In addition, when a variable display cannot be started, such as when the variable display is being executed in the special figure variable display means, and a game ball is won in the predetermined prize area, the game ball is won in the predetermined prize area. For variable display of special symbols that have not yet started, information for determining whether or not to obtain the specific display result is stored as hold information in the hold storage means within a predetermined upper limit storage number, and There is one that displays a hold display corresponding to each of the hold information stored in the hold storage means.

  Further, when starting the variable display of the special symbol, the variable display corresponding display means for displaying the hold display corresponding to the variable display as a variable display corresponding display in a predetermined area, and the hold stored in the hold storage means Predetermining means for deciding whether or not to change the display result of variable display to the specific display result based on information, and based on the determination result of the predetermination means, the hold display, or the There has also been proposed a gaming machine that changes the display mode of the variable display corresponding display to a mode different from the normal mode at a predetermined timing (for example, JP-A-2014-113174).

  The gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-113174 responds to the hold information based on the winning when the start condition is satisfied (the game ball wins in the special drawing start winning area) with no holding information in the holding storage means. Since the variable display of the special symbol is started without always changing the hold display from the normal mode, the production effect by the hold information of the variable symbol special display has not been sufficiently enhanced.

  In view of the above background, the first embodiment, the second embodiment, and these modifications are intended to provide a gaming machine that can sufficiently enhance the effect of the special symbol variable display hold information. Based on the fact that the start condition is satisfied, the variation display result is displayed after the variation display is executed by the production means, and the variation display result is a special variation display result that is advantageous to the player. A game machine that is controlled to be in a gaming state, and information for determining whether or not to make the specific variation display result for the variation display for which the start condition is satisfied but has not yet been started is set as hold information. A hold storage means for storing within the range of the upper limit storage number, a pre-determination means for determining whether or not the fluctuation display based on the hold information becomes the specific fluctuation display result, and control of the production Output control means, and in a period from the end of the special gaming state to a lapse of a predetermined period, the time-saving gaming state in which the number of executions per unit time of the variable display is increased as compared to the non-time-saving gaming state. The hold control setting means for setting the hold information as either a change target or a non-change target based on a result of the determination by the prior determination means; A hold display control means for performing a control to display a hold display corresponding to each of the hold information stored in the means, and a variable display corresponding to the variable display being executed by the hold information read from the hold storage means Variable display corresponding display control means for performing control to display the corresponding display, and during the non-time saving gaming state, displaying the hold display and the variable display corresponding display, During the state, the hold display is displayed, the display corresponding to the variable display is not displayed, and the hold condition is based on the fact that the start condition is satisfied in the non-time saving gaming state where there is no hold information in the hold storage means When the information is set as the change target, control for changing the display mode corresponding to the hold information from the first mode to the second mode different from the first mode is the hold display or When the hold information based on the fact that the start condition is established in a state where there is no hold information in the hold storage means and the change information is set in the time-saving gaming state, the hold information is set. Control to change the display mode corresponding to is changed from the first mode to the second mode is performed in the hold display.

  By doing in this way, in 1st Embodiment, 2nd Embodiment, and these modifications, the production effect by the hold information of the variable display of a special symbol can fully be improved.

◆ (Appendix 3)
Conventionally, as a gaming machine, a game ball (game medium) is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when a game medium enters a prize area (winning) such as a prize opening provided in the game area, Some prize media such as prize balls are given to players. Furthermore, based on the fact that the game ball has won (starting condition is established) in a predetermined winning area (starting winning opening), a variable display (“variation”) of a plurality of types of special symbols (identification information) that can be distinguished from each other. Special display variable display means for deriving and displaying the display result, and when a special display result (big hit symbol) predetermined in the special map variable display means is derived, a non-special game for the player Some control the special gaming state more advantageous than the state.

  In addition, when a variable display cannot be started, such as when the variable display is being executed in the special figure variable display means, and a game ball is won in the predetermined prize area, the game ball is won in the predetermined prize area. For variable display of special symbols that have not yet started, information for determining whether or not to obtain the specific display result is stored as hold information in the hold storage means within a predetermined upper limit storage number, and There is one that displays a hold display corresponding to each of the hold information stored in the hold storage means.

  Further, when starting the variable display of the special symbol, the variable display corresponding display means for displaying the hold display corresponding to the variable display as a variable display corresponding display in a predetermined area, and the hold stored in the hold storage means Predetermining means for deciding whether or not to change the display result of variable display to the specific display result based on information, and based on the determination result of the predetermination means, the hold display, or the There has also been proposed a gaming machine that changes the display mode of the variable display corresponding display to a mode different from the normal mode at a predetermined timing (for example, JP-A-2014-113174).

  The gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-113174 responds to the hold information based on the winning when the start condition is satisfied (the game ball wins in the special drawing start winning area) with no holding information in the holding storage means. Since the variable display of the special symbol is started without always changing the hold display from the normal mode, the production effect by the hold information of the variable symbol special display has not been sufficiently enhanced.

  In view of the above-mentioned background, the third and fourth embodiments have established a start condition for the purpose of providing a gaming machine capable of sufficiently enhancing the effect of the special symbol variable display hold information. Based on the game machine, the variation display result is displayed after the variation display is executed by the effect means, and when the variation display result is a specific variation display result, the gaming machine is controlled to a special gaming state advantageous to the player. Within the range of a predetermined upper limit storage number, the information for determining whether or not to make the specific variation display result for the variation display that has been established but has not yet been started is held information. A holding storage means for storing, a prior determination means for determining whether or not the fluctuation display based on the hold information becomes the specific fluctuation display result, and an effect control means for controlling the effect, In the period from the end of the special gaming state to the elapse of a predetermined period, it is possible to generate a short-time gaming state in which the number of executions per unit time of the variable display is increased as compared to the non-short-time gaming state, and the effect control means Is based on the result of the determination by the prior determination means, the hold information setting means for setting the hold information as either a change target or a non-change target, and the hold information stored in the hold storage means A hold display control means for performing control to display a hold display in a hold display area corresponding to each, and a hold display corresponding to the variable display being executed according to the hold information read from the hold storage means Variable display corresponding display control means for performing control to display in the area, and in the short-time gaming state, the start condition in the state where there is no hold information in the hold storage means When the hold information based on the establishment is set as the change target, the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the hold information is changed from the first mode to the second mode different from the first mode. The hold information based on the fact that the start condition is satisfied without holding information in the holding storage means during the non-time saving gaming state without performing the control to be changed in the holding display area and the variable display corresponding display area. Is set as the change target, the control for changing the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the hold information from the first mode to the second mode different from the first mode is set to the hold mode. It is not performed in the display area, but is performed in the display area corresponding to the variable display.

  By doing in this way, in the 3rd and 4th embodiment, the production effect by the reservation information of variable display of special symbols can be heightened enough.

◆ (Appendix 4)
Conventionally, as a gaming machine, a game ball (game medium) is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when a game medium enters a prize area (winning) such as a prize opening provided in the game area, Some prize media such as prize balls are given to players. Furthermore, based on the fact that the game ball has won (starting condition is established) in a predetermined winning area (starting winning opening), a variable display (“variation”) of a plurality of types of special symbols (identification information) that can be distinguished from each other. Special display variable display means for deriving and displaying the display result, and when a special display result (big hit symbol) predetermined in the special map variable display means is derived, a non-special game for the player Some control the special gaming state more advantageous than the state.

  In addition, when a variable display cannot be started, such as when the variable display is being executed in the special figure variable display means, and a game ball is won in the predetermined prize area, the game ball is won in the predetermined prize area. For variable display of special symbols that have not yet started, information for determining whether or not to obtain the specific display result is stored as hold information in the hold storage means within a predetermined upper limit storage number, and There is one that displays a hold display corresponding to each of the hold information stored in the hold storage means.

  Further, when starting the variable display of the special symbol, the variable display corresponding display means for displaying the hold display corresponding to the variable display as a variable display corresponding display in a predetermined area, and the hold stored in the hold storage means Predetermining means for deciding whether or not to change the display result of variable display to the specific display result based on information, and based on the determination result of the predetermination means, the hold display, or the There has also been proposed a gaming machine that changes the display mode of the variable display corresponding display to a mode different from the normal mode at a predetermined timing (for example, JP-A-2014-113174).

  The gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-113174 responds to the hold information based on the winning when the start condition is satisfied (the game ball wins in the special drawing start winning area) with no holding information in the holding storage means. Since the variable display of the special symbol is started without always changing the hold display from the normal mode, the production effect by the hold information of the variable symbol special display has not been sufficiently enhanced.

  In view of the above background, the first embodiment, the second embodiment, and these modifications are intended to provide a gaming machine that can sufficiently enhance the effect of the special symbol variable display hold information. Based on the fact that the start condition is satisfied, the variation display result is displayed after the variation display is executed by the production means, and the variation display result is a special variation display result that is advantageous to the player. A game machine that is controlled to be in a gaming state, and information for determining whether or not to make the specific variation display result for the variation display for which the start condition is satisfied but has not yet been started is set as hold information. A hold storage means for storing within the range of the upper limit storage number, a pre-determination means for determining whether or not the fluctuation display based on the hold information becomes the specific fluctuation display result, and control of the production Output control means, and in a period from the end of the special gaming state to a lapse of a predetermined period, the time-saving gaming state in which the number of executions per unit time of the variable display is increased as compared to the non-time-saving gaming state. The hold control setting means for setting the hold information as either a change target or a non-change target based on a result of the determination by the prior determination means; A hold display control means for performing a control to display a hold display corresponding to each of the hold information stored in the means, and a variable display corresponding to the variable display being executed by the hold information read from the hold storage means Variable display corresponding display control means for performing control to display the corresponding display, and during the non-time saving gaming state, displaying the hold display and the variable display corresponding display, During the state, the hold display is displayed, the display corresponding to the variable display is not displayed, and the hold condition is based on the fact that the start condition is satisfied in the non-time saving gaming state where there is no hold information in the hold storage means When the information is set as the change target, control for changing the display mode corresponding to the hold information from the first mode to the second mode different from the first mode is the hold display or When the hold information based on the fact that the start condition is established in a state where there is no hold information in the hold storage means and the change information is set in the time-saving gaming state, the hold information is set. Control to change the display mode corresponding to the above-described first mode to the second mode is performed in the on-hold display, and the on-hold storage means holds on the special gaming state. When the hold information based on the establishment of the start condition in the absence of information is set as the change target, the display mode corresponding to the hold information is changed from the first mode to the first mode and the display mode. Control to change to a different second mode is performed in the hold display or the variable display corresponding display after the special gaming state.

  By doing in this way, in 1st Embodiment, 2nd Embodiment, and these modifications, the production effect by the hold information of the variable display of a special symbol can fully be improved.

◆ (Appendix 5)
Conventionally, as a gaming machine, a game ball (game medium) is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when a game medium enters a prize area (winning) such as a prize opening provided in the game area, Some prize media such as prize balls are given to players. Furthermore, based on the fact that the game ball has won (starting condition is established) in a predetermined winning area (starting winning opening), a variable display (“variation”) of a plurality of types of special symbols (identification information) that can be distinguished from each other. Special display variable display means for deriving and displaying the display result, and when a special display result (big hit symbol) predetermined in the special map variable display means is derived, a non-special game for the player Some control the special gaming state more advantageous than the state.

  In addition, when a variable display cannot be started, such as when the variable display is being executed in the special figure variable display means, and a game ball is won in the predetermined prize area, the game ball is won in the predetermined prize area. For variable display of special symbols that have not yet started, information for determining whether or not to obtain the specific display result is stored as hold information in the hold storage means within a predetermined upper limit storage number, and There is one that displays a hold display corresponding to each of the hold information stored in the hold storage means.

  Further, when starting the variable display of the special symbol, the variable display corresponding display means for displaying the hold display corresponding to the variable display as a variable display corresponding display in a predetermined area, and the hold stored in the hold storage means Predetermining means for deciding whether or not to change the display result of variable display to the specific display result based on information, and based on the determination result of the predetermination means, the hold display, or the There has also been proposed a gaming machine that changes the display mode of the variable display corresponding display to a mode different from the normal mode at a predetermined timing (for example, JP-A-2014-113174).

  The gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-113174 responds to the hold information based on the winning when the start condition is satisfied (the game ball wins in the special drawing start winning area) with no holding information in the holding storage means. Since the variable display of the special symbol is started without always changing the hold display from the normal mode, the production effect by the hold information of the variable symbol special display has not been sufficiently enhanced.

  In view of the above background, the first embodiment, the second embodiment, and these modifications are intended to provide a gaming machine that can sufficiently enhance the effect of the special symbol variable display hold information. Based on the fact that the start condition is satisfied, the variation display result is displayed after the variation display is executed by the production means, and the variation display result is a special variation display result that is advantageous to the player. A game machine that is controlled to be in a gaming state, and information for determining whether or not to make the specific variation display result for the variation display for which the start condition is satisfied but has not yet been started is set as hold information. A hold storage means for storing within the range of the upper limit storage number, a pre-determination means for determining whether or not the fluctuation display based on the hold information becomes the specific fluctuation display result, and control of the production Output control means, the production control means, based on the result of the determination by the prior determination means, the hold information setting means for setting the hold information as either a change target or a non-change target, A holding display control unit configured to perform a control to display a holding display corresponding to each of the holding information stored in the holding storage unit, and the control by the holding display control unit changes a display mode of the holding display; The first mode is changed to a second mode that is different from the first mode, and the second mode is changed to the first mode and the third mode is different from the second mode. And a second control for changing the display mode of the hold display from the first mode to the third mode, wherein the effect control means is the hold storage means. With the hold information on When the hold information based on the establishment of the condition is set as the change target, the first control and the second control corresponding to the hold information can be executed, and the hold information is stored in the hold storage unit. The first control corresponding to the hold information cannot be executed when hold information based on the establishment of the start condition in the absence of the change is set as the change target.

  By doing in this way, in 1st Embodiment, 2nd Embodiment, and these modifications, the production effect by the hold information of the variable display of a special symbol can fully be improved.

Y gaming machine 21 first start port 21a first start port detection sensor 22 second start port 22a second start port detection sensor 23 first big prize port 23a first big prize port detection sensor 24 second big prize port 24a second First prize display sensor 71 First image display device 72 Second image display device

Gaming machine of the invention described in claim 1, based on the starting condition is satisfied, it displays the variable display results after executing the variable display by the presentation unit, the variable display results in a particular variable display results A game machine that controls to a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player when there is, whether or not the variation display that has satisfied the start condition but has not yet started is the specific variation display result. and hold storage means for storing within a predetermined upper limit number of stored as information pending information for determining, variable display based on the suspension information is judged determination Priority determination means whether the said particular variable display results And an effect control means for controlling the effect, and during the period from the end of the special gaming state to the elapse of a predetermined period, the number of executions per unit time of the variable display is set to be less than the non-time-saving gaming state. Is capable of generating time reduction gaming state to increase, the effect control means, in response to each of the reserved information stored before Symbol hold storage means, said variable display based on the respective suspension information is started In a mode related to the hold display displayed in the hold display area corresponding to the hold information, the hold display is displayed in the hold display area until the variable display based on the hold information is started. Based on the result of the determination by the determination means , the hold display control means for controlling the display of the hold display corresponding to the hold information in the variable display corresponding display area, the hold display from the first display mode to the first display and a display form change control means capable of changing in a different second display mode the display mode of the display mode change control means, wherein the start condition is in the state hold information is not in the prior SL hold storage means Standing the case, changing the hold display of the display mode corresponding to the suspension information from said first display form on the second display mode, the hold display region and the variable display in the time reduction gaming state without the corresponding display region, wherein the non-time-shortening gaming state and performs before Symbol varying display corresponding display region without in the hold display area.

Claims (1)

Based on the establishment of the start condition, the variation display result is displayed after the variation display is executed by the rendering means, and the special gaming state is advantageous to the player when the variation display result is a specific variation display result. A gaming machine to control
Hold for storing, as hold information, information for determining whether or not to use the specific change display result for the change display that has been established but has not yet been started, as a hold information. Storage means;
Pre-determination means for determining whether or not the variable display based on the hold information is the specific variable display result;
Production control means for performing production control;
With
In a period from the end of the special gaming state to the elapse of a predetermined period, it is possible to generate a short-time gaming state in which the number of executions per unit time of the variable display is increased from a non-short-time gaming state,
The production control means includes
On-hold information setting means for setting the hold information as either a change target or a non-change target based on the result of the determination by the prior determination means;
A hold display control means for performing control to display a hold display in a hold display area corresponding to each of the hold information stored in the hold storage means;
Fluctuation display corresponding display control means for performing control to display in the variable display corresponding display area a hold display corresponding to the variable display being executed by the hold information read from the hold storage means;
With
In the time-saving gaming state, when the hold information based on the start condition being satisfied in the state where there is no hold information in the hold storage means is set as the change target, the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the hold information The control to change the first mode from the first mode to the second mode different from the first mode is not performed in the hold display area and the variable display corresponding display area,
In the non-time-saving game state, when the hold information based on the start condition being satisfied in the state where there is no hold information in the hold storage means is set as the change target, the display of the hold display corresponding to the hold information Control in which the mode is changed from the first mode to the second mode, which is different from the first mode, is performed not in the hold display area but in the display area corresponding to the variable display. Machine.